Welcome to AvantStay! We believe you deserve so much more than an ordinary short-term vacation rental experience. But what makes AvantStay different? We’re all about what you can dream. Every travel experience should be one-of-a-kind, delightful, and stress-free. We shine with our attention to detail, commitment to customer service, hotel-quality amenities, and upgrades and experiences that help ensure every stay with us is more memorable than the last. In choosing us, you’re not just choosing another short-term rental company—you’re choosing an elevated experience.
Homes Catered To Groups
We have homes of all types, but most of our homes are best experienced with friends and family. Large We have homes of all types, but most of our homes are best experienced with friends and family. Large dining areas, state-of-the-art kitchens, and yards great for gatherings make getting together with all your loved ones a breeze. Plus, plenty of bedrooms (many with their own bathrooms) means no one’s sleeping on the couch this time.
An Elevated Experience
With luxurious upgrades and experiences available at the touch of a button, you can let your imagination run wild when it comes to trip activities. To start, our app gives you front-row access to services you would expect at a five-star hotel — in-room massages, mid-stay cleanings, and private transportation. But, when you stay with us, the sky’s the limit! From booking a private chef to prepare dinner for the family, to pre-stocking your fridge with groceries before you arrive, the AvantStay app makes it easier than ever to make your vacation dreams a reality.
Award-Winning Design
As travelers ourselves, we know how crucial the interior design of a home can be when planning the vacation of your dreams. We’ve actually built an in-house interior design team. And it’s not just any interior design team—they’ve actually won awards for it, including best design from Marriott Homes & Villas in 2021. We make sure our homes match the vibe of your trip, whether it be on the coast or in the woods, so you’re fully immersed in the magic of your vacation.
Our homes are also decked out with amenities, so you’ll never be sitting around wondering what to do next. From cornhole to board games, from billiards to the hot tub, we believe fun comes in all shapes and sizes and is best experienced with your loved ones. The amenities for each home are different (our estates collection has some truly awe-inspiring ones), but we can promise that you will never be bored.
Customer Service By Humans, For Humans
Our dedicated area managers are here to make sure your experience is delightful. We also have team members available 24/7, so even if you need something in the middle of the night, we’re there to help. That way, you aren’t at the whim of the homeowner’s availability and you won’t get a computer trying to help you in a crisis. We want every aspect of your experience to be as relaxing as possible, because that’s why you go on vacation in the first place.
Happy Homeowners
On top of the personal relationship we keep with our guests, we also take deep care and thoughtful steps to ensure our homeowners feel proud and reassured when their property is in our hands.
We pride ourselves on:
Best-in-class in-field operations
Smart-home technology to keep our homes and guests safe
Complimentary updated interior design
A proprietary software platform that manages it all and keeps homeowners informed
We care for these homes as though they were our own (some are even employee-owned), and we continue to build and grow sustainably to build value for our homeowners. If you’re interested in partnering with us, you can learn more about our Vacation Rental Management.
While most of our properties are homes designed for group travel as mentioned above, we also have cozier rentals and even boutique hotels, because sometimes you just want to get away without the crowd. Most importantly, we’re ever-growing to fit the needs of the modern-day traveler, meaning we’re adding new properties in new destinations all the time.
Utah is a state of contrasts, from stunning red rock landscapes to snow-covered mountains, offering outdoor adventures that few places can match. Visitors come year-round to explore its natural beauty, unique cities, and countless activities. Whether you’re wandering desert valleys or alpine peaks, every corner of Utah tells a story.
The cities themselves make excellent bases for exploring the surrounding attractions while offering their own character. Salt Lake City, the state capital, combines rich history with vibrant culture. And Park City brings world-class skiing and renowned film festivals to the mountains.
Utah’s Top Destinations
Ready to start planning your Utah getaway? Book your stay at AvantStay properties in Utah for comfortable accommodations near the state’s top attractions. Here’s a guide to help you choose the best spots to visit:
Utah became the 45th state on January 4, 1896, after nearly five decades as a territory. Its long journey to statehood stemmed from disagreements between federal authorities and local leaders. Despite the delays, Utahns built thriving communities across the desert landscape.
The state’s name likely honors the Ute tribe, meaning “people of the mountains,” though some scholars suggest it comes from an Apache word for “those that are higher up.” From ancient times to today, Utah’s towering peaks have shaped life here.
Mormon pioneers, led by Brigham Young, arrived in the Salt Lake Valley in 1847, designing irrigation systems that turned dry land into productive farms. Long before European contact, Native peoples like the Ute, Paiute, Shoshone, Goshute, and Navajo tribes thrived here. Ancient groups such as the Anasazi left behind cliff dwellings that continue to fascinate modern visitors.
The completion of the transcontinental railroad at Promontory Summit in 1869 transformed Utah, attracting settlers and shaping the state’s economy. Today, tourism, technology, and outdoor recreation define Utah’s vibrant economy.
Utah’s Mighty Five National Parks
Utah’s five stunning national parks—Zion, Bryce Canyon, Arches, Canyonlands, and Capitol Reef—offer incredible red rock landscapes and outdoor adventures year-round. From hiking scenic trails to photographing dramatic canyons, these natural wonders make Utah a bucket-list destination for nature lovers.
Zion National Park
Zion Canyon showcases towering sandstone cliffs carved by the Virgin River over millions of years. Famous trails like Angels Landing and The Narrows draw hikers from around the world, with shuttle access available most of the year.
Scenic drives, accessible paths like Pa’rus Trail, and iconic routes like the Zion–Mount Carmel Highway offer incredible views. With Springdale at the entrance and year-round access, it’s one of the most visited parks in the U.S., making advance planning essential.
With Fiery Furnace hikes requiring permits and summer heat often above 100°F, spring and fall make the best times to visit. Close to Moab’s amenities, the park offers dramatic red rock scenery with sunrise and sunset lighting up the formations.
Trails such as Queens Garden and Navajo Loop take visitors among the formations, while the park’s high elevation brings cooler summers and snowy winters. Its clear night skies and scenic overlooks make Bryce a year-round favorite.
The Needles and The Maze provide deeper backcountry experiences, with White Rim Road offering challenging overland travel. With fewer visitors than other Utah parks, Canyonlands delivers wide-open views and a true sense of wilderness.
Capitol Reef National Park
Capitol Reef National Park‘s defining feature is the Waterpocket Fold, a 100-mile geological wrinkle forming cliffs, canyons, and colorful layers. The historic Fruita area preserves pioneer orchards, scenic drives, and ancient petroglyphs.
Hiking trails like Hickman Bridge and backroads to Cathedral Valley offer stunning views with fewer crowds than other parks. With Torrey nearby for lodging and exceptionally dark skies, Capitol Reef is perfect for quiet exploration.
Top Cities and Towns to Discover in Utah
Beyond the parks, Utah’s charming cities and towns blend outdoor recreation with local culture and history. Explore Park City’s mountain town vibes, Salt Lake City’s urban attractions, or Moab’s adventure sports scene for unforgettable experiences.
Salt Lake City
Nestled at the foot of the Wasatch Mountains, Salt Lake City offers easy access to ski resorts and hiking trails. Temple Square stands at the heart of downtown, surrounded by beautiful gardens and historic buildings. The Natural History Museum of Utah brings fossils and geology exhibits to life for all ages.
The walkable streets are filled with restaurants, shops, and nightlife, while venues from the 2002 Winter Olympics remain for sports enthusiasts. Families enjoy Liberty Park’s playgrounds, ponds, and green spaces, and Red Butte Garden offers a tranquil escape. With multiple airports and highways nearby, Salt Lake City serves as an ideal starting point for exploring the state.
Park City
In winter, Park City transforms into a snowy paradise with Park City Mountain Resort and Deer Valley Resort offering world-class skiing. Historic Main Street preserves mining-era, now home to galleries, shops, and restaurants.
Each January, the Sundance Film Festival brings filmmakers and celebrities to town. During summer, hiking, mountain biking, and zip-lining fill the outdoors. Utah Olympic Park preserves Olympic history with thrilling demonstrations and activities. Just 45 minutes from Salt Lake City, Park City perfectly comes with big-city amenities.
Moab
Surrounded by dramatic red rock formations, Moab is an adventure hub. The Colorado River invites rafting and kayaking, while mountain bikers flock to trails like the Slickrock Trail. Arches and Canyonlands National Parks are just a short drive away.
Downtown offers restaurants, galleries, and shops in a compact area, though the town swells during peak seasons. Nearby Dead Horse Point State Park rewards visitors with incredible overlooks. Moab has earned its reputation as the Southwest’s outdoor recreation headquarters.
St. George
St. George is Utah’s southwestern corner, which stays warm year-round and is perfect for winter escapes. Snow Canyon State Park showcases red rock formations ideal for hiking and climbing, and Zion National Park is less than an hour away.
Historic homes, St. George Temple, and golf courses make the town appealing for history buffs and outdoor enthusiasts alike. Nearby Coral Pink Sand Dunes State Park also offers a unique desert experience. And St. George works wonderfully as a winter escape from colder climates.
Ogden
Ogden has a railroad history with a lively modern downtown centered on Historic 25th Street, full of restaurants, bars, and eclectic shops. Union Station explores the region’s train heritage, while nearby Ogden Canyon and Pineview Reservoir offer quick access to scenic drives and summer water activities.
Snowbasin Resort delivers world-class skiing, and the Bear River Migratory Bird Refuge attracts wildlife lovers year-round. With more affordable living costs than other Wasatch Front cities, Ogden maintains a friendly, relaxed atmosphere that makes visitors feel welcome.
Provo
Home to Brigham Young University, Provo has a young, energetic vibe with cultural events, museums, and a growing downtown filled with new restaurants and entertainment. The Provo River and Provo Canyon offer fishing, scenic drives, and recreation throughout the year.
Mount Timpanogos provides trails for every skill level, while Utah Lake creates space for sailing and paddleboarding. Festivals, concerts, and the BYU Museum of Art keep the city’s cultural scene active, all with the Uinta Mountains just a short drive away.
Cedar City
Cedar City proudly lives up to its “Festival City” nickname, especially during the Utah Shakespeare Festival. Southern Utah University enriches the small town with arts, education, and performances, while the historic downtown offers cozy shops and cafés.
Just outside town, Cedar Breaks National Monument and Brian Head Resort provide easy access to hiking, skiing, and scenic views. More affordable than busy tourist destinations, Cedar City serves as a comfortable base for exploring national parks and enjoying its strong arts community.
Logan
Surrounded by mountains, Logan offers four-season recreation, scenic drives through Logan Canyon, and a charming downtown filled with Victorian-era buildings. Utah State University anchors the community with events, museums, and cultural programs.
Close to Bear Lake and its famous summer activities, the town comes with outdoor adventure and agricultural heritage. With local attractions like the American West Heritage Center and nearby Beaver Mountain for skiing, Logan keeps a small-town feel while offering plenty to explore.
Torrey
Torrey is a quiet, scenic town just minutes from Capitol Reef National Park, known for its peaceful atmosphere and friendly local cafés. Situated along Scenic Byway 12, it provides one of the most beautiful drives in the country.
Visitors enjoy access to remote hiking trails, red rock landscapes, locally made art, and stunning dark skies perfect for stargazing. Torrey offers a calm, less crowded base for exploring southern Utah’s hidden gems.
Green River
Positioned along I-70, Green River is a convenient stop for travelers heading between Utah’s national parks. The river invites fishing and floating, while the John Wesley Powell River History Museum shares stories of early exploration.
Known for its annual Melon Days festival and proximity to Crystal Geyser and remote Canyonlands areas, Green River offers budget-friendly lodging and wide desert views. It’s a practical, simple base for outdoor adventures.
Planning Your Visit: What You Need to Know
Best Time to Visit
Utah welcomes visitors year-round, but conditions vary widely by season. Summer brings extreme heat to southern destinations like Moab, while spring and fall offer the most comfortable hiking weather with lighter crowds. Winter transforms northern Utah into a snow-filled ski haven, with resorts like Park City receiving hundreds of inches of powder; meanwhile, southern parks remain open but may have icy trails that require extra caution.
Getting Around
Most people need a car to explore Utah since public transportation remains limited outside Salt Lake City. Fortunately, the state maintains excellent roads connecting all major destinations throughout the region. Scenic byways like Highway 12 and Highway 128 turn the drive itself into an attraction.
Booking Ahead
Planning ahead becomes essential for accommodations during peak seasons and major festival times. Park City lodging fills up fast when the Sundance Film Festival takes over in January. Gateway towns near national parks often sell out completely on summer weekends and holidays.
Staying Safe and Prepared
Utah’s high desert climate makes hydration and sun protection essential, as elevation and dry air intensify sun exposure and fatigue. Many popular trails and attractions now require permits or timed reservations, such as Angels Landing, Fiery Furnace, and several backcountry areas. So checking park websites and planning ahead is key to avoiding unexpected closures or restrictions.
Utah Has Something for Everyone
The state truly offers activities suited to every fitness level and personal interest. Families discover easy walks and accessible viewpoints alongside challenging backcountry routes for experienced hikers. Cultural attractions in cities perfectly complement the natural wonders found in parks.
Make Utah Your Next Destination
Utah’s diverse landscapes create unforgettable experiences that draw people back year after year. The Mighty Five national parks showcase nature’s artistic power through millions of years of geology. Cities and towns also provide comfortable bases with their own attractions and character.
If you seek adventure sports, peaceful hikes, or cultural exploration, Utah delivers. The state has natural beauty, and each region offers something different to discover.
Don’t wait to experience everything Utah has to offer. Book your stay with AvantStay’s premier Park City vacation rentals and start planning your perfect Utah getaway.
The holidays in December bring that special kind of magic when family gathers under one roof, filling rooms with laughter and creating memories that last a lifetime.
And Christmas getaways offer something: space to spread out, kitchens for baking cookies together, and cozy living rooms where the whole family can watch holiday movies by the fireplace.
But finding the best places to go for Christmas vacations mean more than just booking somewhere to sleep. It’s also about discovering a home where traditions unfold naturally, where kids wake up excited on Christmas morning, and where everyone feels the warmth of togetherness.
Whether you’re planning a multi-generational reunion or a festive escape with friends, the right home transforms your celebration from ordinary to unforgettable.
Ready to discover where your family will celebrate this year? Let’s explore the homes where Christmas magic happens naturally.
Christmas-Ready Airbnbs in USA
These handpicked Airbnbs for Christmas offer everything from beachfront settings to mountain retreats. Each property welcomes you and your families with open spaces, thoughtful amenities, and locations that make it truly special.
Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 3 beds and 2 baths
Salty Peach brings island vibes to your holiday celebration with one of Port Aransas’ largest private pools and an expansive backyard that feels like your own coastal resort. Families trade snow for sunshine here, celebrating Christmas with beach walks and poolside gatherings under the Texas sun.
Best Home Features:
Huge private pool with expansive yard, outdoor dining for 10, fire pit, and shuffleboard
Top deck with cozy porch swing, BBQ grill, and multiple outdoor lounging areas
4-5 blocks to the beach with easy golf cart access to restaurants and shopping
Why You’ll Love Salty Peach: The open-concept living space keeps everyone connected while the shuffleboard and outdoor amenities create endless entertainment for all ages.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Wow! What an incredible trip to Port A! This being our first Christmas away from home, we opened gifts on Christmas Eve and travelled to the Salty Peach for 6 days of fun! As we drive up, we were already in love with the downstairs and outdoor accommodations. TV, fire pit, games, pool, water toys, outdoor seating, grill, just incredible! Walking upstairs to the house was like viewing it online! Beautifully decorated! Everything as shown! Kids loved the shuffleboard! Bedrooms were spacious and clean. Bathrooms perfect. Bath towels and beach towels ready to use! Gorgeous kitchen, lots of seating and detailed decor to make the place feel so inviting. Neighbors were nice, quiet – dead-end street but easy to locate. We will be back and definitely will seek another AvantStay property. Thanks for making our first Christmas away from home perfect!”– Roneka L.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 4 baths
Nestled next to vineyards, Sonoma Sunshine gives your celebration that authentic Sonoma feeling while remaining close to world-class wineries and downtown Santa Rosa. The multiple living spaces here mean adults can enjoy quiet moments while kids explore the expansive grounds.
Best Home Features:
Outdoor pool, hot tub, inner courtyard with fountain, and panoramic countryside views
Piano in the living room, two separate living spaces, fireplace, and gourmet kitchen
20 minutes to Sonoma wineries, 30 minutes to Santa Rosa attractions
Why You’ll Love Sonoma Sunshine: The thoughtful design brings everyone together naturally. Gather around the piano for carols, share meals in the spacious dining area, or watch sunsets over the vineyards.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“The time we spent there was wonderful, the location beautiful everybody had a good Christmas.”– Helle G.
Can accommodate up to 6 guests | 2 beds and 2 baths
For intimate Christmas gatherings, 412 Seascape is the best home to go to. It is where the sound of waves becomes your holiday soundtrack that gives couples or small families privacy and comfort during the festive season.
Best Home Features:
Oceanfront location with the best Atlantic Ocean views and sea breezes
Access to Wild Dunes resort amenities, including pristine beaches and resort dining
Minutes from historic Charleston and Isle of Palms attractions
Why You’ll Love 412 Seascape: Wake up to ocean views, enjoy coffee on your private balcony, and experience Christmas intimately with the peaceful rhythm of coastal living.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“My wife of 45 was recently diagnosed with breast cancer, as her husband I had one thing in mind and that was for her to be able to relax not think about all that comes with the dreaded scheduling and surgery needless to say this was a much needed and appreciated stay. Can’t say enough about the help from staff, view of the condo and the whole experience. Hopefully we will be back next year to celebrate cancer free. Thanks to everyone and Merry Christmas”– Nathan D.
Can accommodate up to 6 guests | 3 beds and 2 baths
Experience classic holiday feeling in the heart of Stone Ridge, where mature trees and natural beauty create a winter wonderland setting. The flower-lined entrance at Historic Modern on Main welcomes you to be cozy and comfortable, while being surrounded by the peaceful wooded landscape that makes Hudson Valley holidays magical.
Best Home Features:
Private backyard with a firepit, pet-friendly home, modern, fully-equipped kitchen
Colorful, inviting interiors with spacious living areas perfect for gathering
Near Mohonk Preserve, Minnewaska hiking, Woodstock, and the Shawangunk Wine Trail
Why You’ll Love Historic Modern on Main: Just walking distance from local cafes, while putting you near holiday activities like exploring snow-dusted trails and Hudson Valley towns.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“It’s a lovely home with comfortable beds and very clean. The kitchen is well appointed, and if we’d had time to use the dining room, it’s quite lovely. There’s a fantastic coffee shop across the street—Black Dot. Loved it.”– Robin S.
Can accommodate up to 7 guests | 3 beds and 2 baths
The best Christmas experiences can also happen if paired with lake views. At Lakeside on Lagunita, this is your home for winter wonderland adventures. Every bedroom has its own balcony where you can drink hot chocolate and watch the snow fall on the mountains. You get peaceful lake time and easy access to ski resorts—the best of both worlds.
Best Home Features:
Private dock with lake access, deck with hot tub overlooking serene water views
Cozy fireplace, BBQ grill, and al fresco dining area
Minutes from Bear Mountain and Snow Summit ski resorts
Why You’ll Love Lakeside on Lagunita: You and your loved ones can wake up to lake views, gather around the fireplace for evening stories, and enjoy the hot tub under starry winter skies.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We have stayed at this cabin hosted by Avantstay twice in the last 5 weeks. It is a beautiful cabin for a great value and avantstay are very responsive. We will be back soon!”– Bill K.
Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 5 beds and 5 baths
A finalist home in our 2025 AvantStay Awards, Cooperage, is a wine country home that is perfect for Christmas with family and friends. This home has a vineyard out front and a private field out back, creating a retreat where adults enjoy valley vistas while kids can also play and have fun.
Best Home Features:
Vineyard, private soccer field, fire pit, and covered patio
Big outdoor table for al-fresco dinners, BBQ grill, and picnic area
Office with work stations, playroom, wet bar, and a breakfast nook
Open living room with fireplace, chef’s kitchen with island and gas range
10 minutes to downtown Paso Robles wineries and tasting rooms
Why You’ll Love Cooperage: A fancy but comfortable home where you can eat dinner under the stars, visit nearby wineries during the day, and gather around the fire pit to wrap up the day.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had a wonderful experience at this beautiful modern Paso Robles property. Large clean rooms easily accommodated our group of 10. We enjoyed comfortable beds, a kitchen with every gadget we could want for cooking, a fully stocked game cabinet, and views from both the front and back of the house. AvantStay’s thoughtful personal touches were the icing on the cake: they provided welcome snacks and coffee; were incredibly responsive to questions; and after learning we were celebrating Christmas, they set up a Christmas tree and decorations for us. I’d give an extra star if we could. Thank you for the fabulous getaway- we will be back!”– Erin G.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 4 baths
Perfect for a ski-town themed Christmas, Lucky Bill comes with Jordanelle Reservoir views and easy access to world-class slopes. This three-story mountain cabin has features of winter scenery, plus dedicated spaces for fun indoors. You get outdoor adventures and cozy indoor hangouts, which is everything you need for the holidays.
Best Home Features:
Hot tub with views from 3 multiple decks, private movie theater room
Game room with shuffleboard and pool table for family fun
Just 15 minutes from Park City Mountain Resort and Main Street
Why You’ll Love Lucky Bill: A real mountain home with all the fun extras where you can ski during the day, relax with amazing views, then watch Christmas movies together.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This was a great space for our family to meet for Thanksgiving. The kitchen has almost everything we needed for a big meal prep and was spacious. We loved the media room for Karaoke night and Christmas movies. The hot tub was a great addition! Joking to the lake was convenient too. Overall, plenty of room for gatherings and activities together as well as quiet moments alone. We had a little trouble getting the projector in the media room to work, but the hosts were very responsive to help us figure it out.”– Heidi H.
Can accommodate up to 15 guests | 5 beds plus loft and 3 baths
Sip, Sip Away turns lakefront living into a holiday celebration destination with its endless ways to celebrate and have fun. This 3/4 acre property has tons of space for big families to spread out and enjoy the holidays together.
Best Home Features:
24’x48′ saltwater pool with water slide, al fresco dining area, and enclosed hot tub room
Private dock with kayak and paddleboard, fire pit, and expansive fenced yard
Game room in the garage with ping pong and air hockey, loft with sleeper sofa
Open living room with lake views, kitchen with two ovens for big holiday meals
Why You’ll Love Sip, Sip Away: This place has everything for kids to play all day, for adults to relax by night, and for everyone who wants to come together for meals and memories.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“A perfect place together with family and friends for Christmas or Summer time.”– Gwendolyn Y.
Can accommodate up to 18 guests | 6 beds and 6 baths
Experience Nashville’s vibrant holiday celebrations and gather everyone for memorable evenings with city views. 121 Hotel gives you the best of both worlds. With the whole floor to yourselves, it makes it perfect for big families or groups traveling together that needs to have their own space.
Best Home Features:
With living area, full kitchen, modern gas fireplace, 55″ HDTV, and spacious dining table
Huge windows and a 42-foot private balcony with stunning city views
Walking distance to Broadway honky-tonks, Ryman Auditorium, and Nashville Farmer’s Market
Why You’ll Love 121 Hotel Floor 2 Buyout: The entire floor or even the whole 121 hotel can become your private urban retreat with hotel amenities this holiday season.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Our family of 5 plus 2 enjoyed our stay tremendously. We had the entire second floor. Rooms were awesome. Kitchen, Living area, & Dining was very accommodating. Amazing view from terrace. Parking was never an issue with our 2 vehicles. Owner response was quick to our inquiry. Definitely will tell other Families & Friends. Thanks for the memories The 121!!! “– Stacy C.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 5 beds and 5 baths
Located in one of Coachella Valley’s most exclusive areas, Rancho Mirage is the best place for high-end desert living for Christmas, mountain views, and warm sunshine instead of snow. This home is where you can also experience desert peace that make Christmas this year feel extra special.
Best Home Features:
Private pool with hot tub, fire pit, putting green, and bocce ball court
Long outdoor table for Christmas dinner, multiple gathering areas
Large kitchen with big island, living room with fireplace
Short drive to El Paseo shopping, golf courses, and Palm Springs fun
Why You’ll Love Rancho Mirage: You can swap snow for sunshine this December while still keeping all the warmth and family time that makes the holidays great.
💡This property is awaiting its first guest reviews. Be the first to create holiday memories here and share your family’s Christmas celebration experience!
Celebrating Christmas away from home might feel a little different at first, but staying in a vacation rental actually gives you the freedom to mix your favorite traditions with fun new ones. Plus, having an entire home to yourselves means you can celebrate exactly the way your family wants.
1. Bring the Festive Spirit
Turn your booked Airbnb into a cozy holiday home. It could be by packing a few simple decorations or booking a Christmas-themed Airbnb. Bringing special ornaments your family loves is a sweet way to make decorating a group activity.
But before you pack everything for your upcoming trip with us, we recommend calling our guest experience team first to ask if the home you booked already comes decorated for the holidays or if we have holiday-ready homes available.
The kitchen is your secret weapon for Christmas. Plan meals ahead so everyone can make their favorite dish. Lots of families say cooking together in a big rental kitchen creates better memories than eating out. Pack your special spices, cookie cutters, or family recipes so you can make everything just right.
But if you want to make meals and feast even easier, and more special, AvantStay offers incredible upgrades. Simply choose by having a:
Private Chef – Enjoy a chef-prepared holiday dinner without lifting a finger. (48+ hours’ notice required.)
Stocked Fridge – We’ll handle the grocery run! Send your list or pick from curated packages like BBQ Night, S’mores, or Salty Snacks.
3. Create New Christmas Traditions
Did you know that new places often bring families closer as you try new things and make new stories to tell. Use where you are to start new traditions your family will always remember. Walk on the beach Christmas morning, hike in the mountains to see snow, or check out local holiday markets.
Avoid holiday delays and transportation headaches! Our transportation services can handle all your rides throughout your stay so you can focus on enjoying the celebration.
4. Keep Communication Open with Your Host
Tell your host about your Christmas plans before you arrive. Many hosts are happy to help with special requests like checking in early to set up, or they can tell you about local holiday events. Some might even offer extras like firewood for the fireplace or tips on where to go, celebrate and see the best Christmas lights.
If you’re staying with AvantStay, our concierge team can help with special requests, reservations, and anything else you need to make your holiday stress-free. Simply send us an email at reservations@avantstay.com.
Need More Christmas Inspiration?
Check out our holiday and winter travel blogs for ideas on Christmas activities, winter getaways, family travel tips, and more.
The holidays only come once a year, and where you celebrate makes all the difference. These Airbnb homes aren’t just places to sleep, but they’re where your family will make memories you’ll talk about for years.
From beach houses where kids learn Christmas can include swimming, to mountain cabins where snow makes everything look like a postcard, each home has plenty of space and everything you need.
Whether you’re getting the whole family together, celebrating with friends, or just want somewhere special for the holidays, these homes are ready for you.
Ready to make this Christmas one you’ll never forget? Check out moreAvantStay holiday homes and book your celebration before these last spots are gone.
Christmas spots fill up fast! And these are the few homes still available for the holidays. Don’t wait and miss out while you’re still thinking about it!
Delivering a consistent, first-class hospitality experience for every guest is the standard at which we operate. We give guests all the amenities of a hotel paired with the comfort of a private space to create a one-of-a-kind vacation.
By going above and beyond for our guests, we receive more five-star ratings than the competition, drive more bookings, and maximize homeowner income. Of course, we couldn’t do it without our owners’ stunning homes.
Check out some of our favorite guest reviews from December 2025.
Gulf Coast Gem | 30A
Michael H. | ★★★★★
“We recently stayed in a home in Santa Rosa Beach hosted by AvantStay and had a fabulous experience. The home was clean, well-stocked, spacious, and well maintained. The description and pictures were as described. The location was great and would be perfect for a famiy vacation at the ocean. We were very impressed with the excellent communication and response time from AvantStay and would certainly book through them again in the future.”
“We booked the penthouse suite as a treat as we were in town to get married. We loved the ease of “check-in” with clear instructions on how to enter and where to park. The privacy was wonderful, the view from the balcony was beautiful. It was in a great location with many sites within 10-15 minute drive. Although we didn’t need any assistance during our stay I know they would have been responsive as they checked In to make sure all was going well. If we are ever back in state and wanting to go to Nashville I would hope to be able to stay will AvantStay again. Thank you for helping to make our wedding trip memorable!”
“We had the best time at this beach house! It was super clean, beautifully decorated, and had everything we needed for a relaxing stay. The pool was absolutely perfect — we spent so much time floating and relaxing there after the beach. The fenced yard was a huge plus, especially since we were able to bring our pup along. It’s so nice to find a pet-friendly place that’s this well cared for! The house had all the little touches that made it feel like home, and we can’t wait to come back again.”
“My husband and I stayed with two friends. We were blown away at the spaciousness and modern-looking furnishings when we walked in the front door. Shortly, we sat out on the lounge chairs at the pool and enjoyed the late afternoon. We were in Palm Springs to hike the Skyline Trail and Mt. San Jacinto, so this location was perfect for us, and also getting to the downtown restaurants. We needed good sleep, and the beds were really comfortable. We enjoyed a great dinner outside next to the pool, after using the grill, which worked perfectly. We have stayed in a lot of Airbnb rentals in the Coachella Valley and we feel this is the best and would actively look for this property again. Our friends loved it, too! Two bedrooms open up to the pool area and they are separated by the living area, so there is some privacy if there are two couples.”
“We had a fantastic experience staying at this clean, spacious and tastefully decorated home with our friends, family and children. It truly is an excellent choice for a large group or multi-family stay. We spent so much time enjoying the beautiful lake views from the two expansive decks and roasting s’mores at the lakeside fire pit. The kids and adults loved the game room and outdoor gear added a lot of fun to our downtime. The house has a grand living area perfect for comfortable lounging, and the bedrooms are all generously sized havens. We especially valued how family-friendly the entire layout is, offering plenty of space for everyone to relax and feel at home. The hosts were responsive and communicative. We easily navigated the gated community and the steep driveway which is accurately noted in the listing. Highly recommend this home. We’d return in a heartbeat.”
“The Castle Rock Estate truly feels like our home away from home. This was our second stay here, and we’re already planning to book again next year. The property has everything we need for a perfect coastal getaway, thoughtfully designed spaces and amenities that make it easy to enjoy everything the region has to offer.The fully equipped chef’s kitchen was ideal for cooking up our daily catch, and the large hot tub was the perfect way to unwind after long days of hiking, fishing, crabbing, and clamming. This time, we traveled with a few seniors, and the home was wonderfully accommodating for them, with several bedrooms on the main floor and easy beach access.The kids loved the bunk beds, and I appreciated having quiet spaces where I could catch up on a bit of work. There’s truly something for everyone at this property, comfort, convenience, and a touch of luxury that makes every visit special.”
“This was a great place for our family vacation. It was private, but very convenient to town. Plenty of room for everybody and lots of space. It’s very roomy for large groups. Very clean and even welcome gifts in the kitchen when we arrived! They texted me local suggestions for restaurants. We wound up going to the suggested brunch place twice while we were there! Would definitely book again!”
“If God had a Zip Code this would be it!! This home is absolutely amazing. The location is perched atop of a stunning vista with uninterrupted views over wine country. I have stayed in many many Air bnbs throughout the world and can finally say I found heaven. Any location after this has its work cut out for it. The home, the location, the views are absolutely stunning. The space was clean and very well appointed. It’s distinctive charm we found amazing. We were able to travel to nearby Paso Robles and Templeton to eat, shop, walk and enjoy and at the end of each day were privileged to return to this luxurious nest on top of the world. The wildlife and serenity went hand in hand and allowed us to absorb nature whilst sitting in opulent luxury. I literally cannot say enough good things about this property and it’s locus. I genuinely found a home that I could literally say was heaven for me. Book it and you will feel the same.”
A high-quality guest experience is the backbone of a successful vacation rental business. Why not partner with the leading hospitality platform to bring that to your vacation rental?
We ensure that each home is stocked with anything guests might need during their stay, including an array of high-quality consumables and thoughtful localized welcome packages. If guests need additional supplies or want to begin their stay with a fully stocked fridge, they can easily request that upgrade via our app.
AvantStay guests also have access to 24/7 live support via SMS, email, or phone, and we troubleshoot every issue to ensure they are well cared for so you can sit back and relax. By resolving 90% of guest issues on the first call, we receive higher ratings and better guest satisfaction scores than any other manager in the space.
If you’re looking to purchase your next piece of real estate, you’ve probably come across the question of second home vs investment property. While these terms are sometimes used interchangeably, the property types may or may not be the same.
Do you plan on using your home as a vacation home? A short-term rental? Or maybe both? It’s important to understand the differences between a second home and an investment property so you know what to expect when it comes to things like mortgages, taxes, and the property manager that’s right for you.
Before we break down the differences, it’s worth mentioning that mortgage requirements for second homes and investment properties vary between lenders. Lenders often use criteria based on definitions from Fannie Mae and the IRS, but they may not be the same.
For that reason, you should always check with the IRS for rental income tax information, and research mortgage qualifications for second homes and investment properties in your local market.
What is a Second Home?
A second home is a property that you occupy for part of the year while maintaining a primary residence (where you live for most of the year). Second homes are often used as vacation homes but can also be properties (like condos) in an area that you regularly visit.
According to the IRS, second homes can be rented out to generate income as long as you live there for more than 14 days a year or for more than 10% of the total days you rent it to others. This allows you to qualify your property as a second home rather than an investment property.
What is an Investment Property?
According to Rocket Mortgage, an investment property is real estate purchased to generate income, receive tax benefits, or profit from appreciation.
Investment properties are not your primary residence and can be purchased individually or by a pair or group of investors. Investment properties can be rented out on a long-term or short-term basis.
These properties are often purchased to renovate and resell for profit, known as “flipping.” Now that we have a basic understanding of the two, let’s dive into the five key differences.
1. Owner occupancy
Second home: Must be lived in or used by the owner for at least 14 days of the year.
Investment property: Must be occupied by the owner for less than 14 days of the year.
2. Days rented
Second home: Can’t be rented out for more than 180 days of the year.
Investment property: Can be used as a rental property for any amount of time.
3. Distance from primary residence
Second home: Must be at least 50 miles from the owner’s primary residence.
Investment property: Can be within 50 miles of the owner’s primary residence.
4. Mortgages
Second home:
Down payments start at 10%
Requires a minimum of two months of cash reserves
Can only get a mortgage on a single-unit property
Lower interest rate than an investment property
Investment property:
Down payments start at 15%
Requires a minimum of six months of cash reserves
Can get a mortgage for a property with up to four units
Higher interest rate than a second home
5. Taxes
Second home: Able to reduce the amount of taxable rental income by deducting expenses for owning the home. To qualify, the property must be rented for more than 14 days or at least 10% of the total days rented per year.
Investment property: Option to claim expenditures for mortgage interest, insurance, property taxes, utilities, maintenance, and losses due to damage. You can also deduct a percentage of the property’s value each year due to depreciation.
Second Home vs. Investment Property: Key Takeaways
Considering taking out a loan to purchase a second home or investment property? Before you meet with a mortgage lender, make sure you understand the key differences and have a plan for how you’ll be using the property.
Keep in mind that you’ll see higher interest rates, down payments, and cash reserve requirements on a mortgage for investment properties compared to second homes, but the return on investment can make it all worthwhile.
Earn More From Your Investment Property with AvantStay
If you have an investment property that you’d like to operate as a short-term rental, consider working with a vacation rental management company.
When you partner with AvantStay, we’ll manage your investment to give you peace of mind and maximize your income. Our flexible management options let you choose what’s right for you and your home; earn guaranteed monthly rent or a monthly revenue share for maximized income.
We know that running a vacation rental is expensive and time-consuming, so we offer the first hands-off approach for homeowners. We use a proprietary tech suite to power bookings, operationalize in-field management, and activate an elevated guest experience.
If you’re interested in learning more about AvantStay’s flexible management options and how we can maximize your return on investment, our team is ready to help. Get started with our vacation rental management experts today!
Tucked into the mountains of northeastern Pennsylvania, the Poconos is where you go when you need a break from the everyday rush.
Just a two-hour drive from New York City and Philadelphia, this mountain region packs in waterfalls, ski slopes, historic towns, and outdoor trails that work for every type of trip.
If you’re planning a weekend escape, a family vacation, or a romantic getaway, the Poconos delivers activities for all seasons and all moods.
The natural beauty and easy-to-reach attractions make this region stand out as a top destination in Pennsylvania. Hike to eight waterfalls at Bushkill Falls or ski down 39 trails at Camelback Resort; the Poconos gives you options.
Places to Go in the Poconos
Ready to plan your Poconos adventure? This guide covers the best things to do across every season, every interest, and every type of traveler. Let’s explore what makes the Poconos worth the trip.
Planning a trip to Poconos soon but don’t know when to go? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Poconos.
Things To Do In The Poconos
Explore Bushkill Falls
Known as the “Niagara of Pennsylvania,” Bushkill Falls features eight waterfalls across 300 acres with hiking trails that range from easy 15-minute walks to challenging two-hour treks. The Main Falls drops about 100 feet, making it the star attraction. You can explore via color-coded trails: green for beginners and red for experienced hikers who want to see all eight falls. The admission fee supports maintenance of the rustic log boardwalks, bridges, and lookout points that make the falls accessible year-round. Bring good hiking shoes and a camera.
Visit Camelback Resort
Camelback Resort is the largest ski resort in the Poconos with 39 slopes, 16 lifts, and over 40 snow tubing lanes. Winter brings skiing and snowboarding on 166 acres of terrain, all lit for night skiing. Summer opens up Camelbeach, Pennsylvania’s largest outdoor waterpark, with 37+ slides. Year-round, guests enjoy Aquatopia Indoor Waterpark at a cozy 84 degrees. The resort also features a mountain coaster, ziplines, and ropes courses through Mountain Adventures. Stay at the 453-room lodge or visit for the day.
Discover Jim Thorpe
Originally founded as Mauch Chunk in 1818, this Victorian town was renamed Jim Thorpe in 1954 after the famous Olympic athlete. Walk down Broadway Street to explore antique shops, art galleries, and historic buildings. Take a ride on the Lehigh Gorge Scenic Railway for mountain views. Tour the Asa Packer Mansion to see how railroad tycoons lived. Visit the Old Jail Museum for stories about the Molly Maguires. The town hosts a Fall Foliage Festival every weekend in October with crafts, food, and seasonal events.
Hike Lehigh Gorge State Park
Lehigh Gorge State Park is a 6,107-acre park that stretches along the Lehigh River from Francis E. Walter Dam to Jim Thorpe. The 20-mile Lehigh Gorge Trail attracts bikers and hikers in warm months. In winter, the trail opens for cross-country skiing and snowmobiling. The park is also popular for whitewater rafting. Pocono Whitewater Adventures runs trips ranging from family-friendly floats to dam-release rapids. Scenic overlooks dot the gorge, giving you views of the river cutting through the mountains.
Tour Quiet Valley Living Historical Farm
Tour guides in period clothing portray a 19th-century Pennsylvania German family, demonstrating farm tasks like hearth cooking and animal husbandry. Quiet Valley Living Historical Farm features original buildings, including a farmhouse, cabin, bank barn, and smokehouse. Special events throughout the year include ice cream socials, craft fairs, Civil War reenactments, a Harvest Festival, and an Old Time Christmas celebration. Open for public visits during select seasons, this living history museum brings farm life from the 1800s back to life.
Things To Do In The Poconos This Weekend
Splash at Great Wolf Lodge
Great Wolf Lodge is an indoor waterpark resort that keeps the temperature at 84 degrees all year. Kids love the character breakfasts, nightly pajama story time, and water slides built for different age groups. The lazy river offers a relaxing float, while wave pools and splash pads keep younger children entertained. The arcade and activities outside the waterpark give families options when they want a break from the water.
Boat on Lake Wallenpaupack
Pennsylvania’s third-largest lake, Lake Wallenpaupack, spans 5,700 acres and offers 52 miles of shoreline. Rent a boat from local marinas for fishing, water skiing, or just cruising. The lake area has restaurants, shops, and parks for picnicking. Several beaches provide swimming spots in summer. In winter, ice fishing becomes popular once the lake freezes over.
Race at Pocono Raceway
Located at 1234 Long Pond Road in Long Pond, Pocono Raceway is a superspeedway that hosts NASCAR races and other motorsports events. The 2.5-mile tri-oval track, nicknamed the “Tricky Triangle,” brings racing fans from across the region. You can buy tickets online or at the ticket office. Beyond race days, the raceway offers driving experiences where you can get behind the wheel of a real stock car. Remember to bring ear protection, as the engines get loud.
Fun Things To Do In The Poconos
Try the TreeTop Adventure
Navigate elevated ropes courses, ziplines, and obstacles high in the trees at Camelback Mountain: TreeTop Adventures. Multiple course levels let beginners and experienced climbers find their challenge. The zipline tours include views over the Pocono landscape. Safety equipment and trained guides are provided. The courses operate from spring through fall, with some winter availability depending on the weather.
Surf at Kalahari Resorts
Kalahari Resorts is a massive indoor waterpark that features a Flowrider wave simulator for surfing and boogie boarding. With multiple water slides, a lazy river, wave pools, and splash areas, Kalahari works for all ages. The resort includes an arcade, mini golf, laser tag, and escape rooms beyond the waterpark. Day passes let you enjoy the waterpark without booking a room.
Ski at Shawnee Mountain
A family-friendly ski resort with terrain for beginners and intermediates. The ski school offers lessons for all ages. In addition to downhill skiing and snowboarding, Shawnee Mountain has snow tubing lanes. Summer brings mountain biking, a bike park, and scenic lift rides. The resort sits close to the Delaware Water Gap, making it easy to explore the area.
Things To Do In The Poconos For Couples
Kayak the Delaware Water Gap
The Delaware River flows through the Pocono Mountains, giving the region its name from a Native American term meaning “stream between two mountains.” The Delaware Water Gap National Recreation Area offers scenic overlooks, hiking trails, and river access. Couples enjoy kayaking, canoeing, or taking romantic walks along the riverside trails. The dramatic gap where the river cuts through Kittatinny Mountain creates stunning photo opportunities.
Taste Wines at Mountain View Vineyard
The Poconos region features several wineries and craft breweries. Sample local wines at vineyards scattered throughout the mountains. Beer lovers can tour breweries like Mountain View Vineyard and check out tasting rooms featuring local craft beers. Many venues offer live music on weekends, creating a relaxed atmosphere for couples to enjoy tastings together.
Ride Lehigh Gorge Scenic Train
The Lehigh Gorge Scenic Railway offers 70-minute rides through Lehigh Gorge, following the river for approximately 35 minutes before returning. Choose from glass-domed luxury cars, standard coach seating, or open-air cars for the best photo views. The train runs different themed rides throughout the year, including fall foliage tours and holiday specials. Departures leave from downtown Jim Thorpe.
Things To Do In The Poconos For Adults
Gamble at Mount Airy Casino Resort
Pennsylvania’s first AAA Four Diamond Casino Resort is dedicated to guests 21 and over. The Mount Airy Casino Resort features slot machines and table games. Dining options include Guy Fieri’s Mt. Pocono Kitchen and other restaurants. The resort includes a golf course, spa, concert venue, and outdoor pool. Entertainment acts perform regularly at the theater and nightclub venues.
Sample at Nomad Distilling
Tour local distilleries producing spirits in the mountains. Nomad Distilling has locations in the region offering tastings of their whiskeys, vodkas, and specialty spirits. Many distilleries provide tours showing the production process before tastings. Some venues mix cocktails showcasing their products.
Golf at Pocono Manor
The Poconos features numerous golf courses set against mountain backdrops. The Pocono Manor range from championship layouts to more relaxed nine-hole options. Many resorts include golf packages combining lodging with tee times. The rolling terrain and mountain views make Pocono golf courses scenic experiences beyond just the game.
Things To Do In The Poconos With Kids
Visit Claws ‘N’ Paws Wild Animal Park
Located in Lake Ariel, Claws ‘N’ Paws Wild Animal Park lets kids get close to wildlife at the petting zoo and dig for dinosaur fossils at the Dino Outpost. The park houses many species, including exotic animals you don’t typically see in Pennsylvania. Educational programs teach children about animal care and conservation. Games and play areas keep younger visitors entertained between animal encounters.
Play at SkyPark at Santa’s Village
SkyPark at Santa’s Village is a theme park that operates year-round with rides, attractions, and seasonal events. In summer, enjoy outdoor rides, a splash pad, and the Polar Express ride. Winter brings snow tubing, ice skating, and holiday celebrations. The park includes a petting zoo, playground, and dining options. It’s designed for families with younger children but has activities for all ages.
Slide at Camelbeach Outdoor Waterpark
Camelbeach Outdoor Waterpark is the largest outdoor waterpark in Pennsylvania, occupying approximately 37 acres with over 35 water slides. A 1,000-foot lazy river provides a relaxing float. The wave pool creates ocean-like waves for playing. Family-oriented attractions include splash areas for toddlers and tube slides for older kids. The waterpark operates seasonally from mid-June to early September.
Unique Things To Do In The Poconos
Tour the Old Jail Museum
Old Jail Museum, built in 1871, served as the Carbon County Jail until 1995 and is known as the site where seven Irish coal miners called the Molly Maguires were hanged. Guided tours run every half hour and last about 30 minutes. The museum includes stories about the haunted history of the building. Tours are available from May through October. Advance tickets are recommended on weekends.
Learn at Mauch Chunk Museum
Before it was Jim Thorpe, this town was known as Mauch Chunk, and this museum holds the largest collection of local history. Exhibits cover the coal mining industry that built the region’s economy. Learn how waterways and railroads transformed Pennsylvania’s landscape. The museum displays artifacts from the town’s industrial age and explains how Jim Thorpe evolved from a mining town to a tourist destination.
Solve at Escape Room Centers
Multiple escape room venues throughout the Poconos offer puzzle-solving challenges. Klues Escape Room, Big Screen Escapes, and Country Junction’s Tornado Escape provide themed adventures. Wonderland Madhouse offers an Alice in Wonderland immersive experience. These indoor attractions work well for rainy days or evening entertainment after outdoor adventures.
Free Things To Do In The Poconos
Bike the Delaware & Lehigh Trail
The D&L Trail stretches 165 miles from New Jersey through Pennsylvania, providing free access to biking and walking paths. The trail follows historic canal towpaths and railroad beds. Multiple access points throughout the Poconos let you explore sections that match your time and fitness level. Scenic river views and historic markers along the route add educational value to the outdoor exercise.
Birdwatch at Lacawac Sanctuary
Encompassing over 500 acres, Lacawac Sanctuary provides a home for numerous bird species with nine miles of free trails. Bring binoculars for birdwatching opportunities throughout the preserve. The trails wind through forests, wetlands, and around the lake. Wildlife viewing includes chances to spot deer, beaver, and various waterfowl. Nature programs and educational displays teach visitors about the local ecosystem.
Camp at Promised Land State Park
Spanning 3,000 acres on the Pocono Plateau at 1,800 feet, Promised Land State Park offers free day use for hiking, fishing, and wildlife watching. Two lakes provide fishing and small boat access. The park’s trails range from easy lakeside walks to more challenging forest hikes. Picnic areas with tables and grills make it easy to spend a full day exploring. In winter, the trails become routes for cross-country skiing and snowshoeing.
Things To Do In The Poconos In The Spring
Trek Hickory Run State Park
Spring brings wildflowers and mild temperatures perfect for hiking Hickory Run State Park. Trails at various difficulty levels wind through state parks and forests. The snow has melted, streams run full from winter runoff, and waterfalls reach peak flow. Wildlife becomes more active, increasing chances of spotting deer, birds, and other animals.
Shop at Poconos Farmers Markets
The Poconos farmers’ markets feature throughout the region, where you can explore local produce and crafts. Spring markets offer early-season vegetables, plants for home gardens, locally made honey, and handcrafted goods. Markets provide a chance to meet local farmers and artisans. Many markets include live music and food vendors. Check local schedules as markets typically run from spring through fall.
View Spring Blooms at Creekside Gardens
Spring at Creekside Gardens is a true seasonal showcase, where colorful blooms, budding trees, and peaceful walking paths create the perfect backdrop for a relaxing day outdoors. As spring unfolds, the gardens come alive with vibrant tulips, daffodils, and early wildflowers, all arranged along beautifully maintained garden beds and winding trails. The atmosphere is also calm and uncrowded, far quieter than the busy summer and fall seasons.
Things To Do In The Poconos In The Summer
Paddle Boats at Beltzville State Park
Summer means water activities across the Poconos. Rent kayaks, canoes, paddleboards, or boats. Beltzville State Park features a 525-foot sand beach on Beltzville Lake that never feels too crowded. The Delaware River attracts tubers and rafters floating downstream. Marinas offer jet ski rentals and water skiing equipment. Fishing continues strong in summer for bass, trout, and other species.
Bike at Blue Mountain Trails
Bike the Lehigh Gorge Trail or explore mountain bike parks at ski resorts. Blue Mountain and other resorts open their terrain for mountain biking when the snow melts. Trails range from beginner-friendly paths to technical downhill runs. Bike rentals and shuttle services make it easy to ride even without your own equipment. Scenic lift rides carry bikers and sightseers up the mountains for downhill routes or simply the views.
Attend Concerts and Festivals at Mauch Chunk Opera House
Summer brings outdoor music venues to life. Check schedules at Mauch Chunk Opera House, outdoor amphitheaters, and resort entertainment venues. Towns host summer festivals celebrating local culture, food, and arts. Craft fairs and weekend markets become regular events. Evening concerts and outdoor movies create family-friendly entertainment options after hot summer days.
Things To Do In The Poconos In The Fall
Drive through Route 6 for Fall Foliage
The Poconos has some of the most stunning scenic vistas to witness autumn foliage in Pennsylvania’s hills, lakes, rivers, and forests. Peak color typically arrives from early to mid-October. Scenic drives along Route 6 and through state parks showcase red, orange, and yellow leaves. The Lehigh Gorge Scenic Railway offers special fall foliage train rides. Hiking trails provide immersive experiences walking through colorful forests.
Celebrate at Jim Thorpe Fall Festival
Held every weekend during October, the town transforms into a center of fall activities with train rides, crafts, food, ghost tours, and seasonal specials from local restaurants, shops, and galleries. The Victorian architecture, combined with peak foliage, creates a picturesque setting. Crowds fill the streets on Jim Thorpe Fall Festival weekends, so arrive early for parking and reservations. The festival celebrates over 40 years of autumn tradition.
Pick Apples at Heckman Orchards
Orchards throughout the Poconos open for pick-your-own apples in September and October. Farms like Heckman Orchards offer hayrides, corn mazes, pumpkin patches, and cider mills. Many farms also include bakeries selling fresh apple cider donuts, pies, and other treats. These family-friendly activities connect visitors with agricultural traditions while enjoying the fall season. Farm stands sell produce, jams, and local products.
Things To Do In The Poconos In The Winter
Ski and Snowboard at Blue Mountain Resort
Blue Mountain Resort features the highest vertical in Pennsylvania at 1,082 feet with 40 trails of varied terrain. Camelback Mountain offers 39 trails with 100% night skiing capability. Shawnee Mountain caters to families with gentle slopes and ski school programs. Jack Frost and Big Boulder provide additional options. All resorts offer equipment rentals and lessons for beginners. Season passes and multi-day tickets provide value for frequent skiers.
Tube Down at Camelback
Camelback has over 40 snow tubing lanes, making it the largest snow tubing park in the nation. Conveyor lifts carry tubes and riders back uphill, so no trudging is required. Many resorts offer nighttime tubing with lights and music. Blue Mountain features Sonic Snow Tubing with laser lights, creating a party atmosphere. Tubing requires less skill than skiing, making it accessible for all ages and fitness levels.
Warm Up at Aquatopia Indoor Waterpark
Beat winter cold at indoor waterparks, maintaining 84-degree temperatures year-round. Aquatopia Indoor Waterpark at Camelback Lodge includes water slides, wave pools, and lazy rivers. Great Wolf Lodge and Kalahari Resorts offer similar amenities. These waterparks let families enjoy water activities regardless of outdoor weather. Many waterpark resorts include lodging packages combining rooms with waterpark access.
What Is Special About the Poconos?
The Northeastern Pennsylvania mountains’ appeal comes largely from accessibility; they’re roughly a two-hour drive from both New York City and Philadelphia. And this convenient location makes weekend getaways easy for millions of people.
But proximity alone doesn’t explain why the Poconos remains a top destination decades after the first resorts opened. The wooded hills and valleys have long been a popular recreation area with resort hotels offering fishing, hunting, skiing, and sports facilities. The region also reinvents itself across seasons. Winter ski slopes become summer mountain biking trails, and snow tubing parks transform into waterpark attractions.
This four-season appeal means visitors find activities year-round rather than a destination limited to one season. With the mix of outdoor adventure, historic towns, family attractions, and romantic resorts, it creates options for every type of traveler, from adrenaline seekers to couples seeking quiet mountain escapes.
Stay at Poconos with AvantStay
The Poconos delivers activities for every season and every traveler. Whether you want adventure on the slopes, relaxation at a waterpark, history in Victorian towns, or peaceful hikes through mountain forests, this Pennsylvania region has you covered.
The accessibility from major cities makes it easy to visit for a weekend or a longer vacation. You don’t need to pick just one type of vacation; the region lets you ski in the morning, soak in a hot tub in the afternoon, and explore a historic downtown by evening.
Ready to experience the Poconos? Browse our collection of Poconos Airbnbs or find the perfect AvantStay home for your adventure.
Saunter through forests painted in brilliant reds, oranges, and golds during peak fall foliage season. Or listen to the Boston Symphony Orchestra under the stars at Tanglewood on a perfect summer evening. These are the moments that make the Berkshires truly special.
Nestled in western Massachusetts, the Berkshires have rolling mountains, pristine lakes, and small towns that capture the heart of every visitor. This cultural haven has breathtaking natural beauty and world-class arts and dining.
It is also a mountain paradise that spans across western Massachusetts, featuring historic towns like Lenox, Stockbridge, and Great Barrington. Mount Greylock, the state’s highest peak at 3,491 feet, offers panoramic views stretching up to 90 miles on clear days.
The four-season New England climate creates perfect conditions for different activities year-round. And the best time to visit the Berkshires is during the summer, fall, and early winter months. Each season brings unique experiences that draw visitors worldwide.
And if you’re curious about the Berkshires and their seasonal wonders, read on to know each time of the year, so you can build your itineraries and perfect your New England trip.
About the Berkshires, MA
The Berkshires stretch across western Massachusetts as a premier four-season destination known for spectacular fall foliage, world-class cultural attractions, and year-round mountain adventures. With a sophisticated arts scene, it creates an environment that attracts culture enthusiasts, outdoor lovers, and families throughout all seasons.
The humid continental climate features warm summers and cold, snowy winters. Over the course of the year, the temperature typically varies from 15°F to 80°F and is rarely below 0°F or above 88°F. Mount Greylock stands as the highest point in Massachusetts at 3,491 feet, offering views up to 90 miles away on clear days.
The region boasts numerous pristine lakes perfect for swimming, fishing, and boating, along with extensive trail systems for hiking and winter sports. Summer brings peak tourism season to the Berkshires due to Tanglewood and various cultural festivals, so accommodation prices tend to be higher during these months, while outdoor activities remain popular throughout most seasons due to the diverse four-season climate.
Berkshires Travel Seasons at a Glance
Here’s when culture lovers and outdoor enthusiasts visit, and when you can find peaceful trails and quiet museum moments.
Peak Times: July Through August and Fall Foliage Season
Summer draws the biggest crowds as Tanglewood’s season runs from late June through early September, filling local accommodations and restaurants. Fall foliage typically peaks from late September to the end of October, creating the region’s busiest tourism period as leaf peepers arrive from across New England.
Great Value Times: April Through June and November Through December
Late spring provides mountain adventures with pleasant weather and blooming wildflowers throughout the region. Early winter delivers comfortable conditions for cozy inn stays and cultural activities before the heavy snow season arrives.
Peaceful Times: January Through March and Mid-Week Visits
Winter months offer the most tranquil mountain experiences with snow-covered landscapes perfect for cross-country skiing and winter hiking. Weekday visits year-round provide peaceful museum experiences and easier restaurant reservations without weekend crowds.
Why Visit the Berkshires?
The Berkshires provide authentic New England experiences with world-class cultural attractions, including Tanglewood, home of the Boston Symphony Orchestra, and renowned museums like the Norman Rockwell Museum and Mass MoCA. The region features stunning mountain scenery, historic Gilded Age mansions, and New England villages with white steeple churches.
The area maintains genuine mountain character with local farms, historic inns, and farm-to-table restaurants serving regional specialties made from local ingredients. Cultural dining showcases seasonal New England cuisine while offering spectacular mountain and valley views from restaurant terraces.
Annual events celebrate the region’s natural beauty and cultural heritage, including the famous Tanglewood season, harvest festivals, and holiday celebrations. Fall brings fiery foliage, pumpkin patches, crisp mountain air, and harvest festivals that draw visitors from across the Northeast and beyond.
Your Month-by-Month Guide to the Berkshires
Berkshires in January: Cold and snowy weather, cozy inn atmosphere, perfect for fireside retreats
Berkshires in February: Peak winter conditions, great for winter sports, romantic mountain getaways
Berkshires in March: Late winter weather, maple sugaring season begins, quiet cultural venues
Berkshires in April: Spring awakening, warming temperatures, museums reopen extended hours
Berkshires in May: Perfect spring weather, hiking season begins, wildflowers emerging
Berkshires in June: Early summer warmth, Tanglewood season approaches, ideal outdoor weather
Berkshires in July: Peak summer season, Tanglewood concerts, busy cultural attractions
Berkshires in August: Continued summer warmth, peak Tanglewood season, outdoor festivals
Berkshires in September: Early fall comfort, foliage beginning, harvest season starts
Berkshires in October: Peak fall foliage, spectacular colors, perfect hiking weather
Berkshires in November: Cool autumn weather, late fall colors, peaceful mountain atmosphere
Berkshires in December: Winter arriving, holiday decorations, cozy cultural venues
When Is the Best Time to Visit the Berkshires?
The best times to visit the Berkshires are during the summer, fall, and winter seasons. Each period offers unique advantages: summer provides perfect weather for Tanglewood concerts and outdoor activities, fall showcases world-famous foliage displays, and winter delivers cozy New England charm with snow-covered mountain landscapes.
Spring can still be lovely for visiting the Berkshires—rates are typically lower during this time—but weather can be unpredictable with mud season affecting some trails.
Visiting in Winter (December to February)
Winter transforms the Berkshires into a New England wonderland perfect for cozy inn stays and cultural exploration. The region receives regular snowfall, creating beautiful mountain scenery and excellent conditions for cross-country skiing, snowshoeing, and winter hiking on Mount Greylock.
This season offers the most intimate cultural experiences with uncrowded museums, longer conversations with local artisans, and cozy fireside dining perfect for romantic retreats.
Berkshires Weather in Winter
December: 20°F to 40°F | Early winter with increasing snow
January: 15°F to 35°F | Peak winter conditions with regular snowfall
February: 18°F to 38°F | Continued winter weather with maple season beginning
Things to Do in the Berkshires During Winter
Winter activities center around cozy cultural experiences in heated venues and peaceful winter sports. Museums offer special winter exhibitions and programs, while historic inns provide warm gathering spaces with fireplaces and seasonal menus.
Mount Greylock offers seasonal activities, including skiing, snowmobiling, and educational programs led by local park rangers. Cross-country skiing and snowshoeing provide peaceful alternatives on groomed trails throughout state forests.
Berkshires Events in Winter
Winter Cultural Season – Museums and galleries offer special exhibitions and programs
Maple Sugaring Season – Late winter brings traditional maple syrup production tours
Cozy Inn Season – Perfect time for fireside retreats and cultural immersion
Food Scene in Winter
Restaurants feature hearty New England comfort foods and warming dishes perfect for cold mountain days. Many establishments offer cozy fireside dining with mountain views and seasonal specialties highlighting preserved local ingredients.
Winter Travel Tips
Pack warm layers and proper winter gear for outdoor activities. Winter provides the most romantic New England atmosphere but requires advance booking for holiday periods. Consider mid-week visits for better rates and quieter cultural venues. Some mountain roads may require snow tires or chains during heavy snow periods.
Visiting in Spring (March to May)
Spring offers the best accommodation values and fewer crowds, though the weather can be changeable with mud season. Spring sees visitor numbers beginning to increase as cultural venues expand their hours and outdoor activities become more comfortable.
Mountain wildflowers begin blooming throughout the region, while maple sugaring season provides unique cultural experiences at local farms and sugarhouses.
Berkshires Weather in Spring
March: 25°F to 48°F | Transitional weather with possible late snow and mud season
April: 35°F to 60°F | Pleasant spring temperatures with wildflowers beginning
May: 45°F to 72°F | Ideal late spring weather
Things to Do in the Berkshires During Spring
Spring provides excellent conditions for hiking as trails become accessible and wildflowers begin blooming. Mount Greylock hiking provides panoramic vistas across the New England landscape and has inspired writers like Herman Melville.
Cultural venues reopen with extended hours and new exhibitions, while maple sugarhouses offer tours and tastings during the traditional sugaring season. Spring fishing becomes excellent on mountain streams and lakes.
Berkshires Events in Spring
Maple Sugaring Season – Traditional New England maple syrup production experiences
Spring Wildflower Season – Beautiful blooms throughout mountain forests and meadows
Cultural Season Opening – Museums and galleries expand hours with new exhibitions
Spring Hiking Season – Perfect weather for exploring mountain trails
Food Scene in Spring
Restaurants begin expanding outdoor seating as the weather improves, featuring fresh seasonal ingredients and lighter fare. Spring menus highlight local maple products and early seasonal produce perfect for comfortable outdoor dining.
Spring Travel Tips
Pack layers for unpredictable spring weather and waterproof shoes for muddy trail conditions. Spring offers the best accommodation deals before peak season pricing. Check trail conditions as mud season can affect some hiking areas. Maple sugaring viewing reaches its peak in March and early April.
Visiting in Summer (June to August)
Summer provides peak cultural and outdoor recreation conditions, with the famous Tanglewood season running from late June through early September. Warm temperatures and long daylight hours create ideal conditions for hiking, concerts, and all outdoor activities.
This season features the most active cultural scene with Tanglewood concerts, summer theater, and numerous festivals operating at full capacity.
Berkshires Weather in Summer
June: 52°F to 75°F | Perfect early summer weather for all activities
July: 58°F to 80°F | Peak summer warmth with comfortable humidity
August: 56°F to 78°F | Continued excellent summer conditions
Things to Do in the Berkshires During Summer
Summer activities include swimming in lakes, listening to outdoor concerts, and hiking Mount Greylock. The famous Tanglewood music festival features the Boston Symphony Orchestra and world-renowned guest artists in outdoor pavilion settings.
Benedict Pond in Beartown State Forest offers swimming, fishing, and boating opportunities, while the 12,000-acre reserve provides excellent hiking trails. Museums operate with extended hours and special summer exhibitions.
Berkshires Events in Summer
Tanglewood Season – World-class classical music concerts and festivals
Summer Theater – Outdoor performances and cultural events at various venues
Outdoor Festivals – Music festivals, art shows, and community celebrations
Peak Cultural Season – All museums and attractions operating with full schedules
Food Scene in Summer
Mountain restaurants maximize outdoor seating with valley and mountain views. Summer menus feature fresh local ingredients, seasonal produce, and light fare perfect for warm-weather dining after cultural events or outdoor adventures.
Summer Travel Tips
Book accommodations well in advance, as summer represents peak season with highest demand, especially during Tanglewood performances. Purchase concert tickets early as popular shows sell out quickly. Pack light layers and rain gear for changing mountain weather. Make restaurant reservations ahead for weekend visits.
Visiting in Fall (September to November)
Fall delivers the Berkshires’ most spectacular natural displays with world-famous foliage that attracts visitors from around the globe. Late September to mid-October is considered the ideal time for fall foliage trips, though the season typically lasts only a couple of weeks.
This season has excellent weather. With breathtaking natural beauty, sugar-maple reds and honey-locust yellows can be seen along scenic mountain roads.
Berkshires Weather in Fall
September: 48°F to 72°F | Excellent early fall weather for all activities
October: 38°F to 62°F | Peak foliage season with comfortable temperatures
November: 30°F to 50°F | Cool autumn conditions with late fall colors
Things to Do in the Berkshires During Fall
Fall provides perfect weather for hiking with spectacular foliage displays throughout mountain trails. October is peak foliage month in Lenox and the Berkshires, with trees turning colors all month long. Scenic drives showcase autumn colors while cultural venues offer harvest-themed exhibitions and programs.
Apple picking, pumpkin patches, and harvest festivals celebrate the season throughout the region, while hiking Mount Greylock provides spectacular elevated views of the colorful canopy.
Berkshires Events in Fall
Peak Foliage Season – Peak color often coincides with the third week of October
Harvest Festivals – Apple picking, pumpkin patches, and seasonal celebrations
Fall Cultural Events – Special autumn exhibitions and harvest-themed programs
Scenic Drive Season – Perfect weather for exploring mountain roads and viewpoints
Food Scene in Fall
Restaurants feature seasonal menus celebrating harvest flavors and warming dishes. Apple cider, pumpkin specialties, and comfort foods become popular offerings with stunning foliage views from restaurant windows and terraces.
Fall Travel Tips
Peak foliage season requires advance booking, especially for October weekends when leaf peeping is at its best. Pack layers for significant temperature variations between day and night. Fall provides excellent photography opportunities with spectacular color displays. Check foliage reports for optimal timing, as weather conditions can affect peak viewing periods.
Best Time of the Year to Visit the Berkshires (By Interest)
Your day might start with hiking Mount Greylock to catch sunrise views, continue with exploring the Norman Rockwell Museum, then end with dinner at a cozy inn while watching snow fall outside your window.
Feel free to choose your perfect timing based on what draws you most to this beautiful New England destination
Late September through mid-October provides spectacular autumn foliage displays with vibrant reds, oranges, and golds throughout the mountain region, creating some of New England’s most stunning color shows.
For Ideal Hiking Conditions: Extended Season
Best Time for Berkshires Hiking and Outdoor Adventures
May through October offers perfect hiking weather with comfortable temperatures, accessible trails, and long daylight hours for exploring Mount Greylock, state forests, and mountain peaks.
For Avoiding Crowds: Off-Season Tranquility
Best Time for Peaceful Berkshires
November through March provides the most tranquil mountain experiences with uncrowded museums, easy restaurant access, and peaceful trail systems without peak season crowds.
For Best Overall Value: Shoulder Seasons
Best Time for Affordable Berkshires
April through May and November through February offer the best combination of pleasant weather, fewer crowds, and excellent accommodation values before and after peak season pricing.
For Cultural Activities: Summer Season
Best Time for Berkshires Arts and Culture
June through September provides peak cultural experiences with Tanglewood concerts, summer theater, and all museums operating with extended hours and special programming.
For Winter Sports: Snow Season
Best Time for Berkshires Winter Adventures
December through March offers excellent cross-country skiing, snowshoeing, and winter hiking conditions with reliable snowfall and perfect temperatures for winter sports.
For Photography and Nature: Seasonal Beauty
Best Time for Berkshires’ Stunning Views
October offers spectacular foliage photography opportunities, while June through August provide summer wildflowers, pristine lakes, and endless natural beauty opportunities.
Where to Stay in the Berkshires
Experience exceptional mountain homes that capture the Berkshires’ four-season New England lifestyle – cultural access, mountain views, and luxury amenities that enhance every moment of your Massachusetts mountain getaway. Here are some spectacular Berkshires homes you can book with AvantStay:
Sunny Pond Estate – An estate nestled on a private pond with multiple living areas, fireplaces, a gourmet kitchen, movie room, gym, and guest house, perfect for groups.
Woodland Zen – Modern luxury home surrounded by lush woodland with floor-to-ceiling windows, spacious deck, and stunning natural views on a private lot.
Chester – This is a country home situated in the tranquil town of Austerlitz, where you’ll have many amenities that make this home a vacationer’s paradise.
Whitney – Enjoy the fresh air and the surrounding foliage from this private retreat. It has a large yard and amenities that will make you cozy and create memories.
Cordelia – A sophisticated and chic New England cottage that will make you feel romantic, cozy, and like living in a modern cottage core aesthetic.
Create Your Berkshires Itinerary
Ready to plan your New England adventure? Let our team help you organize everything for your Berkshires getaway! We can arrange Tanglewood concert tickets, museum reservations, hiking guides, and authentic experiences that showcase the real character of this incredible cultural destination.
Just contact us or download the AvantStay App to book activities, get local recommendations, and manage your entire Berkshires experience through one convenient platform.
No matter which season calls to you, the Berkshires’ spectacular mountain scenery, world-class cultural attractions, authentic New England charm, and genuine Massachusetts hospitality create memories that last forever. This destination perfectly balances cultural sophistication with outdoor adventures and cozy mountain retreats. Every visit reveals new discoveries and authentic New England experiences.
Your perfect Berkshires mountain home awaits. Book with AvantStay today and discover how incredible mountain getaways become when you experience the Berkshires’ legendary beauty, cultural richness, and New England mountain magic.
FAQs
Is the Berkshires expensive to visit?
The Berkshires cost significantly more during peak summer months from July through August when Tanglewood concerts and cultural festivals fill every mountain inn and restaurant. Hotels and dining establishments charge higher rates because demand increases for perfect weather and world-class cultural events. But visit during shoulder seasons in spring or late fall, and you’ll find excellent deals on mountain accommodations while still enjoying comfortable weather and access to most cultural attractions.
How crowded does the Berkshires get?
Peak summer months and fall foliage season bring substantial crowds, especially during Tanglewood performances and October foliage weekends, when popular hiking trails and scenic drives require early arrival for parking. However, the Berkshires’ extensive trail network and numerous cultural venues provide ample options even during busy periods. Spring and winter offer fewer crowds with pleasant weather, while weekdays provide the most peaceful experiences.
When should I avoid the Berkshires?
There really isn’t a bad time to visit the Berkshires since the four-season climate provides distinct experiences perfect for different activities year-round. Spring weather can be unpredictable, with mud season affecting some trails, while peak foliage season in October can be extremely crowded. The key is matching your visit to seasonal activities – come for Tanglewood in summer, foliage in fall, winter sports in winter, or value and fewer crowds in spring.
Feeling tired, worried, or just plain worn out from your busy life? It happens, and we completely get it, too! When you keep pushing without a real break, it can lead to feeling completely burned out. Sometimes, you just need to step away from everything and find a quiet spot.
If you’ve been craving stillness, space, and a place (or just a little room) to reset, our Lake Arrowhead Airbnbs are your first list to check out. Just a couple of hours from the buzz of L.A., this peaceful mountain town has a slower pace, pine-scented air, and the kind of quiet that sinks into your bones.
Best Lake Arrowhead Airbnbs
In this list, you’ll find secluded cabins and mountaintop homes made for mindfulness. No constant notification pings. No city sounds. Just you, nature, and a home that invites you to exhale.
A moment of stillness by the water, or a full day offline. If you are looking for a place where your mind can finally catch its breath, then make your way over to Pollock. The towering trees and fresh mountain air are one of the best highlights of this peaceful home. It is just a short distance from Lake Arrowhead Village and offers a calm, cozy setting to unwind, reconnect, and enjoy being present. A home that will instantly make you feel at home while enjoying a quiet evening.
You also get a chance to be close with your family, friends, or loved ones during your stay here, as this home fosters a place to reflect, meditate, and lean into a slower pace where you can connect and be closer together.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Pollock:
6 bedrooms that can cater to up to 12 guests
Hot tub for ultimate relaxation, game room with pool table and fireplace
Movie den with a projector screen for cozy evenings in
Near Snow Summit, Bear Mountain, and Snow Valley
Best House Highlight: The freestanding tub in the bathroom is perfect for a private moment of self-care and restoration, or gather fireside in the game room for meaningful connection with your favorite people.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“Good service really goes a long way, and AvantStay provided attentive and communicative personal customer care. Any issues that did arise (even outside of AvantStay’s control) were addressed and made right. The property itself is in a wonderful location and the interior looked just as pictured! Plenty of room for you and your guests! Lots of hikes, local food, and attractions nearby as well. You’ll have fun in Lake Arrowhead and at the home!” – Rainbow D.
A-Frame Retreat is more than just a mountain home—it’s a place to pause, breathe, and reconnect with yourself and the people you care about. Tucked into the quiet trees of Lake Arrowhead, this impeccably renovated getaway was made for mindful living, a space where you can start your day slowly, check in with your body, and remember what it feels like to thrive and not just get by.
Journal by the large A-frame windows that flood the space with natural light, do a little morning breathwork on one of the two inviting decks, or simply soak in the stillness of the forest from your hammock nestled among the trees; every moment here helps bring you back to the present moment.
Why You’ll Love Staying at A-Frame Retreat:
3 bedrooms that can cater to up to 6 guests
10 minutes to Lake Arrowhead Village with convenient local access
Two outdoor decks with BBQ dining area, fire pit, swing chair, and hammock
Private gate leading directly to forest trails for exploration
Best House Highlight: A sunlit sanctuary with forest views in every direction and glimpses of the lake through the foliage, it’s easy to practice awareness & grounding, take a break from the noise, and just notice what’s around you.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“It was a beautiful and peaceful place. It was extremely quiet and private. They had everything we needed to make our short visit a wonderful little retreat. The birds and squirrels that visited the balcony were an awesome bonus. The glimpse of the lake in the morning is a beautiful view. Lots of extra heaters and blankets to keep your warm in winter/cold weather.” – Candice C.
Your search for a place to reset in total privacy ends with Howlite. The moment you arrive, you’ll feel the shift. Everything you need for a true well-being retreat can be found here, where you can start a balanced lifestyle while having intentional relaxation. Supporting you to gather with your fave people or simply be still in peace and comfort.
Exist in harmony where you can have a morning that doesn’t rush. Anxiety and panic attacks are never a part of the vocabulary in this home. Just as restorative as therapy, this is your place to breathe while watching mountain sunsets from the spacious deck overlooking the pristine forest.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Howlite:
4 bedrooms that can cater to up to 10 guests
Large outdoor table and electric firepit for al fresco meals and late-night chats
Indoor recreation room with multiple games for group entertainment
Just 5 minutes away from Lake Arrowhead Village
Best House Highlight: The seamless blend of modern design and nature. Floor-to-ceiling windows and an expansive deck create the perfect space for mindfulness, breathwork, and watching the world slow down around you.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“We had a great visit to Lake Arrowhead! The home was beautiful and all as described / pictured. Communication was great and management was able to work with us on some unexpected travel changes we had. Everyone was responsive and helpful. They also had the high chair out and ready for us since we were traveling with kids. We enjoyed the open layout of the home so our families could all be together, and proximity to the village and lake was a huge plus. Bedding was comfortable and it was nice to have garage access. Overall, we had a great visit!” – Lindsay B.
When you arrive at Blue Spruce, everything quiets down. The chatter, the to-dos, the screen time, all of it fades behind. Nestled among the beauty of the San Bernardino Mountains, this escape gives you the space to breathe deeply and live a little slower. The inviting atmosphere, combined with the sounds of nature all around, lets you enjoy a moment of self-awareness and mindfulness.
Gather around the firepit on one of two spacious decks, or simply gaze out at the mountain air through the windows that fill the home with natural light and tranquility. It’s easy to stay in the present and live here. Take it all in because sometimes, doing nothing is exactly what you need to reset.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Blue Spruce:
3 bedrooms that can cater to up to 8 guests
Fireplace by the living area and a breakfast nook
Two decks with an outdoor dining table, a fire pit, and a swinging bench
12 minutes to Lake Arrowhead Village with dining, entertainment, and shopping
Best House Highlight: The two-deck design creates multiple peaceful spots for self-reflection. You can enjoy morning coffee on the swinging bench or gather around the fire pit for meaningful conversations under the stars.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“Loved this home. Very clean and spacious with a great host. Home is located a few miles away from the village with great views. I would definitely book this home again. Thanks for the hospitality.” – Kimberly M.
Quiet, calm, and full of fresh mountain air—Sutter is your peaceful home in the pines, perfect for anyone looking to slow down and enjoy a little space to think, breathe, and reconnect. Surrounded by trees and overlooking wide-open views and cozy touches in the house interior, it’s the kind of place that supports your well-being journey from the moment you arrive and makes it easy to relax.
If you’re feeling a little screen-fatigued, this is your home to breathe deeply and lean into a slower pace. Quiet spaces for rest, reflection, or simply listening to the sounds of nature outside your window. Curl up with a book or practice a little mindful movement; every corner invites you to tune into serenity while watching the trees sway, while your mind settles.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Sutter:
4 bedrooms that can cater up to 8 guests
9 minutes to Blue Jay Village, 17 minutes to Lake Gregory
Lake access alternative to Lake Gregory with an additional fee
Outdoor tables for 2, BBQ grill, fireplace, fully equipped kitchen, washer and dryer
Best House Highlight: Peaceful deck balconies and cozy interiors that make it easy to unplug, reflect, and fully enjoy your digital detox.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“We really liked this four-bedroom house in which two of the rooms had (almost) attached bathrooms (the basement and primary floor bedrooms); the top floor has two bedrooms that share a bathroom. Two bedrooms had electric fireplaces (basement and one top floor bedroom) in addition to the wood burning fireplace in the living room. The living room fireplace was efficient creating lots of heat. Each room and the kitchen were spacious, and the kitchen was easy to use with a big fridge, lots of counter space, and well-stocked spices, pots, and pans. The gas grill is connected rather than a propane tank, making it easier for cooking in the winter. The view off the back of the house is beautiful with balconies. Location is 8 minutes to the closest grocery store and 15 minutes from Lake Arrowhead Village. An easy hiking trail is a five-minute walk down the street. Avant Stay hosts were exceptional. We had a few minor questions/challenges, and they responded quickly. We recommend it!” – Leah B.
A mountain retreat that helps you slow down, clear your head, and just breathe. Surrounded by tall pines and quiet skies, Nadelhorn is tucked away in one of Lake Arrowhead’s most peaceful neighborhoods for a few days of stillness, reflection, and mindful living. The living space here is calm and cozy, with soft light pouring in and enough room to spread out without losing that sense of togetherness.
Mountain views that invite you to pause, notice, and be still. Rooms that feel like little sanctuaries with several quiet corners. Have present moment awareness by the window or enjoy a savory breakfast with your group, this space supports your self-care and breathwork routines without needing much from you in return.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Sutter:
3 bedrooms that can cater up to 8 guests
8 minutes to Blue Jay Village, 18 minutes to Lake Gregory
Lake access alternative to Lake Gregory with an additional fee
Playroom with toys, 2-level deck balconies, arcade game machines, fireplace, BBQ grill
Best House Highlight: A private balcony with mountain views and quiet surroundings makes this home ideal for deep rest, reconnecting with nature, and having fun again.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“Great cabin in Arrowhead! Kitchen is fully stocked for pretty much anything you would want to cook. Game room was awesome and kids loved it! Beds were moderately comfortable, not the best mattress’s and big dips in both beds. Love the view from the patio. Gorgeous view of the lake and mountains.” – Amanda O.
Looking to step away from daily distractions, breathe deeply, and let the calm in? North Bay is your quiet mountain retreat designed to help you recharge—mind, body, and spirit. With trees and fresh air wrapping this peaceful home, it is one of the best spots to slow down and reconnect with the people who matter most to you. Whether you’re here for rest, movement, or a little mental reset, this stay is what you need to feel grounded and at ease.
Enjoy mindful living as you stretch, breathe, and take in the stillness around you. You’ll find both connection and quiet here, aside from the best sunrises and sunsets on the large windows. Sharing a meal around the table or doing a breathwork session on the deck, North Bay gives you room to unplug and move yourself around.
Why You’ll Love Staying at North Bay:
5 bedrooms that can cater up to 10 guests
5 minutes to Blue Jay Village, 16 minutes to Lake Gregory
Has lake access to Lake Arrowhead with an additional fee
Balcony deck, hot tub, fireplace, BBQ grill, Peloton bike, multiple lounge spaces
Best House Highlight: A bright, open, and peaceful layout as sunlight pours through large windows and spots in the house for mindful mornings, body awareness, and tech-free evenings.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“This is the second year we stayed here. It was a great location for kids of multiple ages, big family dinners and hanging out. It was a very nice stay, everything was easy and convenient.” – Sally C.
Relax and enjoy the peace and calm at The Fairway Hideaway. Made for slowing down and soaking up nature, this mountain home invites you to disconnect from your busy life and enjoy the moment with your loved ones and favorite people. Find your cozy, rest, and reflect as every corner encourages mindful living. Do some journaling, gather around the fireplace, and it’s just very easy to feel at home.
Sit quietly and breathe. Bring in a healthy balance of fun and play. Share waves of laughter and enjoy the little things in life. This is the home where you can un-complicate life, just taking care of yourself and your inner circle, and support your well-being journey.
Why You’ll Love Staying at The Fairway Hideaway:
5 bedrooms that can cater to up to 8 guests
Game room with ping pong, foosball, air hockey, shuffleboard, card table, and bar
Wood-accented living room with fireplace and outdoor kitchen island
Just a few minutes away from Lake Arrowhead Village
Best House Highlight: The private, tree-lined, and expansive backyard is designed for gathering. Everyone can dine al fresco under towering pines, enjoy starry mountain skies, and create meaningful moments with those who matter most.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“My twin and I celebrated our birthday here with friends, and it was even better than we imagined! The views were absolutely breathtaking—felt like we were in a Twilight movie. The house had so many fun things to do, and the game room was a big hit. The rooms were super cozy and the beds were incredibly comfortable—we all slept great. One of the highlights was the Jacuzzi in the master bedroom—it was amazing to soak while enjoying the view, both day and night. Such a perfect place to relax and have fun. We’d 100% book again!” – Carolina A.
It isn’t just a cabin—it’s a chance to reconnect with nature, your people, and yourself. Located high on a hillside with sweeping mountain views and a peaceful pond in the distance, Sky Canyon Lodge was made for inner calm and offline moments. If you’re here to breathe deeply, write it all out, take a long-awaited break from burnout, or simply let your body rest without distraction, this home welcomes you into stillness.
You’ll find quiet pockets for self-care, spaces for self-awareness, and spots for connection in this home. Blur the line between indoors and out, gather for a slow breakfast, light a fire, and let the day unfold without a rush. Breathwork, body awareness, or just letting your mind be quiet. This is the house to just be.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Sky Canyon Lodge:
4 bedrooms that can cater to up to 8 guests
10 minutes to Blue Jay Village, 18 minutes to Lake Gregory
Lake access alternative to Lake Gregory with an additional fee
2 decks, hot tub, fireplace, BBQ grill, convertible pool table to ping pong, bar seating
Best House Highlight: The game room that supports your wellness balance. Think of it as emotional resilience in action—laughter, ping-pong battles, and good energy all around.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“The home was beautiful, clean with lots of open space. The kitchen was easy to work in, everything we needed was there. Family enjoyed the game room, and especially the hot tub. Bonus feature- we enjoyed the lake arrowhead fireworks from the top balcony , while roasting marshmallows for our s’mores on the fire pit. Perfect location to make family memories in an amazingly beautiful area. Lakes, hiking, just a short drive away. Lovely bedrooms, plenty of bathrooms, lovely wood floors, and decor!! Thank you 🙏” – Mary F.
If you wish to truly unwind, reflect, and let your mind take a break, The Matterhorn Manor is your mountain escape with its own kind of magic. Deep in the trees of San Bernardino National Forest, this cabin is built for quiet and cozy, a home away from the city, designed to make you feel secluded (in a good way) and be surrounded by fresh air and forest views. This is the perfect place to do your digital detox and disappear for 6 months to work on yourself, your goals, and your dreams.
Starting with a calming and grounding energy can help you slow down and settle into the moment. You’ll hear nothing but the wind in the woods in this home, and hear only the urge to appreciate life and check in with how you’re feeling. Gratitude journaling, restoring your inner calm, and reconnecting with yourself pair best in this house.
Why You’ll Love Staying at The Matterhorn Manor:
3 bedrooms that can cater to up to 8 guests
4 minutes to Lake Gregory, 13 minutes to Blue Jay Village
Lake access alternative to Lake Gregory with an additional fee
Deck with outdoor seats, hot tub, fire pit, fireplace, reading loft, BBQ grill, mini bar
Best House Highlight: Nature is just steps away. So you are still grounded with nature as you leave the city and work on being the best version of yourself in this home.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“Its all in the details! The host did an excellent job! We loved our stay. We arrived in the evening. Upon out arrival we explored each room and received a nice visual and comforting surprise. It was very cozy! We felt atvhome away from home. We had a ]eaceful sleep and woke up to a beautiful sunrise and lake view!!! 🙌🏿 I wish we would have arrived on time at check in and booked a longer stay because each day brought new peaceful and comforting surprises. This was our first experience and I have no complaints. Just a suggestion bring lavendar, firewood, wine, and candles to RELAX and enjoy the experience and “adventure” in each room!!! 😊🌄🦋🔥🍷” – Natonia F.
Let the stress slip away, appreciate the air that feels lighter, and be in the quiet that helps you reset. Set high above Lake Arrowhead, Starry Heights is a three-story retreat offering peace, privacy, and panoramic treetop views, which will definitely encourage you to slow down and take care of your mental fitness. To rest. To breathe. To feel like yourself again. This is the home for a solo moment to reflect and reconnect.
Feeling like a deep breath in the mountains, this house supports your emotional well-being with calming energy and cozy vibes. Check in with your emotional well-being, do some gentle breathwork, and notice the stillness around you.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Starry Heights:
6 bedrooms that can cater to up to 12 guests
4 minutes to Lake Arrowhead, 11 minutes to Lake Arrowhead Village
Has lake access to Lake Arrowhead with an additional fee
Fireplace, BBQ grill, lounging chairs, laundry room, docking station for monitor & printer
Best House Highlight: Multi-level decks with alfresco dining table setup where you can still be with your loved ones as you reset your mind, and in the process of your self-patch work.
What Our Recent Guests Say:
“Our stay here was great! Really liked that every single room had its own bathroom so no one was ever waiting to use a bathroom. Also very spacious! We had a total of 10 people in our family staying here this weekend but we could have easily fit a couple more. Also liked that the village and stores were only about a 10-12 minute drive from the house. Over all 10/10 and will definitely be coming back for more family trips in the future!” – Aldahir R.
A moment of stillness by the water, or a full day offline. If you are looking for a place where A peaceful mountain home designed to help you slow down, reset, and recharge. Nestled in the serene beauty of Lake Arrowhead, Alpen Drive is where you can step away from your screen, breathe in the fresh air, and stop overthinking about the future for a while. With warm lighting, classic décor, and a beautiful stone fireplace, it’s easy to feel grounded and centered here.
Enjoy a few moments of self-compassion, sit in stillness, or restore your balance. This home supports that journey of mindfulness and wellness, making it a great spot for breathwork, guided meditation, a low morning stretch, or just watching the trees move with the breeze from one of the multiple spacious decks.
Why You’ll Love Staying at Alpen Drive:
4 bedrooms that can cater to up to 10 guests
Multiple decks with shaded seating and an open-air dining area
Beautiful stone fireplace for cozy evenings, BBQ grill for outdoor gatherings
Fully equipped kitchen and convenient in-home laundry
Best House Highlight: This home is just a short walk away from the lake’s most peaceful beach, where it’s perfect for grounding, reflection, and mindful movement under the pines.
Be the first to experience this new retreat! Have the chance to be among the first guests to create memories here! Book your stay and be the first to share your experience with future travelers.
Know the Signs When Your Mind and Body Need a Pause
It’s very easy to feel overwhelmed today. Between work stress, endless screen time, and the pressure to keep up, many people find themselves burned out, distracted, or running on empty. Sometimes, your body and mind send clear signals that it’s time to slow down. But with busy schedules and constant distractions, those signs are easy to ignore.
Mental health and self-care are more important than ever. And paying attention to how you feel, both physically and emotionally, is the first step in your journey to mental stability and healing.
Here are some common signs that you might need to take a break and consider a digital detox:
You feel tired all the time, even after a full night’s sleep.
Small tasks feel overwhelming or unusually difficult.
You’re feeling stressed, anxious, or emotionally drained.
You’re easily irritated, on edge, or more reactive than usual.
You’ve lost motivation or interest in things you usually enjoy.
Your body feels tense, achy, or worn down.
You’re in doom-scrolling mode and always checking your phone.
You’re having trouble sleeping, focusing, or staying present.
You feel disconnected from yourself, others, or what matters most.
You just feel “off”—like something’s missing or out of sync
If any of these sound familiar, it’s your body and mind asking for attention. And one of the best ways to reset? A simple change of scenery. An active trip, especially one that’s quiet, tech-light, and close to nature, can help you recharge.
Whether it’s a solo retreat to clear your head or a weekend away with people who make you feel grounded, time off isn’t selfish; it’s smart. When you take care of yourself, everything else gets better, too.
Taking time away in nature can help bring you back to balance. Whether you’re sitting outside in the quiet, journaling in the morning light, or simply stepping away from your phone, these small moments of peace are the starting points for supporting your mental fitness, building emotional resilience, taking care of yourself, and reducing overall stress.
Coping with life isn’t just about escaping. It’s about choosing to slow down and reconnect with nature, your people, and your own well-being. Because when you feel rested, you think clearer, breathe easier, and return stronger. It’s not easy to break away from the lifestyle that you’re used to, but starting small are big steps to feel like yourself again.
Browse our full collection of Lake Arrowhead Airbnbs and start planning your next wellness escape with AvantStay!
Did you know that Telluride’s earliest condos were built in the 1970s to help expand town lodging beyond old mining cabins? Many of these were designed to blend rustic mountain charm with the emerging ski culture, and today, they’re still some of the most sought-after stays in town!
Wake up to mountain views, grab your gear from your private ski locker, and walk just a few steps to the gondola or the slopes. Whether you’re here for bluebird ski days, a cozy fall retreat, or golden summer at Telluride, these condos put you in the heart of it all.
Beyond the unbeatable locations, condos offer what hotels can’t: full kitchens, private balconies, fireplaces, and plenty of space and things to do after a day of exploring. It’s relaxed, easy, and built for the way real travelers live. Whether you’re cooking a casual breakfast before a hike or warming up in a steam shower after a powder day.
Best Telluride Airbnbs
If you want to experience living like a local, but with way better views, these 15 Telluride Airbnbs are your mountain-town condos with effortless access and cozy upgrades that turn a good trip into a great one.
With the gondola just steps away and the ski school practically next door, Westermere 311 puts you in the center of Mountain Village life. From sunny mornings on the deck to movie nights by the fireplace, this mountain-view condo is made for easy-going family time with a cozy, elevated twist. After a day on the slopes or trails, kick off your boots, pour something warm, and settle into the kind of space that feels like coming home but better.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Perfect for families with kids or newly married couples
Stone fireplace, jetted tub, and deck with pond views
Condo living perks like an elevator, garage parking, and in-unit laundry
🌟 Also available in the same building: Westermere 311 – 2. Perfect for booking together!
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“This is the second time we have stayed in this condo. We love staying here! It is the perfect location and the condo is spacious, yet cozy. Our favorite place to stay when we visit Telluride!”– Collin S.
At River Edge A, mountain mornings begin with coffee by the river and easy walks to everything you love about Telluride. Nestled right by the San Miguel River, this stylish condo feels like a tucked-away retreat, but you’re near the gondola, ski lifts, and downtown buzz. Come home to cozy up by the fireplace, unwind with a steam shower, and let the quiet beauty of riverfront living do the rest after spending a day on the trails or the slopes.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Cozy gas fireplace paired and sunny garden-level windows
Walkable to the gondola, skiing, and historic Telluride core
Heated garage parking with private ski locker for easy gear storage
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“River Edge was a wonderful place for our family of 5. The location was perfect for us, close to the local grocery store, restaurants and just down from the gondola. The river trail was just outside our door which made walking and bike riding very accessible. With the windows open you can hear the river rushing and feel the cool evening breeze. The kitchen was generously stocked with everything you would need to cook for a large family. Plenty of closet and storage space for equipment.”– Amanda T.
If you’re dreaming of mountain mornings with a view, then why not stay at Gold Dust Crossing A4?. This polished condo has luxury finishes with a relaxed, mountain-town feel, just a short stroll to the gondola. Expect to see jaw-dropping views of Telluride’s Box Canyon and prepare to be captivated by the awe-inspiring and unforgettable panoramic Ballard Peak. It’s the kind of place where you can ski all day, soak all night, and never feel rushed.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Gas fireplaces, jetted tubs, and steam showers for peak relaxation
Two private balconies with stunning views of the mountains
Walkable to the gondola and Telluride’s charming downtown
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“We loved this condo! Best location, was bigger in person than it looked online, and had everything we needed. Would definitely stay there again!”– Mary Caroline N.
Riverside Condos B204 is all about those mountain views and cozy mornings spent watching the light pour into the box canyon. This bright, top-floor condo puts you close to everything you love about Telluride—town, trails, and the gondola—all while giving you a peaceful spot to unwind. Every corner here invites you to slow down, unwind, and reconnect with yourself and your loved ones. Breathe a little deeper and rediscover the simple pleasures of life.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Vaulted ceilings, fireplace, and stunning floor-to-ceiling windows
Very near to downtown Telluride, the gondola, and the Bear Creek Trail
Access to two outdoor communal hot tubs with forest and mountain views
🌟 Need more space? We also offer nearby units in the Riverside complex: A102, B101, C102, C202, and D01. Best to book if you’re coming in bigger groups.
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“We loved this condo! It’s perfectly located by the Gondola & the Historic District. The place was spotless and clean! Just a beautiful cozy place to relax and soak in the fabulous scenery!”– Dyann Frazier C.
If easy mornings and true ski-in, ski-out living and experience sound like your style, then head over to Cimarron Lodge 14! Tucked along the San Miguel River, this spacious three-bedroom condo makes it effortless to spend your days on the slopes and your evenings unwinding in cozy comfort. Whether you’re gathering in the two-story living space or soaking in the communal hot tubs after a long day, this spot brings simple, mountain-town living to life.
What Makes This Condo Special?
True ski-in/ski-out access with Lift #7 right outside
Access to two communal hot tubs, gas grills, and a private washer/dryer in the unit
Walkable to shops, trails, and restaurants in downtown Telluride
🌟 We also have other units at Cimarron Lodge if you’re traveling with a bigger crew: 51, 7, 20, 27, 50, 14!
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“We came into town for a wedding. This was a beautiful place to stay that had plenty of for us 5 adults and 1 infant. It was a great location where we were able to walk to restaurants and other places in town. Would highly recommend. Thank you for the great stay and experience for our first time in Telluride.”– Dominic O.
Smuggler B is your sunny, family-friendly condo where cozy afternoons and ski town convenience are the best match. Just a short walk to Lift #7 and Telluride’s buzzing main street, this updated space has all the right ingredients: a bright living area for movie nights, a private loft area, and comfy spaces to kick back after a day on the mountain. It’s everything you want from a Telluride escape: easy, welcoming, and made for memory-making.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Freshly remodeled kitchen and bathrooms, plus a private patio
Easy walk to skiing, trails, restaurants, and more
Perfect and comfortable setup for families or groups
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“Great stay! The place was clean, comfortable, and in a convenient location in town. Close to everything I needed and had a parking sport for anything that we needed to drive to. I’d definitely stay here again.”– Bernie C.
Ski, stay, and soak up the mountain views at Blue Mesa Lodge, where the lifts are just steps from your door and the village plaza buzzes below. This cozy, lofted condo makes it easy to roll straight from bed to first chair, and even easier to be back afterward with a drink on the balcony. Whether you’re here for a quick ski escape or an easy summer retreat, Blue Mesa’s central location means the best of Telluride is always within reach.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Ski-in/ski-out access near Lifts #1 and #4
Balcony overlooking San Sofia Ridge and village plaza views
“My wife and I loved staying at the Blue Mesa Lodge! We were celebrating our anniversary in the Telluride area and were looking for a nice place to stay for a couple of nights. The Blue Mesa Lodge in Mountain Village was just the thing. The room was spacious, clean, and had a stove top for us to cook with too. The staff with Avant Stay were so kind to us, and often checked with us to see if we needed anything. They even gave us a complimentary bottle of wine and chocolate to celebrate our anniversary. The lodge is in an ideal location too if you want to explore Mountain Village or take the gondola down to Telluride. All in all a wonderful stay. Thank you Avant Stay Team.”– Marc D.
Make mountain-town life feel effortless; Lulu City 5B is putting you just across the street from the lift and a short walk from the heart of downtown Telluride. Catch first tracks or grab a bite in town, this cozy condo gives you the best easy access to adventure with a warm, comfortable space to come home to. Wake up to views of the valley floor, spend the day exploring, and wind down in your jetted tub with nothing but quiet and fresh mountain air.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Steps to skiing at Lift #7 and a 10-minute stroll to shops
Private jetted tub, perfect after a day on the slopes
Access to a heated pool and hot tub year-round
🌟 We also have Lulu City 4B available if you need more space for larger groups or multi-family getaways!
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“Perfect spot in Telluride! Tons of space for everyone, and the place was clean and updated. Really easy to get around town, with the Telluride bus passing right in front. The owners helped out with any questions we had and were super responsive. Would love to hit it up again!”– Orrin H.
Everything you love about a mountain getaway is just steps away when you stay at Telluride Lodge 307. Wake up surrounded by five acres of open space, walk to the gondola lift in minutes, and wind down with cozy nights by the fireplace. Simple, comfortable, and packed with easy access to town and trails, this condo is perfect for anyone who believes the best vacations come with fresh air, good views, and zero fuss.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Across the river from Lift #7 and close to the grocery store
Fireplace, bright kitchen, and shared indoor/outdoor hot tubs
10-minute walk to downtown Telluride plus free in-town shuttle access
“The place is very big for a Airbnb. It’s right across the street from the lift which is a HUGE benefit. You can literally ski down and have lunch in the place without wasting much time. I cannot stress enough how convenient this location is to the lift. If it takes you 5 minutes to get to the lift you better be crawling. Once you step outside you could probably throw a snowball at people on the lift you are so close. Also another big benefit is the water gets VERY HOT. After a cold day of skiing you can come home and the water is so hot it feels amazing. Kitchen was loaded with pretty much everything you could need. The walk to town is right down the street, this has been the best Airbnb we have stayed in. They are super responsive too if you have any issues. We had a maintenance guy (Colton your the man) come within 5-10 minutes of both our requests. Extremely friendly and I knew we wanted to stay with an avantstay place. Glad I made my decision for this place. HIGHLY RECOMMEND!!!!!!!”– Mitchell M.
You’re not just close to the action, you’re right on it when you spend your days at Etta Place 5. Ski straight from your door in the morning and stroll downtown by evening, all while soaking in incredible valley views. Simple, bright, and packed with everything you need, this cozy condo is made for easy adventures and slow mornings alike. Whether you’re chasing first tracks or laid-back hikes, this is true condo living by the slopes at its best.
What Makes This Condo Special?
True ski-in/ski-out access near Lift #7
Stunning valley views from your living space
6-minute drive to downtown Telluride and the Valley Floor trails
“Great spot on the end of town that’s a short walk to Clark’s market and easy access to the river trail. Enjoyed my stay while hiking in Telluride in the summer.”– Jennifer C.
Tucked upstairs in the historic district of Telluride, Hruza Hideout feels like your own private lookout in the heart of Telluride. This bright, cozy condo gives you soaring views of Mendota Peak and quiet corners to truly unwind. Start the day in the breakfast nook, relax by the fireplace, or watch the sun dip behind the mountains. This hideout is all about simple luxuries and an unbeatable location.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Gas fireplace, vaulted ceilings, and cozy house interiors
Steam shower and jetted tub with skylight for full après-ski relaxation
Quick walk to downtown Telluride and easy access to the free town shuttle
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“Hruza Hideout was such a great place to stay. The location couldn’t be better. We were so close to our favorite restaurants and a few blocks from the gondola and river trail. The washing machine just so happened to go out during the stay prior to ours, but the property manager was so kind to have out laundry picked up, washed and returned within just a few hours. The place was clean, check in and out was seamless, communication was speedy. 10 out of 10 recommend and we plan to stay again!”– Leah R.
If you’re looking for sleek, stylish, and steps-from-everything convenience, Ore Station 2 is your perfect downtown basecamp. This is a modern condo with hardwood floors, an updated kitchen, and a cozy living space waiting when you come back from your day’s adventures. Get easy strolls to Telluride’s best dining, and everything you need is right here. Telluride’s best dining and everything you need are only just a short walk away.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Half a block to Lift #8 and the free gondola
Gas fireplace, private balcony, and modern, open living space
Outdoor hot tub, elevator access, ski lockers, and private carport parking
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“The location is great. Just steps from the gondola and a short walk to markets, many restaurants and the Main Street with shops. It was well stocked with everything you need in the kitchen and bathrooms. We had 4 adults and had plenty of space for everyone and everyone was happy. The hot tub is right outside the door and was clean.”– Cindy D’A.
Ghostriders 5 is where you want to be, steps from Main Street, the river trail, and all of Telluride’s top adventures. From your balcony overlooking the San Miguel River to your spot around the cozy fireplace, this bright and comfortable condo makes it easy to unwind after a day spent hiking, biking, or skiing. Everything you love about Telluride is right outside your door, just waiting to be explored.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Walkable to the gondola, Town Park, Main Street, and Bear Creek Trail
Gas fireplace, balcony with river views, and private ski locker
Access to a communal outdoor hot tub and laundry room
🌟 Ghostriders 2 is the additional space you need if you are coming to Telluride with another set of family or friends!
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“Telluride is one of my favorite places to visit! This is my 6th time there and I’ve only stayed overnight once I usually just pass through so it was really great to have a nice place to stay while I was there this time!! Very cozy and I’m obsessed with the couch I need it!! Loved that it was warm inside the place because it was cold outside and we arrived at night so it was chilly. Brown dog pizza is my favorite place to eat at when I’m here and what a great surprise that they do buy 1 get 1 pizza free in Monday nights!! My friends and I had a great time in glad we got to show them Telluride and how amazingly walkable it is! Thank you”– Franchesca F.
The view isn’t just good at Palmyra 4G, but it’s a full-on backdrop to your stay. Perched in the Mountain Village Core with views of the Village Pond and Palmyra Peak, this bright and well-appointed condo invites you to slow down, stretch out, and savor every mountain moment. With ample windows, high-end finishes, and a location steps from the slopes and free Gondola, it’s the kind of place where relaxing feels like second nature.
What Makes This Condo Special?
Full kitchen and stunning views of Village Core Pond and Palmyra Peak
Lobby-level ski locker, heated garage parking, and elevator access
Just a 5-minute walk to lift 4/1 and a complimentary Dial-A-Ride shuttle service
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“We spent 5 nights at the condo and could not be happier! The location is top notch – right in the heart of Mountain Village core – and steps away from the gondola. The place was very well equipped, spotless, a real pleasure to stay at. Hoping to return to beautiful Telluride someday. Thank you, AdvantStay!”– Lisa S.
Perfectly placed seconds from the gondola and ski school, Le Chamonix I makes family mountain getaways effortless and full of cozy and unforgettable moments. With two sunny private balconies, you can see breathtaking mountain views that beg you to slow down, reflect, and soak it all in. This two-story condo is your comfort, space, and location into one unforgettable alpine stay.
What Makes This Condo Special?
A gas fireplace where you can gather around the cozy sofa
Access to the elevator, hot tub, and ski lockers
Near the gondola, skiing, and dining in Mountain Village
🌟 Check out Le Chamonix B and our other Le Chamonix units available for group or multi-family stays!
What Our Recent Guests Are Saying:
“We spent 5 nights at the condo and could not be happier! The location is top notch – right in the heart of Mountain Village core – and steps away from the gondola. The place was very well equipped, spotless, a real pleasure to stay at. Hoping to return to beautiful Telluride someday. Thank you, AdvantStay!”– Lisa S.
🏢 Why Condo Living Makes Your Telluride Trip Even Better
When it comes to planning the perfect Telluride escape, where you stay matters, and condo living gives you the best experience. Here’s why:
Location, Location, Location
Most Telluride condos—like our Airbnbs—are right where you want to be: steps from the gondola, the slopes, the river trail, and downtown. Forget about driving, parking hassles, or waiting for shuttles. If you stay in a condo, the town and trails are basically your backyard.
Built for Adventure and Fun
These ski-in/ski-out homes are designed for mountain living. With features like ski lockers, boot warmers, cozy gas fireplaces, steam showers, and in-unit laundry, you can hit the slopes hard, and have fun even harder without ever feeling cramped or crowded.
Perfect for Groups, Families, and Longer Stays
Having a full kitchen, spacious living areas, multiple bathrooms, and sometimes even multiple balconies makes it easy to gather your people or spread out when you need a little downtime. Whether you’re traveling with kids, friends, or extended family, condos make it easy to stay connected without being on top of each other.
Feels A Little More Like Home
Cooking a quick breakfast before hitting the trails, doing a little laundry after a powder day, or just kicking back in your pajamas in front of the fireplace. Condo living gives you the comforts of home, but upgraded with soaring mountain scenery and an alpine air environment.
🌟 Not sure when to go? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Telluride so you and your group can get started planning your next winter vacation.
Stay Closer to the Mountains
Ready to wake up just steps from the gondola, trails, and Telluride’s best views? Find your perfect Telluride condo with AvantStay. Browse more of our collection of condos designed for every kind of traveler, whether you’re here for ski season, festival weekends, or a well-earned getaway.
Imagine a place where warm blue water touches miles of soft sand, where you can eat fresh shrimp tacos while watching the sunset, and where every day feels like a beach vacation. That’s Corpus Christi, Texas – a fun coastal city that locals call the Sparkling City by the Sea.
You’ll find cool stuff like the USS Lexington, an old Navy ship that you can explore. The Texas State Aquarium has sharks and dolphins. Downtown has colorful murals painted on buildings. And the beaches? They go on forever.
The weather here is pretty good all year. But some times are better than others for your trip. Summer gets really hot and humid. Winter is mild and nice. Spring and fall are just right – not too hot, not too cold.
Want to know when to visit? Let’s talk about the best times to visit Corpus Christi and learn about what you can expect for each season.
About Corpus Christi, TX
Corpus Christi sits right on the Texas coast where the bay meets the Gulf of Mexico. It’s got over 100 miles of beaches nearby. The city is famous for great fishing, water sports, and really good seafood.
The weather here is what you’d expect from the coast. Summers are hot and sticky. Winters are mild and breezy. It doesn’t get super cold, but it can get pretty hot. Most days are sunny, which is great for beach time.
Temperatures usually stay between 50°F and 94°F. It rarely gets colder than 37°F or hotter than 97°F. That means you can visit almost any time of year and still have fun outside.
Corpus Christi Travel Seasons at a Glance
Here’s when most people visit, and when you’ll have the beaches mostly to yourself.
Peak Times: March to May and October to November
Spring has perfect weather. Fall is comfortable after the hot summer. These are the busiest times to visit. Hotels cost more and book up fast.
Great Times: September, December, and February
These months have nice weather but fewer people. You’ll pay less for hotels and won’t wait in long lines at popular spots.
Quieter Times: January, June to August
Winter has the fewest visitors and the cheapest hotels. Summer is hot and humid, so some people stay away. But if you love the beach, summer is perfect.
Why Visit Corpus Christi?
This city has way more than just beaches. You can walk through the USS Lexington and see where sailors lived. The Texas State Aquarium has cool sea creatures. Downtown has great restaurants and fun bars.
The food scene is amazing. You’ll find everything from fancy seafood places to casual spots serving fish tacos. Each part of the city feels different. The bayfront is busy and fun. The beach areas are laid back and chill.
Corpus Christi loves outdoor fun. You can fish, surf, or just hang out on the sand. The city sits right on the coast, so you’re never far from the water. It’s also a good home base for checking out other Texas beach towns.
The weather lets you do outdoor stuff almost all year. The Gulf of Mexico keeps summers from getting too crazy hot and winters from getting too cold.
Your Month-by-Month Guide to Corpus Christi
Corpus Christi in January: Coolest month, hardly any tourists, perfect for museums
Corpus Christi in February: Getting warmer, still quiet, good for walking around
Corpus Christi in March: Spring starts, wildflowers bloom, and more people arrive
Corpus Christi in April: Really nice weather, great for being outside, gets busier
Corpus Christi in May: Warm and sunny, festival time, awesome temperatures
Corpus Christi in June: Summer heat starts, more humid, great beach weather
Corpus Christi in July: Hottest month, very sticky, perfect for swimming
Corpus Christi in August: Still really hot, rains the most, best for water fun
Corpus Christi in September: Starts cooling down, fewer people, nice for exploring
Corpus Christi in October: Beautiful fall weather, comfortable, popular time to visit
Corpus Christi in November: Cool and nice, not many tourists, great weather
Corpus Christi in December: Mild winter, holiday stuff happening, peaceful
When Is the Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi?
The best time to visit Corpus Christi is April through June and October through November. The weather is in the 60s to 80s during these months. Perfect for beach days, water sports, and walking around town. You get great weather without crazy crowds or super high prices.
These times give you the best of everything. Nice temperatures, not too many people, and perfect weather for doing fun stuff outside.
Visiting in Spring (March to May)
Spring in Corpus Christi is pretty awesome. The weather warms up and everything starts blooming. Daytime temps hit around 80°F. Nights stay nice at about 55°F. It doesn’t rain too much.
This is when you want to be outside. The beaches are perfect. The water is warming up. You can fish, boat, or just chill on the sand without melting from the heat.
Spring weather makes everything more fun. The beaches aren’t crowded yet. The water feels good for swimming and water sports. You can rent kayaks or go paddleboarding without dying from the heat.
Walking around downtown is nice. Eating outside at restaurants feels great. The evenings are perfect for boat rides or just watching the sunset.
Corpus Christi Events in Spring
Buccaneer Days (April-May) – Big spring party with parades
Texas SandFest (April) – People make amazing sand sculptures
Fiesta de la Flor (April) – Celebrates the singer Selena
Winds of Change Kite Festival (March) – Fun kite flying for families
Local Eats in Corpus Christi During Spring
Spring weather is perfect for trying all the great seafood here. You can sit outside at restaurants. The temperatures make it easy to walk around and try different places. Everything from fresh shrimp to fish tacos tastes better when you can eat outside.
Corpus Christi Travel Tips During Spring
Spring gets busy, especially when festivals happen. Book your hotel early. Pack some light layers because mornings can be cooler than afternoons. This is the best time to visit if it’s your first trip here.
Visiting in Summer (June to August)
Summer gets hot and sticky. Temps hit the low to mid-90s during the day. Nights stay warm in the mid-70s. It rains the most in August, usually quick afternoon storms.
But if you love beach weather, summer is your time. Long days mean more beach time. The water is perfect for swimming. You just need to be smart about the heat.
Summer is all about the water. The beaches are perfect. Padre Island National Seashore and Mustang Island have great swimming and surfing. When it gets too hot, duck into places like the aquarium or museums where there’s air conditioning.
Fishing is great in summer. Boat tours are fun in the evening when it cools down a bit. Many restaurants have outdoor areas with fans and misters to keep you cool.
Corpus Christi Events in Summer
Fourth of July Celebration (July) – Fireworks over the bay
Texas Jazz Festival (July) – Great music in Corpus Christi
Rockport Art Festival (July) – Cool art show nearby
Summer Concerts (June-August) – Free music at different places
Local Eats in Corpus Christi During Summer
Summer food is all about staying cool. Think cold drinks, fresh ceviche, and frozen margaritas. Many beach restaurants have covered patios where you can eat outside without baking in the sun.
Corpus Christi Travel Tips During Summer
Pack light clothes that breathe. Drink lots of water. Plan indoor stuff for the middle of the day when it’s hottest. Save beach time and walking around for morning and evening.
Visiting in Fall (September to November)
Fall is one of the best times to visit. October and November are especially nice. The heat starts going away. It’s less humid. Fewer people are around.
The weather gets comfortable again. You can do outdoor stuff without sweating through your clothes. It’s a great time for everything Corpus Christi offers.
Fall weather is perfect for everything. Beach time is comfortable again. Water sports feel good without the crazy heat. You can walk around town without melting.
The evenings are really nice for eating outside and going on boat rides. Museums and attractions aren’t packed with summer tourists.
Corpus Christi Events in Fall
Dia de los Muertos Festival (November) – Cool Mexican celebration
Hawk Migration (October) – Watch birds flying south at nearby parks
Airport Runway 5K (October) – Run on an actual airport runway
Harbor Lights Festival (December) – Pretty holiday lights around the harbor
Local Eats in Corpus Christi During Fall
Fall weather makes eating outside fun again. Restaurant patios are comfortable. You can walk around and try different neighborhoods without dying from the heat.
Corpus Christi Travel Tips During Fall
Fall has great weather and reasonable crowds. October gets busy because the weather is so nice. Pack layers because mornings can be cool and afternoons warm. Hotel prices are better than in spring and summer.
Visiting in Winter (December to February)
Winter is mild here. Temperatures stay in the 50s to mid-60s. It’s the driest time of year. Sometimes cold fronts come through and make it chilly for a few days.
Winter has the fewest tourists and the cheapest hotels. The weather is still nice enough to do outdoor stuff most days.
Winter is great for indoor attractions like museums. But the weather is still nice enough for walking tours and sightseeing. Many outdoor activities work fine during winter here.
It’s perfect for exploring shops and restaurants without crowds. Winter evenings are nice for cozy dinners and indoor entertainment.
Corpus Christi Events in Winter
Harbor Lights Festival (December) – Beautiful holiday lights
Winter Bird Watching (January-February) – Great time to see birds
Restaurant Week (January) – Try fancy restaurants for less money
Valentine’s Events (February) – Romantic stuff around the city
Local Eats in Corpus Christi During Winter
Winter food is more about comfort and warmth. Many restaurants have special winter menus. The weather is still nice enough to eat outside on warmer days.
Corpus Christi Travel Tips During Winter
Winter gives you the best deals on hotels. There aren’t many crowds. Pack layers because some days are warmer than others. Bring a light jacket for cooler evenings.
Best Time of the Year to Visit Corpus Christi (By Interest)
Different times of year are better for different activities. Here’s when to visit based on what you want to do:
For Fewer Crowds: January to February and Weekdays Year-Round
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi for Fewer People
The winter months have the fewest tourists. Visiting Tuesday through Thursday, any time of year, means shorter lines and less crowded beaches.
For Perfect Weather: April to June and October to November
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi for Great Weather
These months have the best temperatures – usually 70s to 80s. Perfect for beach time and outdoor activities. Not too hot, not too cold.
For Beach Activities: May to September
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi for Swimming and Beach Fun
The warmest months with the longest days. Perfect for Padre Island, Mustang Island, and all the beaches around here. The water temperature is just right for swimming.
For Festival Experiences: April and July
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi for Big Events
Buccaneer Days in April and the Texas Jazz Festival in July are the biggest parties in town. Lots of fun stuff is happening.
For Water Sports: May to October
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi for Windsurfing and Boating
Best water temperatures and steady Gulf breezes. Perfect for windsurfing, kiteboarding, sailing, and other water sports that Corpus Christi is known for.
For Cheaper Prices: December to February and June to August
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi on a Budget
Off-season times save you money on hotels and attractions. You still get good weather and fun activities, just fewer people around.
For Seeing Wildlife: October to March
Best Time to Visit Corpus Christi for Nature and Birds
Cooler months bring migrating birds. Great weather for visiting wildlife areas and parks. Perfect for taking pictures and enjoying nature.
Where to Stay in Corpus Christi
Find great places to stay that show off Corpus Christi’s coastal vibe. These vacation homes have awesome views and everything you need for a perfect beach trip. Here are some amazing Corpus Christi vacation homes you can rent with AvantStay:
Graford – Fun family home with a hot tub, mini golf, and game room.
Villa La Isla – A beautiful coastal house with great amenities and an island-style vibe.
Ridley Retreat – Our home that’s perfectly situated on North Padre Island.
Peaceful Paradise – Laid-back home perfect for relaxing with friends and family.
The Beautiful Place – A hidden gem just a few minutes walk from White Cap Beach.
Create Your Corpus Christi Itinerary
Ready to plan your Texas coast trip? Let our team help you set up everything for your Corpus Christi visit! We can arrange fishing trips, dinner reservations, and cool local experiences that show you the real Corpus Christi.
Want more ideas for coastal fun? Check out our guide to the best things to do in Corpus Christi. And if you want to explore more of the Texas coast, look at our guides to other beach towns nearby.
Your Corpus Christi Adventure Starts Here
No matter when you visit, Corpus Christi’s beautiful beaches, amazing seafood, and friendly Texas vibe will give you awesome memories. The city has the perfect mix of beach relaxation and coastal fun. Every visit brings new discoveries and real Gulf Coast experiences.
We have the perfect Corpus Christi place waiting for you. Book with AvantStay today and see how amazing coastal trips can be when you experience Corpus Christi’s legendary beaches, culture, and Gulf Coast beauty.
FAQs
Is Corpus Christi expensive to visit?
Corpus Christi can cost more during busy times like April through June and October through November when hotels charge more because lots of people want to visit. But you can save money during the winter months when you’ll pay less for hotels, see fewer crowds, and still have nice weather for checking out beaches and restaurants.
How crowded does Corpus Christi get?
Busy seasons bring lots of people, especially during big events like Buccaneer Days, when beaches, restaurants, and attractions get packed. For a more chill experience, visit during quieter times like September, December, or February. Or explore during weekdays when there are fewer people around.
When to avoid Corpus Christi?
The summer months from June to August get really hot and humid, which can make walking around uncomfortable during the middle of the day. But this is actually perfect weather for beach and water activities. April through June sees the most tourists and the highest prices because the weather is so nice. Still, Corpus Christi’s coastal weather and fun activities make it a good place to visit any time of year if you plan right and know what to expect.
February is the perfect month to shake off those winter blues and rediscover a connection with your loved ones. It is also a great month to travel, especially for those in northern climates looking for a chance to get away from winter and find somewhere a bit warmer.
If you’re planning a romantic getaway with your partner, a solo adventure to recharge your soul, or a friends’ retreat to celebrate love in all its forms, or just making the most of Presidents Day weekend, February offers some incredible opportunities to escape the cold and embrace warmth – both in weather and in spirit.
With Valentine’s Day setting the romantic tone and shorter days making us crave sunshine, February becomes the ideal time to explore warmth and intimacy. Let’s explore the most enchanting AvantStay vacation rental homes to visit in February, where you can create unforgettable memories while escaping the winter chill.
Why February is the Perfect Time
February might be the shortest month, but it’s packed with reasons to travel. The warmest destinations in the US during February make it an ideal time to seek out those sunny, warm destinations that feel like a world away from winter’s grip.
The magic of February travel lies in:
Romance in the air: Valentine’s Day creates a naturally romantic atmosphere wherever you go.
Fewer crowds: Most destinations are less crowded than peak season, giving you more intimate experiences.
Better deals: Hotels and vacation rentals often offer attractive rates during the off-season.
Perfect weather: Many warm destinations have ideal temperatures, meaning not too hot, not too cold.
1. Whidbey Island, Washington
Whidbey Island in February offers a completely different kind of romantic escape. One filled with dramatic coastal views, cozy fireplaces, and the peaceful rhythm of Pacific Northwest island life. While February brings cooler temperatures ranging from 48 to 50°F, the island’s stunning natural beauty and intimate atmosphere create the perfect setting for meaningful connections.
Activities to Do: Explore the seaside towns like Langley, take romantic walks along windswept beaches, or simply enjoy the breathtaking water views from your cozy retreat. The island’s artistic community, local wineries, and farm-to-table restaurants add culture and sophistication to your peaceful getaway.
Perfect for: Couples seeking intimate coastal romance, nature lovers, anyone wanting to disconnect and reconnect.
Where to Stay: Experience the best waterfront views at Whidbey Bliss, where you can wake up to stunning water views and enjoy the comforts of the nearby coast.
Offering the perfect weather for wine country romance, with mild temperatures from 65 to 69°F and clear skies, Temecula in February creates ideal conditions for vineyard exploration and intimate tastings. This Southern California gem is a wine country with the warmth of desert sunshine.
Activities to Do: Spend your days touring award-winning wineries, enjoying romantic hot air balloon rides over rolling vineyards, or exploring the historic Old Town with its shops and restaurants. The area’s stunning natural beauty and world-class wineries create an atmosphere that’s both sophisticated and relaxed.
Perfect for: Wine enthusiasts, couples seeking romantic vineyard experiences, and anyone wanting to experience luxury with natural beauty.
Where to Stay: Indulge in a wine country experience at Summit Ranch, where you can enjoy panoramic vineyard views and the perfect base for exploring Temecula’s renowned wine scene.
Wine Country at its most intimate and beautiful. With mild temperatures from 59 to 62°F and fewer crowds, Sonoma is known as a world-renowned wine region that offers the perfect setting for romantic tastings, farm-to-table dining, and scenic drives through rolling vineyards. If you are still looking to build your itinerary here or just planning to stay 48 hours max, check out our guide on the best things to do in Sonoma for more ideas.
Activities to Do: Explore historic wineries, enjoy intimate tastings with passionate vintners, or simply relax among the vines with a picnic basket filled with local artisanal cheeses and fresh bread. The region’s commitment to sustainable farming and exceptional cuisine creates an atmosphere that’s both luxurious and authentic.
Where to Stay: Discover wine country adventures at Terra Vina, where you can immerse yourself in the heart of Sonoma’s renowned wine region with style and comfort.
Offering some of the most breathtaking scenery in the American Southwest, Sedona has comfortable temperatures from 53 to 61°F in February. It is the perfect time to explore the area’s famous red rock formations and spiritual energy. This mystical desert town provides an unforgettable backdrop for romance and personal connection.
Activities to Do: Hike among towering red rocks, experience the area’s famous energy vortexes, or simply enjoy stunning sunrise views from your retreat. The town’s incredible spas, art galleries, and fine dining restaurants add sophistication to your desert adventure.
Perfect for: Couples seeking spiritual connection, nature enthusiasts, anyone wanting to experience the magic of the Southwest
Where to Stay: Red Rock viewing is possible at Cathedral View, where you can wake up to stunning views of Sedona’s iconic red rock formations.
Mild temperatures and beautiful rolling hills covered in vineyards. That’s what makes it the perfect time to explore this emerging wine region. Known for its innovative winemakers and relaxed atmosphere, Paso Robles provides an intimate wine country experience without the crowds and better temperature from 62 to 64°F.
Activities to Do: Spend your days touring boutique wineries, enjoying tastings at family-owned vineyards, or exploring the downtown area with its local restaurants and shops. The region’s commitment to sustainable farming and artisanal winemaking creates a romantic atmosphere that’s both authentic and sophisticated.
Perfect for: Wine lovers seeking undiscovered gems, couples wanting intimate vineyard experiences, and anyone looking for a Central Coast experience.
Where to Stay: Enjoy wine country elegance at Hilltop, where you can take in panoramic views of rolling vineyards and experience the best of Paso Robles wine country.
Lake Arrowhead offers a magical mountain escape with crisp, clear air and stunning lake views surrounded by pine forests. This mountain community provides the perfect setting for cozy romantic getaways and outdoor adventures with temperatures ranging from 63°F.
Activities to Do: Enjoy peaceful walks around the pristine lake, cozy up by the fireplace in your mountain retreat, or explore the village with its boutique shops and lakefront restaurants. The area’s natural beauty and peaceful atmosphere create an ideal setting for reconnection and relaxation.
Perfect for: Couples seeking mountain romance, nature lovers, and anyone wanting a peaceful lake retreat.
Where to Stay: Feel mountain magic at A-Frame Retreat, where you can enjoy stunning lake views and the perfect alpine getaway in the heart of the San Bernardino Mountains.
For those who prefer a different kind of February romance, Asheville has the cozy mountain vibe and stunning Blue Ridge Mountain views. While it may be cooler at 49°F, the city’s incredible craft beer scene, vibrant arts culture, and proximity to the Great Smoky Mountains National Park make it perfect for couples who love adventure and creativity.
Activities to Do: Explore the historic Biltmore Estate, enjoy craft brewery tours through the city’s renowned beer scene, or cozy up in mountain cabins with fireplace views. The city’s unique blend of outdoor adventure, artistic culture, and mountain sophistication creates a romantic atmosphere that’s both adventurous and intimate.
Perfect for: Couples who love craft beer and mountain adventures, art enthusiasts, anyone seeking cozy mountain romance with cultural flair.
Where to Stay: Engage in mountain artistry at Artist’s Palette, where you can immerse yourself in Asheville’s creative spirit while enjoying the Blue Ridge Mountains.
February travel isn’t just about escaping winter, but it’s also about nurturing relationships and practicing self-care during the season of love.
Create Romantic Moments For Couples
Make sunsets a shared ritual, whether you’re in the hills of Paso Robles or by the water in Whidbey Island. Treat yourselves to soothing spa moments, from world-class facilities to AvantStay’s in-home massage services. For a special night in, enjoy an intimate dinner with ocean views or let a private chef craft a personalized meal right inside your vacation home.
Focus on Self-Care and Wellness for Singles
February is an ideal time to unplug, wander through nature, and reconnect with yourself. Lean into mindful moments such as beach yoga, mountain meditation, or quiet mornings in a peaceful vacation home. Stay nourished with fresh local food, outdoor adventures, and plenty of rest to reset your mind and body.
Whether it’s a Galentine’s getaway or a friends’ trip, February is the perfect time to explore new cities, enjoy great food, and celebrate connection. Families can also take advantage of spacious homes built for bonding across generations. Couples traveling together will love group trips that offer shared experiences while still giving everyone their own private space.
Tips for a Perfect February Travel
Whether you’re planning a romantic couples retreat, a galentine’s getaway with friends, or just you going solo, here’s how to make your February trip truly special.
Pack Layers: Cool evenings can sneak up even in warm destinations. Light sweaters or jackets make outdoor nights cozier. A little extra warmth always sets the mood for comfort.
Book Sunset Activities: February sunsets are some of the most stunning of the year. Add a sunset cruise, hike, or beach moment to your itinerary. It’s a simple plan that creates unforgettable memories.
Plan Indoor Backup Activities: Weather can be unpredictable, so keep cozy indoor ideas ready. Think fireplaces, game nights, home-cooked meals, or a spa-like evening in your rental. Backup plans keep the vibe stress-free.
Prioritize Comfort: Choose homes with features that elevate your stay. It could be hot tubs, fireplaces, plush bedding, or private outdoor spaces. Those little luxuries make the entire trip feel more special.
After setting the stage with thoughtful planning and cozy touches, you’re ready to take the next step in creating your perfect February getaway.
Make February Extra Special with AvantStay
Your February getaway should be as unique as your relationships. With AvantStay’s Concierge services, you can add special touches that make your trip unforgettable:
In-Home Spa Services: We can book professional massage therapists, yoga instructors, and wellness practitioners for you.
Private Chef Experiences: Romantic dinners, wine tastings, and cooking classes is possible in your rented vacation home.
Pre-Arrival Grocery Stocking: You can arrive at your home to find your favorite foods and drinks waiting for you.
Activity Planning: From airport pickup service to sunrise hot air balloon rides or even special surprise requests, we can plan out your trip, so you can truly relax!
Experience a February getaway that celebrates love, friendship, and self-care. Download the AvantStay app to discover our Concierge services and make your trip truly special.
A Year of Love and Adventure with AvantStay
Don’t limit the love to just February! Make every month an adventure filled with love, laughter, and unforgettable moments. Book your next romantic seasonal getaway with AvantStay today.
February proves that the best getaways aren’t always about escaping to somewhere completely different. Sometimes they’re about finding the perfect setting to appreciate what you already have.
February travel offers something for every type of love story. And the magic of February travel lies in its perfect timing. It’s the month when you can truly focus on what matters most: connection, adventure, and creating memories that last a lifetime.
Ready to fall in love with February travel? Start planning your romantic escape and book with AvantStay today for the perfect love-filled adventure.
Whether you’re looking for a getaway place to sunbathe, surf, or simply take in incredible views of the seaside, San Diego has a perfect beach for you.
With more than 70 miles of coastline, the city offers a wide variety of beaches, each with its own unique character. From bustling Mission Beach to the secluded Black’s Beach, there’s a beach in San Diego to suit every taste.
So, where should you start your search for the perfect beach? Well, we’ve put together the complete guide to best things to do in San Diego and our San Diego Itinerary travel guide to help you out. So, keep reading for a list of all the best beaches in this sunny southern California city.
1. Mission Beach
San Diego is home to some of the most beautiful beaches in California, and Mission Beach is one of the best. Though it’s not as well known as La Jolla or Newport, it’s a favorite among locals because it’s a great spot to relax and enjoy the sunshine.
The wide, sandy beaches are perfect for sunbathing, and the gentle waves make it an idyllic spot for swimmers and surfers. Next to the sandy shores, you’ll find a boardwalk perfect for walking, jogging, or biking. And, when you work up an appetite from spending a day in the sun having fun, there are plenty of restaurants and cafes nearby to satisfy your hunger.
Plus, Mission Beach is situated next to Belmont Park, so it’s easy to get to, and there’s plenty of parking. Catamaran, our rental home in the Mission Bay Area is just a stroll less than 50 feet away.
2. La Jolla Shores
La Jolla Shores’ wide, sandy beach stretches for more than a mile, and the warm water is perfect for swimming, surfing, and kayaking. La Jolla Cove, home of “Seal Rock,” draws locals and visitors alike to watch San Diego’s seals and sea lions basking in the sun. La Jolla is also a fantastic place to snorkel, thanks to the clear water and abundance of marine life.
In addition to the beach and cove, La Jolla Shores has an abundance of tidal pools that draw people in, providing a close-up look at sea stars, crabs, and other creatures native to the Pacific coast. La Jolla Shores also features several excellent restaurants, cafes, and shops, making it the perfect place to spend a day or a week. Stay at Vista, an elegant home perched on the hills of La Jolla and take in the panoramic views of the Pacific Ocean.
3. Torrey Pines State Beach
Torrey Pines State Beach is a beautiful stretch of coastline in San Diego that happens to be a state park. Located just north of Torrey Pines State Reserve, the beach is known for its beautiful sandy beaches, rocky cliffs, and tranquil lagoon.
The area is a popular destination for visitors from all over the world, who come to enjoy its many facilities and attractions. These include picnic areas, hiking trails, and a variety of water sports. The beach is also home to many unique plant and animal species, making it a perfect destination for nature lovers. Our esteemed home, Seascape, is just steps away from Torrey Pines State Beach.
4. Pacific Beach
If you’re looking for a laid-back beach neighborhood in San Diego, Pacific Beach is the place for you. This beach community is popular with sunbathers and surfers alike, and you’ll find plenty of trendy hotel bars and casual cafes lining the boardwalk.
Indigo is our home best situated near the Pacific Beach. In the surrounding streets and along Mission Boulevard, you’ll find many shops, boutiques, eateries, and bars that cater to a younger crowd.
Unlike the other beach spots, Pacific Beach offers more of a community feel since it’s in the middle of the neighborhood. However, the beach still offers a relaxed place to enjoy the sun, sand, and ocean.
5. Del Mar City Beach
Del Mar City Beach is one of the most popular beaches in San Diego. Located just north of downtown, the beach offers beautiful views of the city skyline. The sand is clean and well-maintained, and there are lifeguard stations located throughout the beach that provide maps of the area.
The beach is also a great place to catch some waves, as it’s one of the few beaches in San Diego that offers consistent surf. For those looking for a more relaxing experience, Del Mar City Beach also has many restaurants and bars, making it the perfect spot to grab a bite or watch the sunset.
In addition to the sand and sun, Powerhouse and Seagrove are two of the beach’s coastal parks, providing excellent spots for picnics and BBQs.
6. Black’s Beach
Black’s Beach is one of the best-kept secrets in San Diego. This secluded section of the beach is situated beneath the bluffs of Torrey Pines, providing stunning ocean views.
Although it is technically part of Torrey Pines State Beach, Black’s Beach feels like a world away from the hustle and bustle of the city, making it the perfect place to relax and enjoy nature. However, the beach is also attractive to surfers who flock to the beach for the winter waves.
Because of the beach’s seclusion, Black’s Beach has also become a well-known nude beach, although you don’t have to be naked to visit. Visitors can sunbathe, swim, surf, or simply take a walk along the coast.
7. Flat Rock Beach
In Torrey Pines State Beach, Flat Rock Beach is a great place to spend a day in San Diego. There’s plenty of space to spread out, and the beach is well-known for its cleanliness and steep bluffs that provide breathtaking views of the Pacific Coast.
The beach has plenty of amenities to keep you entertained, including a playground, volleyball courts, and a picnic area. The clear blue water is ideal for swimming, snorkeling, and diving.
If you get tired of the water or want to shake out your legs, you can hike either the Beach Trail or Broken Hill Trail, both of which take you on a loop around the beach and up the cliffs for panoramic views.
8. Ocean Beach City Beach
If you’re looking for a laid-back beach town with great surfing and tasty food, you’ll want to head to Ocean Beach. This southern California gem is located just north of Point Loma and has a busy local scene.
You’ll find people surfing, sunbathing, and taking a stroll along the pier. Plus, if you head to the north end of the beach, you’ll find yourself at Dog Beach, where you can frolic with some pups. Stay at Maven, our 2-story house with striking views of the Pacific Ocean.
The vibe here is very vintage and groovy, and the locals are friendly and welcoming. In addition to the great atmosphere, you’ll also find excellent dining and microbrews, and when the sun goes down, the nightlife picks up.
9. Playa Pacifica on Mission Bay
Playa Pacifica Park is a great place to enjoy the sunny California weather with a protected beach located on Mission Bay’s eastside. This protected beach is perfect for swimming, sunbathing, and building sandcastles. In addition, it features a large grassy area ideal for picnicking, playing games, or just relaxing.
The best part of Playa Pacifica Park is its location; it’s situated right in the heart of San Diego, so you can enjoy all the city has to offer while still getting away from the hustle and bustle. The whole park has beautiful views of Mission Bay and is a great place to watch the boats go by.
10. Encinitas Beach
Encinitas Beach is a beautiful, serene beach that’s perfect for a day of relaxing and enjoying the incredible views. The park sits just off Highway 101, but the cliffs and limited access points make it feel more secluded. The tidal pools are also a hit with the kids, providing much to explore and splash around in.
This beach is also one of the cleaner beaches in the area, with spotless bathrooms and showers just off the sand so that you can rinse off before heading home. So whether you’re looking to soak up some sun, take a dip in the ocean, or just enjoy a peaceful stroll along the shore.
11. Coronado Beach
If you’re looking for a breathtaking beach to relax on while in southern California, look no further than Coronado Beach, otherwise known as Central Beach.
Located just across the bay from the city, the miles of breezy coastline provide a family-friendly haven. The sand is also incredibly soft and clean, making it a perfect place to sunbathe or build sandcastles with the kids. In addition to being well-maintained, Coronado Beach offers plenty of amenities, including showers, restrooms, and picnic tables.
Visitors can also rent chairs, umbrellas, and boogie boards. The water is clean and clear, perfect for swimming, surfing, and paddleboarding.
12. Imperial Beach
Just five miles north of the Mexican border, Imperial Beach is a residential beach city in San Diego that offers various activities for residents and visitors. The four-mile stretch of beach is excellent for surfing, sport fishing, beach volleyball, and even horseback riding along the sandy shore.
As a part of a revitalization effort in the area, Imperial Beach is home to a boardwalk overlooking the beach. On the boardwalk, you’ll find benches, bike lanes, and a spacious lane for taking a stroll. Plus, you can travel just a short way down the beach to the Tijuana Sloughs, one of the most popular surf spots in the area.
13. Oceanside Harbor Beach
Harbor Beach is a great place to spend the day, whether you’re looking to catch some waves or just soak up the sun. The beach offers plenty of activities for everyone, from surfing and volleyball to simply relaxing on the sand. And when you’re ready for a break from the beach, the adjacent Oceanside Harbor has plenty to offer.
You can go sailing, deep-sea fishing, whale watching, or kayaking. Or, if you want to explore the area, you can stroll around the marina and visit the sea lions. There’s also a variety of shops and restaurants in the harbor, so you can easily find something to eat or drink.
14. Solana Beach
The Solana Beach coastline is stunning. The cliffs are beautiful, and you can only access Fletcher Cove from a path here. The cove offers seclusion, white sand, and the ability to walk quite a ways both north and south. Plus, you don’t have to pay for parking at Fletcher Cove.
Besides the cove, Solana Beach features the main beach area for those who want to lounge in the sand and swim in the waves and Seascape Surf Park for visitors looking to take their boards out. Interested in staying here? Book our Wavebreak house today!
15. Swami’s Beach
Swami’s Beach is one of San Diego’s most attractive spots for surfers. This secluded spot is located just south of La Jolla and is known for its dramatic cliffs, crystal-clear water, and lush vegetation. Besides surfing, visitors can enjoy various activities at Swami Beach, including swimming, sunbathing, fishing, and exploring the tidal pools.
The beach is also a popular spot for picnics and barbecues, so you can enjoy a quaint lunch while watching surfers hit the waves. Several picturesque trails lead to San Elijo State Beach and the Boneyards below the Encinitas Bluffs, making it the perfect place to enjoy a day in nature.
16. Sunset Cliffs Natural Park
Sunset Cliffs Natural Park is a gorgeous 68-acre park located on the western edge of Point Loma in San Diego. The park features stunning cliffs, dramatic ocean views, and a variety of natural habitats that allow visitors to take in a variety of plant and animal species and several cultural and historical resources.
Visitors can hike along miles of trails, relax on one of the many scenic overlooks, or even swim in the ocean; however, the water is probably too rough for swimming. Luckily for travelers with kids, there is an abundance of tide pools here in case your kiddies want to splash around. Sunset Cliffs Natural Park is a special place where people can connect with nature and appreciate the beauty of the Pacific Ocean.
Final Thoughts
San Diego is a fantastic place to spend a summer vacation, and with this guide to its beaches, you’ll find the perfect spot for your needs. Whether you’re looking for a quiet place to relax or join in on the action-packed fun, San Diego has something for everyone. So pack your bags and get ready for some sun and sand.
Looking for a place to stay in San Diego? Stay with AvantStay! We have vacation homes located near the San Diego Beaches and San Diego Airbnbs with the best ocean views. Check these out and book the perfect home today!
Lake Arrowhead is one of the best vacation spots in the San Bernardino Mountains in Southern California. A stunning mountain range that is often referred to as the “Alps of Southern California.”
At only an hour to an hour-and-a-half drive from Los Angeles, it’s an easy road trip to escape the city and get into the mountains. Lake Arrowhead is also home to a variety of outdoor activities.
From taking a boat tour on the lake to hiking through the San Bernardino National Forest, a long weekend in Lake Arrowhead is perfect for families or even a romantic weekend getaway.
1. Lake Arrowhead Village
Source: Discover Inland Empire
As one of the central attractions at Lake Arrowhead, Lake Arrowhead Village is on the southern shore of the lake. As you stroll the village, you get to take in the breathtaking views of the lake and mountains.
Lake Arrowhead Village is a bustling downtown area filled with restaurants, shops, and live music. The village is home to the Arrowhead Center Stage Concert Hall, which hosts the famous Lake Arrowhead Village Summer Concert Series.
Whatever season you visit, this town center is host to a variety of fun things to do all year round! Our vacation rental, Sutter, offers quick access to the village and is the perfect place to stay if you don’t want to miss all the action.
2. Skypark at Santa’s Village
Despite its name, Skypark at Santa’s Villageis a year-round adventure theme park. Just three miles from Lake Arrowhead, this facility has a long history of making many childhood memories. Since 1955 it has opened and closed its doors many times, but in 2016 it reopened and is operating better than ever before.
Today, this theme park is home to a variety of outdoor activities like axe throwing, rock climbing, mountain biking, archery, and ziplining. Tickets are general admission and include available activities, rides, and entertainment.
While Skypark at Santa’s Village is open year-round, wintertime is the best time to visit. The village turns into a winter wonderland and features seasonal attractions like Ice skating. The park also glows with thousands of Christmas lights during the winter season.
3. McKenzie’s WaterSki School
McKenzie’s Water Ski Schoolis one of the best ways to hit the water and learn something new! If you ever wanted to learn how to water ski, wakeboard, or kneeboard, your getaway to Lake Arrowhead is the perfect place! Don’t worry if you’re new to these sports—the instructors at the school are highly trained and have the experience needed to teach you how to get up and ski on your own in no time.
4. Rim of the World Scenic Byway
Lake Arrowhead is one of the many stops along the Rim of the World Scenic Byway. This 110-mile route follows the rim of the San Bernardino Mountains, starting from Cajon Pass and winding all the way to San Gorgonio Mountain.
There are a variety of noticeable stops along the highway, including Silverwood Lake, Big Bear Lake, and The Mountain History Museum. Big Bear is a popular winter destination, as it is home to Big Bear Mountain Resort, which offers some of the best skiing in Southern California.
The Mountain History Museum is home to the entire history of the mountainous region. This museum is a great stop along the drive to stretch your legs and enjoy the history of Southern California.
5. Lollipop Park
Lollipop Park is a lakefront amusement park that features a plethora of attractions for all ages. The top attractions here are the carousel, go-kart track, food concessions, spinning teacups, a candy store, and a mini golf course. This is the perfect place to visit for the whole family!
6. The Tudor House
The Tudor House is one of the many historical locations in Lake Arrowhead. Its history dates back to the 1920s, before the Great Depression. It is mostly known for its prohibition-era entertainment and rumored mobster management.
Since the 1950s, The Tudor House has been a legal source of entertainment and a popular performance space. It is host to a variety of live music events throughout the year, ranging in every genre.
It is also host to a variety of events such as Sunday Brunch and a monthly Mystery Dinner Theatre. The property is also available to be reserved for private special events, including workshops and retreats.
7. Heaps Peak Arboretum
Heaps Peak Arboretumis a beautiful day adventure within the San Bernardino National Forest. The Sequoia Trail circles the arboretum and offers a variety of interpretive information about the surrounding flora and fauna along the trail. With about 30 acres to adventure, this is the perfect adventure for your family to reconnect with nature.
8. Wildhaven Ranch
Wildhaven Ranch is a wildlife sanctuary home to a number of endangered and indigenous species. At this ranch, you can meet various animals, go on guided tours, participate in fun programs, and do a variety of other things. They are committed to preserving the wildlife indigenous to the San Bernardino Mountains. This is not a zoo and does require reservations in order to visit.
9. Lake Gregory Regional Park
Lake Gregory Regional Parkis just a 10-minute drive from Lake Arrowhead. This park offers a variety of entertainment and adventure that is perfect for the whole family. Lake Gregory in Crestline, California, is the best place for all kinds of outdoor activities. You can fish, go boating or kayaking, or even hike if you don’t want to hit the water. If you don’t want to bring your boat or water equipment into the mountains, Lake Gregory has lake equipment rentals available.
Looking to stay near Lake Gregory? Our modern, industrial-charm vacation rental, The Matterhorn Manor, is just a short drive from Lake Gregory and all its popular attractions.
10. Snow Valley Mountain Resort
The winter season is the best time to visit the Snow Valley Mountain Resort for skiing and snowboarding. They have something for everyone! From long intermediate trails to the best beginner terrain to the sledding area, the whole family will find something to do. Even if you are just starting to learn how to ski or snowboard or want to improve your skills, Snow Valley has an award-winning learning center that offers lessons for all skill levels and ages.
The resort is open during the summer months for mountain biking, hiking, and other special events.
11. Lake Arrowhead Queen Boat Tour
See all the beauty Lake Arrowhead has to offer on the Lake Arrowhead Queen Boat Tour. This charming tour departs daily from Lake Arrowhead Village and is an hour-long tour. As you cruise along the shoreline, take in the beautiful views of the lakefront mansions while you learn about the geologic history of the lake and the native cultures that call the lake home.
You can purchase tickets at Leroy’s Boardshop across from the boat landing dock. Tours happen throughout the day, but the best times to go are early in the morning or later in the afternoon.
12. Strawberry Peak
Strawberry Peak is one of the most iconic peaks in the San Gabriel Mountains in Southern California. If you want to spend the day on the hiking trails and enjoy the mountains, driving the 2 hours from Lake Arrowheadmakes it the perfect day trip.
Strawberry Peak stands 6,164 feet high and gets its name from the number of strawberries that grow around the peak. This hike may be difficult for beginners or young children, but the views make it worth it once you get to the top.
No matter where you would like to stay on the lake, you will find some of the most relaxing and stunning views. With so many outdoor activities during the summer and winter, Lake Arrowhead is the perfect year-round destination. It is the perfect weekend escape from large cities like Los Angeles.
Are you ready to embark on your next Southern California mountain adventure? Get away from all the hustle and bustle and start booking your stay in AvantStay. Book one of our cabin rentals in Lake Arrowhead and experience modern mountain living at our lakeside homes.
Considering yourself a heavy dink-er? 2025 proved that you either like pickleball or you’re wrong. With the addition of pickleball courts in our homes, we figured it was time we gave these courts their shining moment… since we already gave our vacation rentals with tennis courts theirs.
Pickleball has taken the world by storm, and for good reason; it’s fun, social, and perfect for players of all ages and skill levels. If you’re a fan of this fast-growing sport or simply looking for a unique vacation experience, you’re in luck!
We’ve rounded up 15 incredible vacation rentals that feature private or shared pickleball courts, along with luxurious amenities to make your stay unforgettable.
Best Vacation Homes with a Pickleball Court
Whether you’re planning to “dink” the days away or simply relax in a beautiful setting, these vacation rentals offer the perfect blend of activity and leisure.
Find inspiration for your next group getaway, family vacation, or even a corporate retreat.
The Reserve is our newest addition to the Polo Villas neighborhood in Coachella Valley. The Reserve #15 and The Reserve #18 have their very own pickleball court, pool, and fire pit, which we think makes this already conveniently located home that much better for festival season. If you’d rather have a bocce ball instead of a pickleball court, you might be on the wrong blog, but also The Reserve homes #12 and #16 have those.
★ Best House Features:
Pickleball courts, putting greens, bocce ball courts, and outdoor kitchens across 7 villas with pools and spas
Each villa features 4,000 sq ft with open-concept living, fireplaces, BBQ grills, and grass lawns for events
One mile from Empire Polo Fields, near La Quinta golf courses, desert hiking trails, and Palm Springs attractions
“Perfect house for our annual girl’s retreat! Every bedroom has it’s own ensuite. Space to gather, connect and relax. And of course the pickleball court added to the fun!” – Holly G.
If your group has a designated dinker, we think they’ll be pleased with this property. Buena Vista is a Coachella Valley estate with a tennis court that doubles as a pickleball court, a 60-foot pool, a freshwater lake with a paddle boat, paddle boards, and kayaks, billiards, shuffleboard, a fire pit, an actual saloon, a soccer field, and so much more.
★ Best House Features:
40+ acres of lush desert ground perfect for events and outdoor dining
Private pool, hot tub, and an expansive freshwater lake with paddle boat, paddle boards, and kayaks
Private soccer field, bocce ball, tennis, volleyball, and pickleball courts
Rodeo-style saloon-style wet bar, bonfire-style fire pit
Only 10 minutes from the polo fields and near Coachella Valley attractions
“Everything about this place made it the best weekend ever. The property manager made the initial process of getting into the place as seamless as possible, allowing me to order ahead groceries to be delivered before we got there. The place is as described – absolute massive grounds with plenty of activities to keep us busy the entire time, without ever feeling the need to leave. Would 1000% come back.” -Kevin S.
Game, set, match at Mesquite38. This 3.9-acre estate in Coachella Valley has our favorite pickleball court. Partially because it doubles as a tennis court and because of its cerulean blue color surrounded by contrastingly pink flora (can you say “gorg?”)…but also because of the unparalleled amenities this property provides.
★ Best House Features:
Large yard, private pool with Baja shelf, hot tub, and sunken built-in fireplace
2 bocce ball & pickleball courts and a tennis court, a billiard and poker table
Multiple living areas, al fresco dining, gourmet & outdoor kitchen, gym with Peloton
Minutes from Palm Desert attractions, El Paseo shopping, and desert golf courses
“Our family consisted of 13 adults, a 2 year old and 3 babies . Everyone thought the house and villa was AMAZINGLY PERFECT. The house was huge, beautiful and comfortably furnished. (The separate villa was gorgeous and convenient also). The kitchen 2 dining areas, living room and bar/pool table lounge area was where we mostly hung out. 8 King beds in large bedrooms with ensuite bathrooms helped everyone be very comfortable. The kitchen was equiped with every appliance you could think of, with plenty of dishes, wine glasses, etc. The outdoor area was enormous and was a gated private garden with beautiful seating areas and gorgeous landscaping and beautiful evening lighting. The extra out door lounge area with couches and games and a bar was also popular with my family for hanging out. Andy, our barbecue expert, used the huge outdoor grill area. Everyone used the pool, hot tub, lounge chaises and umbrellas every day. There is a tennis court /pickle ball court and rackets, two golf holes and 2 tee off platforms and golf clubs, ping pong table and rackets, 2 boche ball courts, corn hole games a huge fire pit that seats 16, lemon trees with fresh lemons, grapefruit, and pomelo. This 6 night stay was incredibly fun and comfortable for all of us.” -Karin M.
You’re gonna love this one. Chianti is a Sonoma beauty offering a brand new, top-notch court from FlexCourt, featuring elite tiles designed specifically for pickleball. This cushioned, synthetic surface enhances traction and playability, reduces joint stress, and ensures quick drainage. Chianti’s court also comes with four of the latest Owl Paddles: the industry’s quietest and best-performing paddle. Enjoy superior balance, maneuverability, and reduced arm strain for you and the whole crew.
★ Best House Features:
Wine country estate with vineyard views and outdoor entertaining spaces
Private pool, hot tub, gourmet kitchen, and multiple living areas
Minutes from Sonoma wineries, downtown Sonoma Plaza, and Healdsburg tasting rooms
“This house is great for a staycation. We had a blast swimming, pickle balling, and using what my children dubbed “the magnificent game shed”. The house was clean and well laid out with lots of private spaces. A very easy to share house with friends or extended family. We appreciated the quiet, the privacy, the fast internet, and how nice in general the house was. The property is huge and the other house tucked well out of sight. You feel like you are staying on your own private estate. The horses were super friendly and would come over to their fence to say hi and hope for a snack, though we followed the rules and did not feed them. They seemed to enjoy some pats. Cloverdale itself isn’t chock full of restaurants, but you can hop on the freeway and head to Healdsburg if you want to foodie it up. We just brought our groceries and made use of the screened in dining room and ate there every night. Heartily recommend this house. Would be very happy to return someday.” -Morgan R.
The Riesling Retreat: Where day dinking meets day drinking. This Temecula getaway was aptly named a retreat with its plethora of activities. Spend days playing pickleball, volleyball, basketball, or even putt-putt. Hang inside in the game room with a pool table, ping pong table, and foosball. Head back outside for the pool, fire pit, and alfresco dining.
★ Best House Features:
Resort-style pool, hot tub, and a putt-putt golf
Game room, outdoor kitchen, fire pit, and spacious lawn
Near Temecula wineries, Old Town Temecula, and Wilson Creek Winery
“Absolutely wonderful property inside and out! Great for families or anyone looking to enjoy their own private resort vacation. We carefully selected a property that could have our out of town relatives enjoying Temecula Wine country and multiple rec areas such as pool BBQ, firepit, pickle ball, basketball, volleyball, quality gameroom setup. All throughout the property there were plenty of sitting spaces tastefully put together. The inside of the home had EVERYTHING you could need to enjoy a carefree stay. It was very clean, beds so comfy, well stocked, decorated tastefully, and felt larger than we imagined. The kitchen was stocked with almost everything you would use to prep meals & host. Can’t say enough about this place. Multiple shopping centers were only about 15 mins away. We also used Doordash for a delivery & had no issues with locating the home.Our host was excellent throughout our stay which makes this property worth every penny. Thank you!” -Armando R.
Fun date idea: a game of pickleball at The Date Palm Estate. This Coachella Valley stay embodies luxury and was designed for the active group. With its pickleball court, saltwater pool, bocce ball court, six arcade games, a movie theater, home sound system, a fire pit, outdoor grill, and last but not least, a breakfast bar, you’ll never run out of things to do.
★ Best House Features:
Basketball, pickleball, bocce ball, and a tennis court
Game room with complete billiards, foosball, and 6 arcade machines
Saltwater pool & spa, fire pits, and 1.33-acre landscaped grounds
“We stayed at this property with our whole family to celebrate my dad’s 80th birthday. There were 13 of us. The house worked out perfectly. There was plenty of room. The home was well stocked. Between the pool, the game room, and pickle ball, there was plenty to entertain everyone. The host was responsive and helpful. I’d recommend this place without reservation.” -David T.
This Scottsdale vacation home? Baller. And not just for its pickleball court. Farrier offers an extra decadent vacation with its pool, outdoor dining area, and ping pong table. Inside, you’ll find a stone fireplace, a wet bar, a pool table, marble floors, and the coziest bedrooms to make you want to extend your vacation another week or two.
★ Best House Features:
Putting green, pickleball and basketball court, and resort-style pool & spa
Pool table, ping pong, wetbar, fireplaces, and outdoor entertaining spaces
Close to Old Town Scottsdale, golf courses, hiking trails, and shopping districts
👀 Looking for things to do during your week-to-month-long stay? Read out our updated list of 49 things to do in Scottsdale.
★ Hear from Our Recent Guest:
“Our own private resort for a family holiday. This place had everything we could have asked for. Lots of space and privacy for 5 couples. So much fun playing pickle ball. Would definitely come back!” -Karen C.
Ballin’ on the pickleball court! This Joshua Tree property embodies a southeastern California sunset with a private pool, al fresco dining setup, and fire pit. When you’re all tuckered out, soak in the pool loungers, perfect for those summer reads. At night, gather around the sunken fire pit and cheer to the good life that is Harmony House.
★ Best House Features:
Desert oasis with pool, hot tub, and outdoor shower
Fenced yard with an outdoor fire pit, pickleball court, and hammock
Minutes from Joshua Tree National Park entrance, hiking trails, and stargazing spots
👀 Staying in the high desert of California, you will probably want to cool off from the heat. Check out our Joshua Tree Airbnbs with private pools for options!
★ Hear from Our Recent Guest:
“Believe it or not, this place totally undersells itself on photos and description. We were a party of 10 with dog and there was HEAPS of space. The living/dining/kitchen fit all of us easily with loads of seating with the record player on in the background while we played one of there many board games or cards- picture perfect. Outside was Heaven! We only came in between 4-6 when the sun was at a particular angle in our eyes. Other than that, we lived out there. It gets hot in the day so we took a group walk every morning and night. Pickle ball in the morning.This does not even bring up how thoughtfully stocked the entire house was. Seasonings, oil, tea, coffee, sugar. Incredibly well thought out stock of kitchen goods- meat thermometer, loads of storage for food/containers, etc. Bedrooms were great. One massive master where we put our 2 kids on the foam matresses on the floor (15yo took over the closet:-) and the other three rooms each with queen size bed all the same size and perfectly sized. We literally cannot say enough good things! We are a very well traveled group that came from Tahoe, San Diego, New Zealand to gather. We could not be happier with the space given to us to reconnect!FYI- there are heaps of grocery stores, etc just 5-10 minutes from the house. Cacti were blooming!” -Gemma O’K.
Double trouble – Slice of Heaven has a pickleball and basketball court in one. On top of that, it also features stunning views of Lake Skinner, rolling hills, and mesmerizing sunsets. So TBH, we think you’ll be just fine staying at this Temecula property.
★ Best House Features:
Wine country retreat with a hot tub, swing, and stunning vineyard views
Outdoor entertaining spaces, fire pit, grand brick fireplace
Fully stocked kitchen, a piano, a game room with a pool table, arcade games, 110″ screen with a projector, and a selfie photo station
Close to Temecula wineries, hot air balloon rides, and wine country dining
“WOW! WOW! WOW!This home was amazing. The views are absolutely breath taking. The house was spotless clean. It was well stocked with high end equipment and supplies. Bedding, linens and furniture were all very comfortable. There are multiple options for entertainment; hot tub, pickle ball court, ping pong, foosball, pool table, and even a fog and laser machine and karaoke for your own dance club ! Or just relax and take in the spectacular view.Despite the easy drive to wineries and old Town Temecula, we found ourselves spending more time at the home than planned. We even cancelled two of our meal reservations and chose to cook at home just so we could enjoy more time together in this true “slice of heaven.”We are so happy we found this rental. It helped to make our trip an unforgettable one. If you are looking for a private oasis in wine county, this is the one ! Look no further.” -Dan R.
A full day of pickleball means you need a good space for your evening of Winding Down. And that’s exactly what this Lake Norman home can provide. This lakeside home boasts plenty of new additions: a private pickleball court, a new pool, and a man cave (which we have mixed feelings about, because where’s the lady cave?) Anyway, all are welcome to give the game their best shot at this home.
★ Best House Features:
Private dock, kayaks, and water sports equipment
Pool, hot tub, fire pit, and lakefront deck with views
Game room with a golf simulator, a putting green, and ping pong
Near Lake Norman State Park, Charlotte attractions, and waterfront dining
“The house was great for my family and me. It is located in a peaceful location allowing yourself to relax and unwind. The man cave was great for watching sports. We played a lot of table tennis and pickle ball. The pool and hot tub were great too. I’d definitely recommend this place to other families.” -James B.
Welcome to Olivano Ranch, your private Palm Desert oasis designed for the perfect group getaway. Break a sweat on the private pickleball court with views of the desert mountains. Roast s’mores at the firepit lounge. Show who’s boss around the ping pong table and arcade game machine. Celebrate a bachelorette or say “screw it, I’m on vacation” and opt for wasting the day away on a pool float. Whatever works.
★ Best House Features:
Sports court with basketball and pickleball, game garage with arcade games and ping-pong
Pool, hot tub, fire pit, outdoor kitchen with BBQ, and large lawn
Near Palm Desert shops, the El Paseo art district, and desert hiking trails
“This house is magical! 8 of us stayed here – 3 teens, 5 adults. Everyone had their own room. The house has 5 rooms and 3 bathrooms and the pool house is its own suite with a king bed, kitchen and bathroom. It’s attached to the garage with the ping pong table and games. Our 2 teen boys stayed in the pool house and loved it! Our crew spent a lot of time in the pool and on the pickleball court. It was too hot for us (mid October) for the hot tub but the kids tried it one night. We didn’t need to heat the pool as the temps were still 25-30+ C!!We would definitely stay here again and really appreciated the helpful crew who responded at AvantStay when we had questions, etc.” -Jenny H.
Azalea Retreat is another Lake Norman home serving looks, activities, and lake views. What more could you ask for? Enjoy private access to your very own pickleball court, private pool, shuffleboard, expansive deck, arcade game, and room for (drumroll, please) 34 guests.
★ Best House Features:
Lakefront location with private dock, boat access, and water views
Shared pool, large yard, pickleball court, corn hole, and a fully equipped kitchen
Minutes from Lake Norman beaches, Birkdale Village shopping, and Charlotte Motor Speedway
👀 6 of our Lake Norman homes have been AvantStay awards finalists. Read more about 2025’s Best of the Best.
★ Hear from Our Recent Guest:
“Lake Avant was in my opinion 2nd to none. My family of 30 and I enjoyed the experience of the lodge and cottage. They were both top notch clean and had everything that we needed in the kitchen. The youth enjoyed playing pickle ball and the other games on the grounds and inside. The weather was nice for first coupe days so the younger children enjoyed the outside. The older men enjoyed kayaking and we also appreciated how both homes were decorated so beautifully. This made our Christmas exceptionally special.We are really thinking about visiting when weather gets warmer.” -Jeanette P.
Great minds dink alike. Grand Timber is a 5-bedroom cabin with all you and the crew need for a trip to the Poconos. Engage in some friendly competition on the pickleball and basketball courts, cool off by the pool, or soak in the hot tub after a day of exploring.
★ Best House Features:
Indoor private pool, hot tub, fire pit, spacious yard, and forest views
“Beautifully designed home. Great for a large group. The pickle ball/ basketball area was a big hit as well as the golf simulator. The basement was very impressive with high ceiling and fun games like pool, shuffle board and hockey foosball. Hot tub was a 10/10. I would say this was a great Airbnb one of the best I have ever stayed at.” -Daniel C.
The game is so on at Chateau Syrah in Temecula. This home has both a pickleball and basketball court, a private pool, an outdoor kitchen and grill, a fireplace with cozy seats, tons of outdoor seating around the property, a billiards table, foosball, and a ping pong table. So yeah, we’ll meet you there.
★ Best House Features:
Wine country estate with pool, hot tub, firepit, and vineyard surroundings
Basketball, pickleball court, game room, outdoor kitchen, and multiple patios
Proximity to wineries, near Old Town Temecula, and wine tasting rooms
“The stay at Chateau Syrah was excellent!!! It was the perfect place for a relaxing family getaway. We especially enjoyed spending time together in the pool, jacuzzi, the pool table was a great bonus, and the pickleball court was a hit with everyone. The property is beautifully maintained, with charming sitting areas scattered throughout, which made it easy to unwind with the wine we got from near by wineries and take in the peaceful surroundings. Sunset was magical—our favorite time to sit outside and enjoy the view. Highly recommend for anyone looking for a serene and memorable escape in Temecula!” -Aida M.
15. Rise N Beach, Beach Please!, & Pura Vida – Port Aransas, TX
Welcome to Rise N Beach, Beach Please!, and Pura Vida. A beachfront getaway in 3 stunning Island Retreat condos that are perfect for family vacations or groups! Each beautifully renovated condo is the ideal spot to relax as it offers breathtaking views of the Gulf, amenities like pools, pickleball courts, and easy access to the vibrant Port A scene.
★ Best House Features:
Three beachfront homes with a communal pool, hot tub, and direct beach access
Shared basketball, tennis, and pickleball court, outdoor living spaces, decks with ocean views, and coastal amenities
Steps from Port Aransas beaches, fishing, water sports, and coastal dining
“These condos were perfect for our needs. I did wish the one that was farther away was in the same building as the other 2, but I know it isn’t always possible to make that happen. The condos were exactly like the picture, the community was nice, and it was an easy walk to the beach.” -Rebecca G.
Pickleball is widely loved for being one of the most inclusive and easygoing sports out there, making vacation rentals with pickleball courts a fantastic pick for travelers of all ages and abilities. Here’s why it’s such a great option:
1. Easy to Learn: Pickleball is super simple to pick up! With easy-to-follow rules and a smaller court than tennis, it’s perfect for beginners. But don’t worry, experienced players can still get their competitive fix!
2. Fun for All Ages: This game really brings everyone together. Kids, adults, and seniors all love it! Its slower pace means it’s great for older players, while the exciting gameplay keeps younger folks having a blast. So if you’re planning a family trip or a getaway with all generations, vacation rentals with pickleball courts are just the ticket.
3. Great for Socializing: Pickleball is all about having fun with friends! Most games are played in doubles, which makes for some team spirit and plenty of interaction. It’s a perfect way for groups staying at vacation rentals to bond and enjoy each other’s company.
4. Has Inclusive Options: What’s even better is that many pickleball courts can be adapted for players with disabilities. Rentals offering accessible courts or adaptive equipment are truly thoughtful choices, making it easy for everyone to join in on the fun!
Even More Amenities
If pickleball isn’t enough, hundreds of our vacation rentals come equipped with other sports courts for basketball, tennis, and volleyball, plus classic games like billiards, shuffleboard, ping pong, and more. And we have so much more to offer when it comes to extraordinary amenities.
Check out these other posts where we get into more of what makes AvantStay a cut above the rest:
The exploration doesn’t stop here. Apart from its seamless group travel experience and a plentiful selection of luxury in-app upgrades, AvantStay homes offer the ideal setting for fun, relaxation, and unforgettable memories.
With our stunning vacation rentals with private pickleball courts and luxurious amenities, your next adventure is just a click away. Book your stay today and we’ll see you soon!
Cozy doesn’t mean cramped when you’re talking about mountain lodges built for gatherings. How about cabins with enough bedrooms for the whole extended family, kitchens where holiday feasts actually happen, and living rooms where everyone fits comfortably without sitting on floors?
Cozy winter cabins create a magical Christmas feeling that hotels simply can’t replicate. It’s when crackling fires warm timber walls, hot cocoa steams in oversized mugs, and snow-dusted pines frame every window.
The moment you step inside a log cabin retreat, something shifts where city stress melts away, replaced by that deep exhale only mountain air and wood smoke can trigger. Stone fireplaces anchor great rooms while wall-to-wall windows showcase the best snowy cap views.
10 Cozy Winter Cabins by AvantStay
These 10 hand-picked winter cabins can be your storybook retreat this December, where chunky knit blankets drape over leather sofas, wooden beams crisscross cathedral ceilings, and the only sounds competing with conversation are logs popping in fireplaces.
These aren’t just places to sleep but destinations where memories get made around hearths, game tables, and hot tubs surrounded by winter wonderlands. These experiences will also make you understand why people abandon cities for mountain living.
Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Tucked away on 33 private acres where two gentle creeks converge, Twin Creeks Lodge creates the ultimate Blue Ridge Mountain escape. The secluded location in Asheville means stargazing from the meadow that reveals constellations you forgot existed in city-lit skies.
Located 13 miles from downtown Brevard’s artsy shops and restaurants, this home has easy access to Gorges State Park, Pisgah National Forest, and DuPont State Forest waterfalls.
Best Home Features:
Wood-burning fireplace anchors the spacious living area
A private hot tub on the walk-out lower level
Pool table with a wet bar for tournament nights
Outdoor firepit with ample seating for s’mores
Wrap-around covered patio and screened-in porch
Why You’ll Love Twin Creeks Lodge: No one will feel cramped, making this perfect for multi-generational holidays where everyone needs both togetherness and personal space.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Amazing stay at Twin Creeks Lodge with AvantStay! They were super responsive and very friendly. All amenities were as described and they even had beautiful postcards, coasters and local recommendations for us to enjoy. My family of 12 and 2 dogs had a blast at this cabin and highly recommend it for future events. It truly was a cozy, private, and quiet place for an intimate holiday season with my family. Thank you to their response team for communicating efficiently and answering any and all questions we had! We hope to book at Twin Creeks Lodge again in the future! Merry Christmas & Happy Holidays!”– Dominique G.
Can accommodate up to 4 guests | 2 beds and 2 baths
Cove Cottage is an island retreat that brings Pacific Northwest coastal charm, where water views greet you each morning and the fireplace warms evenings after beach walks. Perfect for couples or small families seeking the kind of recharge that only waterfront cabins can provide.
This house is located near Coupeville’s historic waterfront district, close to Whidbey Island beaches, hiking trails, and artisan shops showcasing local Pacific Northwest crafts.
Best Home Features:
Cozy wood-burning fireplace perfect for evening gatherings
Private hot tub with water and forest views
Comfortable beds and furniture, and a fully equipped kitchen
Deck space for outdoor relaxation and alfresco dining
Placed perfectly in a peaceful waterfront setting
Why You’ll Love Cove Cottage: The location provides that island escape feeling while maintaining easy access to Coupeville’s shops and restaurants when you need civilization.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This cabin is the perfect spot to relax and recharge. Love the fireplace, hottub and water view. cozy, comfy beds and furniture. When ready to get out Coupville is down the road.”– Beth S.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
The alpine lakes of Big Bear creates stunning backdrops where the spacious Lakefront Lodge sits, ready for California mountain adventures. The cabin feeling comes through in every detail, while modern amenities ensure comfortable stays for larger groups.
Located near Big Bear Village for shopping and dining, the lake is just steps away for winter scenery and summer water activities.
Best Home Features:
Hot tub on the deck for snow-capped mountain views
2-level deck for outdoor lounging and dining
Multiple living areas and a pool table for fun gatherings
Gas operated 2 fireplaces and a BBQ grill
Proximity to Bear Mountain and Snow Summit ski resorts
Why You’ll Love Lakefront Lodge: Winter brings skiing just minutes away, while the lake setting means year-round beauty that makes every season feel special.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Great stay, beautiful location, cozy cabin feeling, and very spacious. Would definitely recommend and stay here again!”– Maribel M.
Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Park City’s historic Main Street sits within walking distance. Quittin Time Townhomeis your ski-in townhome place that puts you just steps away from slopes and downtown simultaneously. The convenient location also eliminates driving between skiing, shopping, and dining.
Best Home Features:
Cozy ski lodge atmosphere with modern conveniences
Proximity to world-class ski resorts
Clean and well-appointed interior with all necessary amenities
Fireplace and a complete kitchen with updated appliances
Close to the free trolley system connecting all areas
Why You’ll Love Quittin Time Townhome: Winter enthusiasts can find everything they need without the remote isolation that some mountain properties require guests to endure.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“My experience was absolutely wonderful! The location home couldn’t have been better – just a short walk from downtown shops and restaurants, making it incredibly convenient. The cozy and comfortable ski cabin feel added a delightful touch, creating a warm and inviting atmosphere. What made it even better was the proximity to ski resorts, making it an ideal spot for winter enthusiasts. The accommodation itself was clean, well-appointed, and had everything needed for a relaxing stay. I highly recommend this home to anyone looking for a charming and conveniently located getaway. A big thank you to the host for providing such a wonderful place to stay!”– Mike C.
Can accommodate up to 14 guests | 5 beds and 5 baths
The Great Smoky Mountains provide dramatic backdrops to Hazel. A cozy cabin that creates a home base for exploring America’s most visited national park. The location balances accessibility with mountain peace, where families reach Gatlinburg’s attractions quickly while returning to quiet woodland surroundings.
You are also near Dollywood’s Smoky Mountain Christmas, hiking trails throughout Great Smoky Mountains National Park, Pigeon Forge entertainment district, and local mountain towns.
Best Home Features:
Excellent cozy cabin atmosphere, perfect for winter or romantic getaways
Cozy game room with a pool table and leather seats
With mountain views and a peaceful woodland setting
Gas fireplace in the main floor living room and a wood fire pit in the front driveway
Fully equipped for family stays and comfortable accommodations for groups
Why You’ll Love Hazel: Clean and built for winter vacations, this cabin checks all the boxes families need for memorable mountain escapes.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“An excellent cozy cabin for our winter vacation great location, clean friendly. An excellent choice for any vacation”– Kenzie P.
Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 4 beds and 4 baths
Nestled in the quiet west end neighborhood of Telluride, Bachman Village 14 is a spacious home that puts you near downtown’s shops and restaurants. Fine touches of marble and elegant beds throughout also show attention to detail that makes this retreat feel special.
Best Home Features:
Large fenced backyard with a hot tub for San Juan Mountain views
Gas-operated fireplace located in the living room
Two blocks from the Telluride ski slopes and four blocks from downtown
Just steps from local grocery stores: Clark’s Market & The Village Market
Near the Telluride Historic District and gondola access
Why You’ll Love Bachman Village 14: The private hot tub in the fenced backyard becomes your après-ski sanctuary where mountain views and Colorado stars create perfect evenings.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This is the best stat I’ve ever had in the 20+ years I’ve been coming to Telluride. Tranquil at night, easy to get to everything, and conveniently located a stones throw from Clark’s. This place is the place.”– James G.
Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 5 beds and 4 baths
Tucked away in the trees, Condor is a mountain home in Vail that provides seclusion in an idyllic natural setting. Rustic cabin-style exterior and the open floor plan with two living areas plus a full apartment in the casita ensure groups have plenty of room to spread out comfortably.
Best Home Features:
Family room in the loft with a ping pong table
Sunroom with a hot tub and outdoor deck
Sauna for evening relaxation
Fully equipped and separate guest house
Near Vail Ski Resort, Betty Ford Alpine Gardens, Booth Falls Trailhead, and Vail Village
Why You’ll Love Condor: After days on Vail’s legendary slopes, the hot tub under the sunroom’s glass ceiling creates perfect stargazing moments that make winter nights magical.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We came here for a friend’s ski trip (11 of us) and had an absolutely wonderful time. Great amenities, PLENTY of space, and we used the spa area daily. You will need a 4WD car to get up the hill in the winter, and it’s not that walkable to the bus in the winter (because of the hill), but with cars it was totally fine. Avantstay hosted is very well.” – Rachel B.
Can accommodate up to 6 guests | 3 beds and 1 bath
Peaceful Poconos woodlands surround The Biddle House, where deer visit morning and evening, creating those special nature moments that make mountain stays memorable. The location delivers that “away from it all” feeling without actually being inconveniently remote.
Best Home Features:
Fireplace and outdoor BBQ grill for outdoor dining
Fully equipped kitchen and very comfy beds
Cozy cabin atmosphere perfect for relaxation and family stays
Located in a tranquil environment for true getaways
Near Pocono ski resorts, including Camelback and Big Boulder
Why You’ll Love The Biddle House: The quiet setting provides a true escape from daily stress with a cozy atmosphere that turns good vacations into great ones.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Great location. Quiet, peaceful. The deer visiting morning and evening was special. The beds were very comfortable and the cabin was cozy. Enjoyed our time there.”– Brenda S.
Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 3 beds and 4 baths
Lake Tahoe and its crystal-clear alpine waters create backdrops at this well-appointed cabin, Trapper, which becomes the perfect home base for ski weeks. The incredible lake views mean you get that secluded mountain feeling while staying close to everything Tahoe offers.
Best Home Features:
Large deck for outdoor lounging and gathering
Has a stand-alone hot tub and sauna for après-ski relaxation
Wood-burning fireplace creating ambiance
Near Heavenly, Palisades Tahoe, and Northstar ski resorts
Lake Tahoe beaches and water access
Why You’ll Love Trapper: Tahoe City, Truckee dining, and shopping are easy to access, while the resort-level amenities and cozy interiors will make everyone feel immediately at home
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We absolutely loved our time at AvantStay’s cabin. The interior was cozy and well appointed, and we particularly enjoyed the hot tub, sauna, and fireplace. The cabin was extremely clean and it felt very private while affording incredible views. It was the perfect home base for our ski week in Tahoe!”– Jacob R.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 5 beds and 2 baths
New England’s Berkshire Mountains provide the setting where this spacious 200-year-old home accommodates multiple families comfortably. Whitney is great for group getaways where you need space for kids to play, adults to gather, and everyone to sleep peacefully after exploring.
Located near Berkshires skiing at Jiminy Peak, attractions include Tanglewood and MASS MoCA, historic Stockbridge and Lenox towns, and scenic mountain hiking trails.
Cozy fireplace perfect for family reunions or friend group gatherings
Great place for events and celebrations
Near Massachusetts’s cultural attractions and winter activities
Why You’ll Love Whitney: The big-but-cozy house feeling plus the large yard means everyone will never feel cramped in a vacation rental experience that usually ruins trips.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We came as 2 families and had a great time! The house is big but cozy and comfortable. We had a great time and I would definitely recommend it or come back again!”– Hadas A.
Hotels deliver convenience, but cabins create experiences where families actually spend time together instead of scattering to different rooms. Here’s why AvantStay is your best choice for winter cabin stays:
Full kitchens mean holiday feasts happen with everyone participating instead of expensive restaurant meals, where kids get antsy and service feels rushed.
Living rooms with fireplaces become gathering spots where board games, conversation, and hot cocoa nights create those vacation memories that actually stick.
Privacy means your group’s schedule dictates activities instead of worrying about disturbing neighbors through thin hotel walls.
Space also matters during winter trips, where wet ski gear needs drying areas, multiple bathrooms prevent morning traffic jams, and separate bedrooms let early risers start days without waking everyone.
At AvantStay, we have big cabins and ski-in / ski-out vacation homes that provide mudrooms, garages, and storage that hotels simply can’t and don’t offer, making winter sports logistics manageable instead of chaotic.
Snow falling softly outside timber-framed windows, flames dancing in stone hearths, that first sip of morning coffee with mountain views stretching endlessly. Winter cabin stays create the kind of peace and connection that makes you question why you ever vacation any other way.
These cozy cabins and lodges prove luxury doesn’t require marble lobbies and room service when you can have crackling fires, hot tubs under stars, and space for everyone you love gathered together.
From the Smoky Mountains to Lake Tahoe, each of our cozy winter cabins brings its own version of mountain magic where memories get made and families reconnect.
Trade city stress for mountain calm. Browse AvantStay’s cozy winter cabins and book your snow-dusted retreat before the best properties fill up for the winter season!
The recent termination of the licensing agreement between Marriott International and Sonder, as well as the subsequent initiation of a Chapter 7 liquidation of Sonder’s U.S. business, signals a broader shift in the short term rental industry, defined by a growing emphasis on elite operations, world class reviews, and profitable operators. The shift highlights the importance for short term rental building owners to select partners who can deliver on an integrated holistic hospitality experience to drive real ROI.
AvantStay, as the leading luxury short term rental operator in the country, is providing support for anyone affected by the recent news. For affected building owners, AvantStay is offering support to leverage their institutional platform to find a viable solution to ensure continuous cashflow, uninterrupted operations, and guest relocation support. AvantStay’s institutional platform has enabled owners to quickly onboard thousands of distressed units across the country to quickly reposition their assets into premier hospitality properties.
Over the past 18 months, numerous formerly Sonder-managed properties have transitioned to AvantStay management, reflecting confidence in AvantStay’s institutional approach. These transitions were completed well before today’s news, highlighting how owners have been proactively choosing more stable, high-performing partners. Since the transition, AvantStay has driven a 20-30% increase in year over year revenue, a lift in guest satisfaction ratings often from less than 4.1 to 4.85+, and more than a 42% increase in direct bookings.
AvantStay’s track record continues to demonstrate the strength of its model and operational excellence across more than 65 U.S. markets and 175+ cities, driving over 150,000 guest reviews with an average of 4.8+ stars.
“As one of the largest players for luxury alternative accommodations, our hospitality-first approach to multi-family at scale has been a resounding success,” said Sean Breuner, Founder and CEO of AvantStay. “The recent launch of our four-star hotel, The Gilmore, epitomizes this philosophy, achieving the #1 hotel ranking on TripAdvisor in the first three months of launch.”
“Over the last eight years, we’ve built a tech-enabled platform to seamlessly provide full-service hospitality services to our customers, from click-to-touch concierge to personalized stays and a backend optimized for delivering world-class hospitality stays at scale.” said Reuben Doetsch, Co-Founder of AvantStay. “The market is moving towards quality operators with robust foundational infrastructure and a local presence rooted in the core tenets of hospitality. As others scale back, owners are turning to us to provide operational transparency and institutional-level service, ensuring their properties are set up for long term success.”
As the hospitality landscape evolves, AvantStay remains committed to creating lasting partnerships built on trust, reliability, and long-term value, ensuring that every guest feels at home and every homeowner feels secure in their investment.
About AvantStay
AvantStay is a leading hospitality and property management company offering a diverse portfolio of more than 2,500 premier short term rental properties across 65 markets. As the preferred next-generation hospitality platform redefining the way in which people travel and invest, AvantStay delivers a highly curated experience customized to guests’ needs, using a proprietary tech platform to power bookings, seamlessly operationalize in-field and remote management, and activate authentic and elevated consumer touch points. AvantStay was founded by experienced real estate and technology entrepreneurs Sean Breuner and Reuben Doetsch.
There’s something undeniably magical about the holiday season: twinkling lights, freshly fallen snow, and the comforting scent of cinnamon and pine in the air.
Families bundle up, couples wander hand in hand, and friends gather to sip hot cocoa beneath shimmering Christmas trees.
These moments happen naturally at Christmas markets, where communities come together to celebrate traditions passed down through generations.
Whether you’re chasing the chill of a white Christmas or escaping to a cozy winter hideaway, exploring America’s best Christmas markets is the perfect way to soak up the season’s spirit.
Ready to make this winter unforgettable? Discover the best Christmas markets in the USA for 2025, and find the perfect festive getaway to shop, sip, and stay awhile.
Best Christmas Markets for a Festive Holiday Shopping
From handcrafted gifts to steaming mugs of mulled wine, each market offers a festive experience that blends tradition, community, and celebration.
Shopping at these markets means supporting local artisans instead of buying mass-produced items from big box stores.
Chicago’s Christkindlmarket brings authentic German Christmas traditions to America, where wooden vendor huts fill Daley Plaza with Old World atmosphere.
The market opened in 1996, modeled after the original Nuremberg Christkindlesmarkt, making it one of the oldest and most authentic German markets in the United States.
Over a million visitors come each year to shop for handblown glass ornaments, carved nutcrackers, and specialty foods imported directly from Germany.
The scent of roasted almonds, bratwurst, and glühwein (mulled wine) fills the cold Chicago air where vendors serve traditional German foods from heated wooden chalets.
Live entertainment includes German brass bands, carol singers, and folk dancers performing on the main stage throughout each day.
The pyramid structure in the center rotates slowly, displaying handcrafted figures while visitors sip hot drinks and browse artisan goods they won’t find anywhere else.
Two locations now operate where the original downtown Daley Plaza market runs from mid-November through Christmas Eve, while Wrigleyville’s market near the Cubs stadium offers a neighborhood alternative.
Both markets stay open daily with extended evening hours when lights make the atmosphere even more magical.
Free admission means you control your budget by deciding what to buy instead of paying just to enter.
Pro Tip: Visit during weekday afternoons to avoid weekend crowds that make browsing difficult. The Christkindl (Christmas angel) makes appearances throughout the season for photos with children who believe in Christmas magic.
Christkindlmarkt – Bethlehem, Pennsylvania
Known as “Christmas City USA,” Bethlehem hosts a Christkindlmarkt that rivals its Chicago counterpart, where over 150 vendors sell handcrafted goods in the historic downtown.
The market spreads across several blocks, creating an entire Christmas village where you wander between wooden vendor huts, discovering unique gifts and specialty foods.
Glass-blowing demonstrations show artisans creating ornaments while you watch, making the shopping experience educational and entertaining.
The ice skating rink becomes the heart of the market where families skate under lights while live music plays from nearby stages.
Food vendors serve everything from German specialties like stollen and lebkuchen to American favorites like funnel cakes and hot chocolate.
The town’s Moravian heritage shows in the famous Moravian stars decorating buildings, and the traditional Putz displays showing nativity scenes with handcrafted figurines.
Walking tours explain Bethlehem’s founding by Moravian settlers in 1741 and how their Christmas traditions influenced American holiday celebrations.
The downtown’s colonial architecture creates authentic backdrops where brick buildings and narrow streets make you feel transported to a European Christmas market.
Hotel rooms book months ahead, so planning early or staying in nearby vacation rentals becomes essential for comfortable visits.
Why Go: The entire town participates in Christmas celebrations, where even residents not working at the market decorate their homes and businesses with lights and Moravian stars. This community involvement creates an authentic atmosphere instead of just another tourist attraction.
Union Square Holiday Market – New York City
New York City’s Union Square Holiday Market brings over 180 vendors to Manhattan, where you shop for unique gifts while surrounded by the city’s constant energy.
Local artisans sell handcrafted jewelry, art, clothing, and home goods in white tent pavilions that line the park’s pathways.
The market focuses on locally made products supporting New York artists and craftspeople instead of reselling imported goods available everywhere.
Hot apple cider, roasted chestnuts, and seasonal treats from food vendors keep shoppers warm while browsing through cold December days.
The market’s location in Union Square means subway access makes getting here easy without dealing with Manhattan traffic and parking nightmares.
Street performers and holiday music create a soundtrack to your shopping, where the city’s energy enhances rather than overwhelms the festive atmosphere.
The market runs from late November through Christmas Eve with daily hours that accommodate both morning shoppers and after-work crowds.
Free admission and the outdoor setting mean you pop in for quick visits or spend hours browsing, depending on your schedule and interests.
The eclectic mix of vendors means you find gifts for everyone from kids to grandparents without resorting to generic department store purchases.
Why Go: This represents quintessential big-city Christmas market experiences where urban energy and holiday traditions create something uniquely New York. The people-watching alone entertains as much as the actual shopping when you need breaks from decision-making.
Denver Christkindlmarket – Denver, Colorado
Denver’s Christkindlmarket brings Bavarian Christmas traditions to the Rocky Mountains, where Civic Center Park transforms into a German village each December.
The market opened in 2017, quickly becoming a Denver holiday tradition where locals and tourists gather for authentic German food, artisan crafts, and festive entertainment.
Mountain views create backdrops that German markets simply can’t match despite their historic authenticity.
Glühwein flows freely where multiple bars serve the warm spiced wine in souvenir mugs you keep after purchase.
Food vendors cook bratwurst, schnitzel, käsespätzle, and other German specialties that taste even better in cold mountain air.
Live entertainment includes folk dancing, German music performances, and visits from the Christkind (Christ Child), who opens the market each day with a traditional ceremony.
The market operates weekends from late November through Christmas with Friday evening openings for those who can’t make weekend visits.
The outdoor setting means dressing warmly becomes essential, even though fire pits and heated seating areas provide warm spots for resting.
The relaxed mountain town vibe means the market never feels as crowded or rushed as big city versions, even during peak attendance.
Pro Tip: Arrive hungry and thirsty because the German food and drinks truly shine here, where quality matches what you’d find in actual German Christmas markets. The Bavarian pastries and roasted nuts make perfect walking snacks between vendor browsing.
Christmas Village – Baltimore, Maryland
Baltimore’s Inner Harbor transforms into Christmas Village each December, where European-style vendor huts sell gifts, decorations, and seasonal treats with waterfront views.
The market brings German Christmas traditions to Maryland, where over 50 vendors offer handcrafted goods in a festive atmosphere enhanced by harbor lights reflecting off the water.
And an ice skating rink becomes the market’s centerpiece, where families skate between shopping sessions.
Food vendors serve European specialties like raclette (melted cheese), bratwurst, and schnitzel alongside American favorites that satisfy less adventurous eaters.
Warm drinks from mulled wine to hot chocolate keep visitors comfortable while browsing outdoor stalls in Maryland’s mild but still chilly December weather.
Live entertainment on weekends brings musicians, dancers, and holiday performances that create a festive soundtrack to shopping adventures.
The market’s location near the National Aquarium and other Inner Harbor attractions makes combining activities easy for families wanting variety beyond just shopping.
The waterfront setting provides scenic backgrounds for holiday photos where boats decorated with lights and the harbor skyline create uniquely Baltimore backdrops.
Free admission means budget-conscious families enjoy the atmosphere without spending money if tight finances are shopping.
Why Go: The combination of waterfront views, European market traditions, and Baltimore’s accessible scale creates market experiences that feel special without overwhelming first-time visitors with massive crowds and complicated layouts.
Great Dickens Christmas Fair – Daly City, California
This isn’t your typical Christmas market where vendors sell goods from simple stalls. The Great Dickens Christmas Fair recreates Victorian London across 120,000 square feet, where over 800 costumed performers bring Charles Dickens’s era to life every weekend from Thanksgiving through Christmas.
You don’t just shop—you step into 1800s England, where entire streets, pubs, and shops transport you to a different time period.
Vendors are dressed in Victorian clothing and sell period-appropriate gifts from leather goods to handcrafted jewelry while staying in character throughout interactions.
Multiple stages host performances ranging from music hall acts to dramatic readings where professional actors present shows throughout each day.
Food and drink include British favorites like meat pies, fish and chips, and wassail served in atmospheric pubs where bartenders banter with customers using Victorian slang.
The immersive experience means committing several hours instead of quick visits, where you explore multiple themed areas, each recreating different aspects of Victorian London.
Families return year after year, making this an annual tradition instead of a one-time visit where familiar performers become friends and new attractions keep experiences fresh.
Tickets sell out quickly for popular dates, so advance purchase becomes essential for attending this unique holiday experience.
Why Go: Nothing else in America creates this level of immersive historical Christmas celebration, where the entire venue maintains the Victorian theme without breaking character or allowing modern elements to intrude.
Silverton Christmas Market – Oregon
This small Oregon town transforms each December when the Christmas market brings the Pacific Northwest community together, celebrating local artisans and regional specialties.
The intimate scale means you actually talk with craftspeople who made the items you’re buying instead of shopping from vendors who merely resell products.
Local musicians perform holiday favorites while families browse stalls selling everything from handcrafted wooden toys to specialty food items made in Oregon.
The market emphasizes supporting local businesses where regional products from Oregon wines to handmade soaps showcase what makes the Pacific Northwest special.
Food vendors serve Pacific Northwest specialties alongside holiday treats, where everything from fresh seafood to artisan chocolates tempts visitors.
The small-town atmosphere means friendly interactions instead of rushed transactions, where vendors remember repeat customers and greet them like neighbors.
Illuminated pathways guide visitors through the market, where thousands of lights create a magical atmosphere in this town known for its elaborate Christmas displays.
The nearby Oregon Garden Resort provides accommodation options, while the town’s walkability means exploring shops, restaurants, and attractions happens easily without constant driving.
The market typically runs weekend dates in December, making this a perfect day trip or weekend getaway from Portland, just 45 minutes away.
Why Go: This represents authentic small-town Christmas celebrations where genuine community spirit shows in every interaction instead of commercialized events designed purely for tourist dollars.
Cambria Christmas Market – California
This coastal California village hosts a Christmas market where ocean views and mild weather create holiday experiences without the freezing temperatures that northern markets require you to endure.
Local artisans sell handcrafted gifts while regional wineries pour tastings of Central Coast wines that pair perfectly with the area’s temperate December climate.
The market brings together the best of California living, where holiday festivities happen outdoors comfortably without heavy winter coats.
The nearby village of Cambria decorates extensively, where millions of lights transform the small coastal community into a glowing wonderland.
Shops, restaurants, and galleries stay open late during market weekends, where you explore the entire town, enjoying holiday atmosphere beyond just the market grounds.
Beach walks also happen comfortably. Dramatic coastline and crashing waves provide natural entertainment when you need breaks from shopping and crowds.
Central Coast location means access to wine country, beaches, and Hearst Castle all within short drives, where you can build entire weekend itineraries around the Christmas market visit.
Vacation rentals in Cambria and nearby coastal towns provide accommodations where full kitchens and ocean views create home bases for exploring the region.
The market typically operates select December weekends, so checking exact dates becomes important for trip planning.
Why Go: This creates unique Christmas market experiences where California coastal beauty and holiday festivities create something distinctly different from traditional snow-covered European-style markets that dominate most of America.
Downtown Holiday Market – Washington, D.C.
The nation’s capital hosts a holiday market where over 150 artisans from around the country sell handcrafted goods within sight of famous monuments and museums.
The market spreads across F Street and 8th Street, creating a pedestrian-friendly shopping district where wooden vendor huts display everything from handmade jewelry to specialty foods.
International vendors bring global Christmas traditions together, where you find German ornaments next to Mexican crafts and Scandinavian textiles.
Food vendors serve diverse options reflecting Washington’s multicultural population, where everything from empanadas to Thai noodles shares space with traditional German market fare.
Live entertainment on weekends brings local musicians, school choirs, and cultural performers to stages throughout the market.
The location near the National Mall means combining market visits with museum trips and monument tours for comprehensive Washington experiences.
Free admission and easy metro access make this destination accessible for locals and tourists, where public transportation eliminates parking headaches that plague many holiday shopping trips.
The market operates daily from late November through Christmas Eve with evening hours that let government workers browse after leaving offices.
Photo opportunities abound where the Capitol building and other landmarks create backdrops that make your Christmas market photos uniquely Washington.
Why Go: The combination of handmade artisan goods, international food options, and iconic Washington setting creates market experiences that satisfy both serious shoppers and casual browsers seeking holiday atmosphere in the capital.
Find More Christmas Travel Inspiration
Still planning your perfect winter getaway? Explore more festive travel guides and discover where to spend Christmas in true holiday style.
These resources help you build complete Christmas vacation itineraries where markets become part of larger holiday adventures instead of standalone day trips.
Best Christmas Vacation Spots in USA
Discover comprehensive guides featuring destinations from snowy ski towns to sunny escapes where vacation rentals put you close to Christmas celebrations. Find properties with hot tubs, fireplaces, and full kitchens that make holiday gatherings comfortable and memorable.
Explore the merriest small towns across America, where entire communities participate in holiday traditions. These guides feature towns where Christmas spirit fills streets, shops, and restaurants, creating authentic celebrations you won’t find in big cities.
Browse destinations featuring vacation homes perfect for holiday gatherings where space, privacy, and amenities beat hotel stays every time. Find properties near Christmas markets, ski resorts, and holiday attractions that make celebrating away from home actually special.
Celebrate, Stay, and Make It a Holiday to Remember
After all the shopping, snowflakes, and hot cocoa, nothing completes your holiday adventure like a cozy place to call home.
These markets create memories that outlast any gift you’ll buy, making them worth planning entire trips around instead of just quick afternoon visits.
And staying in a vacation rental home near these markets provides the space and comfort that transforms good trips into unforgettable holiday experiences.
Christmas towns create something big cities can’t replicate: entire communities participating in holiday traditions where every storefront glows with lights, local shop owners greet you by name, and the whole town turns out for tree lighting ceremonies.
These places make Christmas feel like those old movies where everyone knows each other and celebrates together instead of rushing past strangers in crowded malls.
Small and mid-sized towns often beat big cities for Christmas travel because their celebrations feel authentic instead of manufactured for tourists.
Streets are designed for walking instead of traffic, making exploring holiday markets and decorated shops actually pleasant. And local traditions passed down through generations create unique experiences you won’t find anywhere else.
These seventeen towns across America showcase the best Christmas celebrations, where genuine community spirit makes the season special.
Christmas Towns at a Glance
From Bavarian villages in the Pacific Northwest to historic Pennsylvania cities and mountain ski towns, each town offers its own take on holiday magic that brings visitors back year after year.
A Bavarian-themed village in the Cascade Mountains goes all-out for Christmas, where over half a million lights illuminate every building in traditional European style.
The entire town of Leavenworth participates in Lighting Ceremonies held weekends throughout December, complete with carol singing and hot spiced wine served in the village square.
Christmas markets fill the streets with vendors selling handcrafted ornaments, German treats, and local artisan goods you won’t find at chain stores.
The setting creates movie-worthy scenery where snow-capped peaks surround the village and horse-drawn sleigh rides take you through illuminated streets.
Traditional German Christmas music plays from speakers while shops sell authentic European imports alongside local Pacific Northwest products.
Restaurants serve schnitzel, bratwurst, and other German specialties while bakeries offer stollen, lebkuchen, and other holiday treats that taste like you’ve traveled overseas.
Winter activities include snowshoeing, cross-country skiing, and tubing at nearby slopes when you need breaks from shopping and eating.
The Nutcracker Museum showcases thousands of nutcrackers from around the world while local theaters present holiday performances.
Weekends also get crowded, so visiting midweek gives you the full experience without fighting tourist masses for parking and restaurant tables.
Aspen, Colorado
This legendary ski town transforms into an upscale winter wonderland where the 12 Days of Aspen celebration fills two weeks with events, concerts, and activities.
The Victorian downtown glows with thousands of white lights while high-end boutiques and galleries stay open late for holiday shopping that feels festive instead of frantic.
And world-class restaurants serve special holiday menus, while bars and lounges host après-ski gatherings that last well into the evening.
Skiing takes center stage, where four mountains offer terrain for every ability level from beginners to experts seeking challenging runs.
Between ski sessions, ice skating at the Silver Circle rink, snowmobiling through backcountry powder, and horse-drawn sleigh rides through snowy valleys fill days with alpine activities.
The Aspen Saturday Market continues through December, selling local produce, crafts, and holiday gifts from Colorado artisans.
The town’s wealth shows in its Christmas decorations, where even small details get attention that other ski towns can’t match.
Holiday concerts at Wheeler Opera House, theatrical performances, and film screenings keep cultural calendars packed throughout the season.
Hotel prices reflect the town’s luxury reputation, but vacation rentals offer more affordable options for families and groups wanting Aspen’s Christmas experience without resort costs.
Bethlehem, Pennsylvania
Known as “Christmas City USA” since the 1930s, Bethlehem is a historic Pennsylvania town that takes its holiday role seriously, where Moravian stars illuminate homes and businesses throughout December.
The downtown Christkindlmarkt brings German Christmas market traditions to America with wooden vendor huts selling handcrafted ornaments, specialty foods, and warming drinks like glühwein and hot chocolate.
Live performances on outdoor stages feature local choirs, dance groups, and musicians playing traditional and modern holiday music.
The historic district’s colonial architecture creates the perfect backdrop for holiday decorations, where preservation rules ensure authenticity instead of tacky displays.
Walking tours explain the city’s founding by Moravian settlers in 1741 and how their Christmas traditions influenced American holiday celebrations.
The annual Star Spectacular light display features the world-famous Bethlehem Star that’s been illuminating South Mountain since 1937.
Local shops sell unique gifts from regional craftspeople while restaurants serve Pennsylvania Dutch specialties alongside modern cuisine.
The city’s manageable size means you walk between attractions instead of driving, making the Christmas experience feel intimate and accessible.
Hotel rooms in the historic downtown book months ahead, but nearby vacation rentals provide comfortable bases for exploring this authentic Christmas destination.
McAdenville, North Carolina
McAdenville is a tiny mill town that earned the nickname “Christmas Town USA” by covering every visible surface with lights that transform the community into a glowing wonderland.
Starting in 1956, residents began decorating their small town, and the tradition grew until over 500,000 lights now illuminate trees, buildings, and even the lake.
The entire town participates, where every home contributes to the display that attracts visitors from across the Southeast.
The celebration stays free and accessible, where you drive through decorated streets at your own pace, stopping to walk around the lake when you find parking.
The small-town atmosphere means residents wave from porches and chat with visitors about the decorations they’ve maintained for decades. No commercial vendors or admission fees keep the experience authentic instead of touristy.
Nearby Charlotte provides hotel accommodations and dining options since McAdenville itself has limited visitor facilities.
The best viewing happens between Thanksgiving and New Year’s Eve when lights stay on from 5:30-10:00 PM nightly. Though weekends bring traffic that makes the drive slow, weeknight visits let you enjoy the displays without crowds that block views and create parking nightmares.
Pigeon Forge, Tennessee
Dollywood’s Smoky Mountain Christmas transforms this theme park into a holiday wonderland with millions of lights, dozens of decorated trees, and special holiday shows featuring Grammy-winning performers.
Pigeon Forge itself decorates heavily, where the Winterfest celebration brings millions more lights to the parkway, creating a glowing corridor.
Dinner theaters present special Christmas shows while attractions like the Titanic Museum add holiday programming to regular exhibits.
The Smoky Mountains also provide a scenic backdrop where occasional snow dusts the peaks, creating those mountain Christmas vibes without the extreme cold and skiing requirements of western destinations.
Hiking trails through the national park stay accessible most December days when you need outdoor time between tourist attractions.
While the area’s concentration of family entertainment means kids never get bored while adults appreciate the variety beyond just Christmas-themed activities.
Cabin rentals throughout the area provide mountain retreats where hot tubs, fireplaces, and game rooms create cozy bases between adventures.
The town’s tourist infrastructure means restaurants, shops, and attractions understand visitor needs and cater to them professionally.
Traffic congestion during peak times becomes the main challenge, but arriving early or visiting midweek avoids the worst parking and crowd issues that plague weekends.
Fredericksburg, Texas
Fredericksburg is a Texas Hill Country town that brings German Christmas traditions to the Lone Star State, where a giant wooden Christmas pyramid anchors the town square.
Lights strung along Main Street create a festive atmosphere while shops sell everything from German imports to Texas souvenirs.
Local wineries host special tastings and events throughout December, making this a popular destination for adults seeking holiday celebrations without kid-focused activities dominating everything.
The town’s German heritage shows in bakeries selling stollen and springerle alongside Texas pecan pies and kolaches that blend cultures deliciously.
Candlelight tours of historic homes showcase how German settlers celebrated Christmas in the 1800s with decorations and traditions brought from the old country. Nearby Enchanted Rock State Natural Area offers hiking when you need breaks from shopping and eating.
Bed and breakfasts fill the historic district while vacation rentals on surrounding ranch land provide space for larger groups and families.
The mild Texas winter means outdoor activities stay comfortable throughout December without the freezing temperatures that northern destinations require you to endure.
Live music venues host holiday concerts blending country, folk, and traditional German songs in uniquely Texan combinations.
Stowe, Vermont
This classic New England village captures that Norman Rockwell Christmas feeling where white-steepled churches frame snow-covered mountains.
Stowe’s tree lighting ceremony brings the entire community together for caroling, hot cider, and the official start of the holiday season.
Local shops along Main Street sell Vermont products from maple syrup to handcrafted furniture while maintaining that small-town personal service that makes shopping actually enjoyable.
Skiing at Stowe Mountain Resort provides world-class terrain where families and serious skiers both find runs matching their abilities.
Between ski days, ice skating on the community rink, snowshoeing through forests, and horse-drawn sleigh rides through snowy valleys create those winter wonderland moments that justify the cold temperatures.
The town’s walkability means you explore shops, restaurants, and galleries without driving between locations.
Local inns and historic hotels provide cozy accommodations, while vacation rentals offer full kitchens and space for groups needing more than hotel rooms provide.
The town’s relative isolation means you commit to Stowe instead of easily visiting other destinations, but that focused attention creates deeper connections with the community and traditions.
December brings fewer crowds than peak ski season while maintaining full holiday celebrations and all mountain lifts operating.
Telluride, Colorado
Telluride is a former mining town tucked in a box canyon that celebrates Christmas with small-town authenticity despite attracting wealthy visitors and celebrities.
The free gondola connecting town to Mountain Village stays decorated with lights while ski slopes offer terrain that rivals any resort in North America.
Main Street’s Victorian buildings house shops and galleries selling high-end goods alongside local crafts, where window shopping alone entertains for hours.
Torchlight parades down the mountain, fireworks displays, and New Year’s Eve celebrations create spectacles that justify planning trips around specific dates.
The town’s isolation in a remote corner of Colorado means you commit fully to the destination instead of easily visiting other areas, but that focus creates deeper connections with the community.
Fine dining restaurants serve creative cuisine while casual spots offer pizza and burgers that satisfy after long ski days.
Vacation rentals provide better value than hotels, where condos with full kitchens and multiple bedrooms accommodate groups more economically than booking several hotel rooms.
The town’s authentic character shows in local businesses that maintain ownership instead of selling to chains, creating a shopping and dining scene that feels genuine.
And the limited lodging options mean booking well ahead becomes essential for holiday travel when demand peaks.
Kennebunkport, Maine
This coastal New England town transforms for Christmas: Kennebunkport is where historic sea captains’ homes glow with lights, and evergreen wreaths adorn every door.
The Christmas Prelude celebration spans three weekends in early December with tree lighting ceremonies, holiday markets, and activities that draw visitors from across the Northeast.
Local shops sell nautical-themed Christmas ornaments, Maine-made gifts, and specialty foods that make unique presents instead of generic mall purchases.
The rugged Maine coastline provides dramatic backdrops for holiday photos where lighthouses, rocky shores, and historic architecture create postcard scenes.
Restaurants serve fresh seafood year-round, where lobster rolls taste just as good in December as in summer, despite what tourists might think.
The Bush family compound adds presidential history to the town’s appeal, though the estate itself stays private.
Bed and breakfasts in historic homes provide authentic Maine hospitality while vacation rentals offer beach access and full amenities for families.
The coastal location means temperatures stay milder than inland Maine, though ocean breezes make warm layers essential for outdoor activities.
Smaller crowds in December compared to summer make this the perfect time for travelers seeking authentic New England Christmas experiences without tourist season chaos.
Solvang, California
This Danish village in California’s wine country celebrates Julefest throughout December with traditional Scandinavian holiday customs.
Solvang’s windmills and half-timbered buildings create a European atmosphere enhanced by thousands of lights strung through the streets.
Candlelight tours, Danish folk dancing performances, and holiday concerts bring cultural traditions alive in ways that feel educational and entertaining simultaneously.
Local bakeries sell aebleskiver (Danish pancake balls) and other Scandinavian treats, while shops import authentic goods from Denmark, including ornaments, decorations, and specialty foods.
Wine tasting rooms throughout the Santa Ynez Valley host special events and releases, making this destination popular with adults who appreciate Christmas celebrations that don’t revolve entirely around children’s activities.
The mild California climate means outdoor activities stay comfortable throughout December, where hiking, biking, and exploring nearby beaches remain pleasant options.
Vacation rentals in the surrounding wine country provide peaceful bases for exploring Solvang while maintaining access to nature and vineyards.
The town’s compact size means you walk between attractions, making it accessible for all ages without the mobility challenges that larger destinations create.
Park City, Utah
The 2002 Winter Olympics elevated this historic mining town, Park City. It is where Main Street preserves authentic Old West architecture while ski resorts offer world-class terrain.
Holiday decorations throughout downtown create a festive atmosphere without overwhelming the town’s historic character.
The free trolley system makes getting around easy, where parking once and riding between attractions beats driving everywhere in ski resort traffic.
Park City Mountain and Deer Valley provide different skiing experiences, where the former offers variety and volume while the latter focuses on grooming and luxury.
Olympic Park hosts bobsled rides and ski jumping exhibitions when you want alternatives to traditional skiing.
The town’s walkability and concentration of restaurants mean you can easily explore between ski sessions or during bad weather, which makes outdoor activities unpleasant.
Vacation rentals from downtown condos to mountain homes provide options for every budget and group size.
The town’s proximity to Salt Lake City airport makes this one of America’s easiest ski destinations to reach, where 35 minutes puts you from plane to slopes.
Utah’s famous champagne powder delivers skiing that feels lighter and drier than Colorado snow, making this destination beloved by powder enthusiasts.
North Pole, Alaska
The small Alaska town embraces its Christmas theme year-round, where street lamps are candy cane striped and street names include Santa Claus Lane and Kris Kringle Drive.
The famous Santa Claus House, North Pole, has been operating since 1952, where letters to Santa get answered and Christmas shopping happens 365 days a year.
December brings special events, but the perpetual Christmas atmosphere makes this destination unique any time visitors can handle Alaska’s extreme climate.
Winter darkness that lasts most of each December day might seem depressing, but Christmas lights create magical atmospheres that southern destinations can’t replicate.
The aurora borealis frequently appears overhead, where green and purple lights dancing across the sky beat any manmade display.
Dog sledding, snowmobiling, and ice fishing provide authentic Alaska experiences when you need breaks from Christmas-themed activities.
And Fairbanks hotels provide the closest major accommodations since North Pole itself has limited options.
The extreme cold requires serious preparation where temperatures often drop below zero, making this destination suitable only for travelers willing to handle genuine Arctic conditions.
The novelty of celebrating Christmas in a town literally named the North Pole creates memories and stories that typical Christmas destinations simply can’t match.
Helen, Georgia
This Bavarian-themed mountain town in North Georgia celebrates Christmas with German traditions where lights illuminate Alpine-style buildings along the Chattahoochee River.
Christmas markets, parades, and holiday performances in Helen can be held throughout December as they bring European customs to the American South.
And local shops sell German imports, handcrafted goods, and souvenirs while restaurants serve schnitzel, bratwurst, and other European specialties alongside Southern favorites.
Tubing down the river stays popular even in winter when cool weather makes the experience refreshing instead of essential for cooling off.
Nearby hiking trails in Chattahoochee National Forest provide outdoor adventures when you need breaks from shopping and eating.
Wine tasting rooms and breweries offer adult-oriented activities that balance the family-focused Christmas celebrations downtown.
Cabin rentals in the surrounding mountains provide peaceful retreats while maintaining easy access to Helen’s festivities.
The town’s relatively mild Georgia winter means you don’t pack extreme cold-weather gear that Colorado or Vermont destinations require.
And Atlanta’s proximity makes this an easy drive for southeastern residents seeking European Christmas atmospheres without the expense and travel time of actually going to Europe.
Vail, Colorado
Vail is a purpose-built ski resort village that brings European Alpine atmosphere to the Colorado Rockies, where pedestrian-only streets stay decorated with lights and holiday displays throughout December.
Upscale shops, restaurants, and galleries create luxury experiences where Christmas shopping happens in beautiful settings instead of crowded malls.
The village design eliminates car traffic in the core area, making walking and exploring actually pleasant despite cold temperatures.
World-class skiing across seven Back Bowls provides terrain that challenges experts while groomed runs satisfy beginners and intermediates.
The gondola connecting Lionshead and Vail Village operates year-round, making transportation between areas easy and scenic.
Ice skating, snowshoeing, and spa treatments provide alternatives when ski legs need rest or weather makes outdoor activities less appealing.
Hotels and vacation rentals span budget ranges from affordable condos to luxury homes, though even “affordable” here means expensive by most destinations’ standards.
Christmas week represents peak season pricing where rates reach annual highs and minimum stay requirements extend to seven or more nights.
The investment buys access to one of America’s premier ski destinations, where holiday celebrations match the mountain’s world-class reputation.
Santa Fe, New Mexico
Santa Fe is a historic city that blends Native American, Spanish, and Anglo Christmas traditions, where farolitos (paper bag luminarias) line adobe walls and rooftops throughout December.
Canyon Road’s Christmas Eve walk features galleries staying open late, luminarias lining the street, and bonfires where locals gather for music and celebration.
The unique architectural style creates backdrops that look unlike anywhere else in America, where earth-toned buildings contrast beautifully with white lights and decorations.
The town’s artistic community shows in the quality of holiday decorations, handcrafted gifts in galleries, and Christmas performances at theaters and music venues.
Native American crafts, Spanish colonial antiques, and contemporary Southwestern art provide gift options that beat standard mall merchandise by miles.
And restaurants here serve New Mexican cuisine with red and green chile sauces that warm you up on cold desert nights.
The high desert climate means sunny days and cold nights, where temperatures fluctuate dramatically from afternoon to evening.
Snow happens occasionally, creating stunning contrasts against red rocks and adobe buildings that photographers dream about.
Vacation homes in this place provide more character and space than chain hotels, where adobe homes with kiva fireplaces create authentic Southwestern experiences that enhance Santa Fe’s unique Christmas celebrations.
Nantucket, Massachusetts
Nantucket is an island off Cape Cod that transforms during Christmas. It is where historic whaling captains’ homes are decorated with wreaths and lights, creating a postcard New England scene.
The annual Stroll weekend in early December brings thousands of visitors for tree lighting, carolers dressed in Victorian costumes, and holiday shopping in boutiques selling everything from nautical gifts to high-end fashion.
Ferry rides to the island create a sense of arrival that mainland destinations can’t replicate, where leaving your car behind makes the entire experience feel like stepping back in time.
The island’s small size means you walk or bike between attractions, where cobblestone streets and historic architecture create settings that feel more European than American.
Local restaurants serve fresh seafood, where even in December, you can get outstanding fish and oysters. The Christmas celebration maintains that island sophistication where events feel refined without being stuffy or exclusive.
Hotels and inns provide limited winter accommodations since many properties close after Thanksgiving, making vacation rentals the best option for groups and families.
The shoulder season means lower prices than summer’s premium rates while maintaining full access to shops and restaurants that understand their audience expects quality.
And ferry schedules reduce in winter, so planning transportation becomes essential for trips requiring mainland connections.
Branson, Missouri
This Ozark Mountain town, Branson, is known for live entertainment, goes all-out for Christmas, where theaters present special holiday shows and light displays transform entire properties.
Silver Dollar City’s Old Time Christmas ranks among America’s best theme park holiday celebrations with millions of lights, dozens of decorated trees, and performances on multiple stages throughout the park.
Drive-through light displays, dinner shows, and special concerts pack entertainment calendars throughout December.
The concentration of theaters means you see multiple shows during short stays, where everything from country music to magic acts and comedy all add holiday programming.
Shopping outlets, restaurants, and attractions stay open year-round, unlike seasonal tourist destinations that shut down after summer.
Table Rock Lake’s scenic beauty provides backdrops that photograph beautifully despite the town’s commercial development.
Vacation rentals around the lake offer peaceful settings with water views while staying close to entertainment districts.
The Ozark Mountains’ mild winter means you don’t face extreme cold or heavy snow, which makes northern destinations challenging for some travelers.
Traffic congestion on the main strip becomes the primary frustration, but staying patient and allowing extra travel time between attractions solves most timing problems.
Expand Your Christmas Experience
These towns showcase specific aspects of American Christmas celebrations, but exploring multiple perspectives enriches your understanding of how different communities celebrate the season.
Main Street storefronts glowing with lights, entire communities gathering for tree lighting ceremonies, that moment when fresh snow starts falling during a holiday parade.
Visiting these Christmas towns offers authentic celebrations where genuine community spirit makes the season special in ways big cities simply can’t replicate.
These experiences happen in small towns where Christmas traditions matter more than retail sales and where residents actually participate instead of just tolerating tourist crowds.
From Bavarian villages in mountain valleys to historic Eastern seaboard towns and Western ski resorts, each Christmas town in USA brings its unique traditions and creates the Christmas magic you’ve been searching for.
If you are planning a Christmas adventure, browse AvantStay’s vacation rentals in and around these festive destinations and book now before the best properties fill up for the holiday season.
Forget boring get-togethers, we’re taking you to a full-blown memory-making extravaganza! Family reunions that’ll go down in history, 50th birthday bashes that’ll make you feel like you’re 21 again, and bachelorette parties that’ll have everyone saying ‘YAS!’
And guess what? We’ve got the secret sauce: Our huge 8-bedroom vacation rentals that can fit your whole crew under one roof.
Private pools for splashing, hot tubs for chilling, yards that scream ‘let’s play!’, and enough space for everyone to unleash their inner party animal. Let’s find your dream getaway, shall we?
10 of Our Best 8-Bedroom Vacation Rentals
Think less ‘cramped quarters’ and more ‘epic adventure base.’ We have compiled our top 10 picks—these places aren’t just big, they’re bursting with fun!
Come to Smoky Mountains for a stay with a gorgeous wooden pavilion, hot tub, and sprawling multi-level decks — (yes, 3-floored deck) for all your gathering needs. Inside Hickory Ridge, revel in the high-ceiling space, a sleek kitchen, and eight bedrooms, each with its very own bathroom! End the day of fun by gathering in the spacious living areas by the wood-burning fireplace for cozy evenings with your family and loved ones.
River Rock is your cozy group-friendly ski retreat nestled among the pine trees. Just a quick bus ride from Peak 8 and a short walk to Breckenridge’s Main Street, coming back to this welcoming haven is truly an ease (and delight). After a day of adventure, unwind in the hot tub or sip a drink on the gazebo. You can also enjoy the home’s stone-walled fireplace, spacious kitchen, game room/home theater, and multiple living areas for groups to spread out.
Amenities:
Charming stone-walled fireplace
Expansive kitchen
Game room/home theater
Hot tub
Gazebo
Near to local attractions (restaurants, shopping, etc.)
Check out our other 8-Bedroom Breckenridge Home: Cherry Ridge.
3. Starlight Estate – Coachella Valley, CA
Attention bachelorette groups—we’re looking at you. Starlight Estate in Coachella Valley has an exclusive indoor tennis court with air conditioning, guaranteeing endless fun regardless of the weather. When it’s time to cool off, a luxurious pool area with waterfalls and a jetted hot tub awaits. Dine with your “I Do Crew” with a view in the covered lounge area, sip cocktails at the bar and grilling area, or relax on the additional terrace. Let your crew’s desert adventure begin!
Hey beach lovers and fun seekers! Just two blocks from the famous white sands of Destin, Seacrest is made for groups of up to 20 guests. This split duplex setup gives everyone space to spread out while staying close, perfect for multi-family vacations or friend reunions. The private backyard becomes your personal Florida fun zone with an oversized pool, bubbling hot tub, and ping pong action all day long!
Welcome to Twin Creeks Ranch, a 25-acre Rocky Mountain paradise just 20 minutes from downtown Aspen. This 8,200-square-foot retreat sits along Snowmass Creek and Capitol Creek, creating a private haven where elk and deer can roam freely across the property at dawn. Adventure awaits around every corner with a private lake, picturesque hiking trails, and pickleball and basketball courts for friendly competition.
Get ready to settle into Deer Hollow, your cozy Poconos retreat in the beautiful Towamensing Trails community! This woodsy escape features a sunroom packed with air hockey, arcade games, and board games for endless entertainment. Step into the large backyard where deer regularly visit (hence the name!), perfect for nature lovers and families seeking that rustic mountain vibe.
Amenities:
Game room with air hockey, arcade, and board games
Large backyard with outdoor dining and a horseshoe pit
7. Sunset Shores Resort – The Grand House – Lake Norman, NC
From the moment you step through the beautiful glass double doors, you’ll be greeted by floor-to-ceiling windows that frame breathtaking Lake Norman views. Sunset Shores Resort – The Grand House is a stunning lakeside retreat with room for 22 guests. With 3 floors of living and entertaining space. Imagine detailed millwork, 5″ maple flooring, and natural light pouring in from every angle, plus expansive outdoor areas, you’ll have room to get used to the lake life.
Check out our other 8-Bedroom Lake Norman Home: Lake Living
8. Tipsea Turtle – Panama City Beach, FL
Experience an incredible beach getaway just one block from the sugar sand beaches at Tipsea Turtle! This newly constructed Panama City Beach beauty features a private heated saltwater pool and sleeps 22 guests comfortably. The open-concept design brings everyone together, while the first-floor game room is packed with arcade games that keep the fun rolling. 3 floors of entertainment mean the party never stops!
Amenities:
Private heated saltwater pool
Game room with Pac-Man, Star Wars pinball, basketball shooting games, and ski ball
Hey Disney lovers! Shadow Mountain is a 3,900 square feet themed magic home. It is just 10 miles from Disney World with exclusive access to ChampionsGate Resort amenities. There is a game room that features arcade games packed with dozens of options, bar seating, and a large flatscreen for sports. Kids will definitely lose their minds over the themed bedrooms. Plus, there’s a custom playroom perfect for hide-and-seek adventures!
Amenities:
Three stand-up arcade games with dozens of games
Custom playroom with slide and children’s loft
Game room with bar seating
Themed kids’ bedrooms (Lego, Marvel, Jungle)
Shaded private pool and spa
ChampionsGate Resort access (lazy river, waterslide, tiki bar)
Resort fitness center, movie theater, and arcade access
Looking for more homes with themed rooms for your kiddos? Check out our Orlando Airbnbs!
10. Waterview – Big Bear, CA
Perched among towering pines with serene lake views, Waterview brings mountain lodge vibes to your Big Bear getaway for up to 18 guests! The grand living room features vaulted ceilings, a stunning brick fireplace, and a custom chandelier, creating that cozy cabin atmosphere. Head downstairs to the game room where basketball toss, foosball, pool table, and a secondary kitchen keep everyone entertained for hours.
Amenities:
Game room with basketball toss, foosball, and pool table
Secondary kitchen in the game room
Brick fireplace with vaulted ceilings
Massive deck with lounge seating and grill
Lake views through the pines
8 bedrooms and 4 bathrooms
In-home laundry
Close to Big Bear ski resorts, lake activities, and hiking trails
Experience the Best of Group Travel and Stay with AvantStay
If you’re searching for the perfect place to stay with a large group, our 8-bedroom vacation rentals have just what you need. Spend the day indulging, then return to a peaceful home-away-from-home with all the amenities (and more) that you’re already used to.
Comfortable bedrooms, spacious backyards with pools, and spectacular views are just some of the things you’ll enjoy during your stay. Book your stay now as we are excited to see you soon!
Christmas magic happens when you trade ordinary celebrations for extraordinary destinations. It is where holiday lights sparkle against mountain peaks or historic streets decorated for the season.
From snow-covered mountain towns where skiing and hot cocoa become daily traditions to mild coastal cities where you stroll historic districts without freezing: America’s best Christmas destinations offer something for every family’s vision of the perfect holiday.
These handpicked destinations showcase the most festive cities and towns in the USA. It’s where Christmas spirit fills the air from Thanksgiving through New Year’s..
Best Christmas Getaway Destinations
Whether you’re seeking guaranteed snow for white Christmas dreams or warm weather escapes from winter cold, these locations feature vacation rentals ready to host your holiday celebration.
The Blue Ridge Mountains create the perfect backdrop for Christmas celebrations, where historic downtown streets glow with thousands of holiday lights.
The Biltmore Estate transforms into a winter wonderland with dozens of Christmas trees, elaborate decorations throughout its 250 rooms, and Candlelight Christmas Evenings featuring live music and dimmed romantic lighting.
Downtown Asheville’s independent shops sell handcrafted gifts from regional artists while local breweries serve seasonal beers perfect for après-hiking celebrations.
Grove Arcade’s holiday market brings local artisans together, selling unique gifts you won’t find at any mall. The Blue Ridge Parkway stays open for scenic winter drives when snow dusts the mountains, creating postcard views at every overlook.
Christmas concerts at the Diana Wortham Theatre and holiday productions at local venues keep the entertainment calendar full throughout December.
Asheville cabin rentals put you close to both downtown festivities and mountain peace. Properties range from romantic two-person retreats with hot tubs overlooking misty valleys to large family cabins sleeping 10+ guests with game rooms and spacious decks.
Many rentals feature fireplaces, fully equipped kitchens for holiday cooking, and proximity to hiking trails when families need outdoor time between celebrations.
This historic mining town transforms into a real-life snow globe every December, where over 250,000 LED lights illuminate Main Street starting the first weekend of the month.
The Race of the Santas kicks off the season with hundreds of people dressed as Santa running down Main Street in one of Colorado’s most beloved holiday traditions.
Ullr Fest in mid-December honors the Norse god of snow with parades, the world’s longest shot-ski attempt, and a massive bonfire burning last year’s Christmas trees.
World-class skiing across five peaks satisfies everyone from first-timers to experts, while the Victorian downtown maintains that authentic small-town feel where shop owners greet you by name after just one visit.
Horse-drawn sleigh rides through snow-covered valleys, dog sledding adventures, and ice skating under twinkling lights create those Christmas moments families remember forever. New Year’s Eve also brings a torchlight parade down the mountain that caps off the holiday season spectacularly.
Breckenridge vacation rentals range from ski-in/ski-out condos steps from lifts to spacious mountain homes with hot tubs and views of the Ten Mile Range.
Properties sleep anywhere from 4 to 20+ guests, making them perfect for family reunions or friend group celebrations.
Many rentals also include heated garage parking, boot dryers, and fully stocked kitchens that make extended stays comfortable.
Music City’s Christmas celebrations blend Southern hospitality with world-class entertainment, where honky-tonks deck their bars with lights and tinsel.
The Gaylord Opryland Resort’s ICE! exhibit features over 2 million pounds of hand-carved ice sculptures in a winter wonderland kept at 9 degrees.
Downtown’s Honky Tonk Christmas brings live music to every corner while the Grand Ole Opry hosts special holiday shows featuring country music legends and rising stars.
The Nashville Christmas Parade down Broadway showcases marching bands, elaborate floats, and performances that draw thousands to the streets.
Christmas markets pop up around the city selling local crafts, hot chocolate, and Southern treats like bourbon balls and pralines.
The Bluebird Cafe hosts intimate acoustic Christmas shows while larger venues feature full-production holiday concerts that showcase Nashville’s musical talent.
Nashville vacation rentals put you within walking distance of downtown’s festivities while providing quiet retreats after long days of exploring.
Properties range from modern condos in The Gulch to spacious homes in East Nashville’s artsy neighborhoods.
And many rentals feature rooftop decks with city views, full kitchens, and multiple bedrooms, perfect for groups wanting space to spread out.
North America’s largest alpine lake creates scenery that takes your breath away, even when you’ve seen photos a hundred times.
Multiple villages around the lake host tree lighting ceremonies, holiday markets, and Christmas concerts throughout December.
Heavenly’s gondola lifts you to observation decks where views stretch across the entire basin, creating those “wow” moments that justify the ticket price even without skiing.
South Shore brings casino entertainment and Heavenly Village’s ice skating rink, while North Shore maintains quieter vibes in towns like Tahoe City and Truckee.
Snowshoeing through forest trails, sledding down resort hills, and warming up in lakefront restaurants with hot toddies fill days between skiing sessions.
The region’s Mediterranean-like climate means more sunshine than typical ski destinations, making even cold days feel pleasant for outdoor activities.
Lake Tahoe cabin rentals accommodate groups from intimate couples to extended families needing 8+ bedrooms.
Lakefront properties offer private beach access and boat docks (for summer visits) while mountain homes provide ski access and hot tubs with forest views.
Many rentals feature gourmet kitchens, multiple living areas, and outdoor fire pits perfect for s’mores under starry skies.
The Great Smoky Mountains National Park provides a stunning backdrop for Christmas celebrations, where Gatlinburg and Pigeon Forge go all-out with millions of lights illuminating every surface.
Dollywood’s Smoky Mountain Christmas brings the theme park alive with incredible light displays, holiday shows, and seasonal treats that create magical evenings for all ages.
The Gatlinburg Winter Magic Trolley Ride of Lights takes you through town viewing elaborate decorations from heated trolleys.
Pigeon Forge’s Winterfest extends the celebration through February with light displays that transform the parkway into a glowing wonderland.
Christmas parades, holiday concerts, and special performances at dinner theaters keep entertainment options plentiful throughout the season.
The mild winter weather means hiking trails stay accessible most days, allowing you to explore waterfalls and mountain vistas without summer’s crowds.
Smoky Mountains cabin rentals range from romantic two-person hideaways to massive lodges sleeping 20+ guests with game rooms, movie theaters, and multiple hot tubs.
Properties in Wears Valley offer peaceful seclusion, while Gatlinburg locations put you within walking distance of downtown festivities.
Many cabins feature floor-to-ceiling windows showcasing mountain views, stone fireplaces, and fully equipped kitchens.
Charleston’s historic district transforms for Christmas, where gas lamps and magnolia wreaths create that classic Southern holiday atmosphere.
The Festival of Lights at James Island County Park features over 2 million lights creating 650+ displays you drive through while Christmas music plays on your car radio.
Marion Square hosts the Holiday Market of Charleston, where local artisans sell handcrafted gifts, specialty foods, and holiday decorations unique to the Lowcountry.
Historic home tours showcase how Charleston’s elite celebrated Christmas in centuries past with elaborate decorations, carolers in period costumes, and hot cider served in centuries-old mansions.
The mild winter weather means you stroll the historic district comfortably, shopping King Street boutiques and dining at award-winning restaurants without freezing.
Christmas boat parades light up Charleston Harbor while horse-drawn carriage tours through decorated streets create romantic evening activities.
Coastal Charleston vacation rentals include historic downtown properties within walking distance of festivities and beach houses on nearby islands for those wanting coastal views.
Properties range from Rainbow Row cottages to large estates sleeping extended families. Many rentals feature Southern porches perfect for morning coffee, updated kitchens, and access to Charleston’s famous beaches just minutes away.
This eclectic city celebrates Christmas with its unique, weird-and-wonderful style where traditional meets unconventional.
The Trail of Lights in Zilker Park features over 2 million lights, local food vendors, and live music performances, creating a free holiday experience beloved by locals and visitors.
Blue Genie Art Bazaar showcases work from over 175 artists selling handmade gifts in an old airplane hangar transformed into a festive marketplace.
Sixth Street bars deck themselves out with lights and decorations while maintaining that live music scene Austin’s famous for year-round.
The Armadillo Christmas Bazaar brings hundreds of artists together, selling everything from jewelry to sculptures, making gift shopping feel like an art gallery visit.
Food trucks serve everything from traditional tamales to fusion creations, while craft breweries offer seasonal beers perfect for Texas’s mild December weather.
Austin vacation rentals put you close to downtown festivities while providing modern amenities and the space families need.
Properties range from trendy East Austin bungalows to spacious South Congress homes with pools and outdoor entertaining areas.
Many rentals feature open floor plans, chef-worthy kitchens, and proximity to hiking trails when you need nature time between holiday activities.
The 2002 Winter Olympics put this mountain town, Park City, on the global map, where two major ski resorts and historic Main Street create the perfect Christmas combination.
The town’s Victorian-era buildings, decorated with lights, maintain an authentic Old West character while Olympic Park offers bobsled rides and tours of facilities where athletes trained.
Big Bear, CA
Big Bear is Southern California’s closest reliable snow destination that sits just two hours from Los Angeles. This is where two ski resorts and a charming village create mountain Christmas magic.
The Christmas Boat Parade lights up the lake with decorated vessels while village shops and restaurants cater to weekend warriors escaping coastal cities.
Hudson Valley, NY
Rolling mountains and historic towns create New England charm where white-steepled churches frame snow-covered hills here at Hudson Valley.
Christmas markets, holiday train rides through Victorian-decorated Jim Thorpe, and farm-to-table restaurants serving seasonal menus showcase the region’s character throughout December.
Palm Springs, CA
The desert sunshine of Palm Springs provides warm-weather Christmas escapes where mid-century modern architecture and mountain views create that California cool vibe.
While it won’t snow, the sunny 70-degree days mean hiking, golfing, and poolside lounging replace traditional winter activities.
Scottsdale, AZ
Scottsdale is a desert destination offers golf, hiking, and outdoor adventures without freezing temperatures, where luxury resorts and spas create upscale holiday experiences.
The mild weather means you can explore Sonoran Desert trails, visit art galleries, and dine on patios throughout December.
Sedona, AZ
Red rock formations dusted with occasional snow create stunning contrasts here at Sedona. It is where spiritual energy and natural beauty attract visitors seeking peaceful holiday retreats.
The artsy town hosts holiday markets, while hiking trails through Oak Creek Canyon provide outdoor adventures without the bitter cold.
Explore More Christmas Experiences
Planning the perfect Christmas vacation requires understanding each destination’s unique offerings and finding accommodations that match your family’s needs.
Best Christmas Vacation Spots in USA
Discover detailed guides to America’s top Christmas vacation spots featuring insider tips on holiday events, local traditions, and the best vacation rentals for experiencing each location’s festive magic. From mountain ski towns to coastal cities, find the places and properties that put you in the heart of Christmas celebrations.
Best Christmas Towns in USA
Small towns often deliver the most authentic Christmas experiences where entire communities participate in tree lightings, parades, and holiday markets.
Explore our guides to America’s most festive towns featuring places and vacation homes that let you live like a local during the season’s most wonderful time.
Best Christmas Markets in USA
Holiday markets bring communities together, selling handcrafted gifts, seasonal treats, and local specialties you won’t find at any mall.
Our guides highlight America’s best Christmas markets with nearby vacation rentals that make shopping, eating, and celebrating stress-free and memorable.
Stay with AvantStay for the Best Christmas Memory
Vacation rentals transform holiday travel from stressful hotel stays into cozy gatherings where families cook traditional meals, exchange gifts by crackling fireplaces, and create memories that outlast any store-bought present.
By staying at a vacation home, it provides the space, privacy, and authentic local experience that hotels simply can’t match during the season when togetherness matters most.
Twinkling lights reflecting off fresh snow, families gathered around fireplaces exchanging gifts, and the smell of cookies baking in vacation rental kitchens.
These moments don’t happen scrolling through phones at home during another ordinary December, stuck in the same routine you follow every year.
From snow-covered mountain towns to mild coastal cities, these destinations are where your family creates holiday traditions worth repeating for years to come.
Ready to book your Christmas escape? Browse AvantStay’s holiday-ready vacation rentals across America’s most festive destinations and start planning the Christmas your family will remember forever.
These properties book quickly during the holiday season, so reserve your spot now before the best homes disappear. Book now!
Electric vehicle ownership transforms how you plan vacations. Gone are the days when your destination choices are a result of your forced detours due to crowded public charging stations or rental houses that don’t even have it.
Modern travelers nowadays want accommodations that match their sustainable lifestyle, where plugging in your Tesla or EV feels as natural as connecting to WiFi. Our vacation houses with EV charging stations solve the biggest headache electric vehicle owners face during trips.
Instead of mapping charging stops, timing your arrivals around station availability, or paying premium rates at highway fast chargers, you simply park, plug in, and wake up to a fully charged battery.
Your car powers up overnight while you’re sleeping, swimming, or enjoying dinner, making the next day’s adventures possible without planning entire itineraries around charging infrastructure.
From desert estates to mountain retreats, these properties prove you don’t sacrifice luxury when choosing green travel options.
EV-Ready Vacation Homes
These thoughtfully equipped homes deliver more than just charging convenience. They represent a new generation of vacation rentals where smart features, sustainable amenities, and modern technology create seamless experiences for eco-conscious travelers.
Can accommodate up to 20 guests | 11 beds and 10 baths
The Pond Estate is a 12-acre luxury compound that redefines desert entertaining. Three separate homes, indoor and outdoor pools, and a 3,000-square-foot game house create an entertainment complex most resorts envy.
The property’s recent Architectural Digest-featured renovation makes groups spread across multiple living spaces without ever feeling cramped. This home is indeed perfect for multi-family vacations or friend reunions where everyone needs their own space.
Why You’ll Love The Pond Estate: The EV charging station means your electric vehicle stays powered throughout your desert adventures without hunting for public chargers in Palm Springs.
The home features hot tubs, a private tennis and pickleball court, a private pond with landscaped grounds, a cinema room, a home gym with sauna and steam room, and a yoga/meeting space perfect for wellness retreats or corporate gatherings.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Beautiful property, would definitely recommend to others and will be back again! Hosts were wonderful and ready to accommodate.”– Khloe W.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Mountain views from every level make this Lake Arrowhead retreat feel worlds away from Southern California’s urban sprawl. The open floor plan in Sky Canyon Lodge creates gathering spaces where families actually want to spend time together instead of hiding in separate rooms.
Top balcony positioning gives perfect vantage points for Lake Arrowhead’s famous fireworks displays, creating spontaneous celebration moments that become everyone’s vacation highlights that nobody planned.
Why You’ll Love Sky Canyon Lodge: Charge your EV in the garage while exploring Lake Arrowhead’s alpine beauty without worrying about finding charging stations in mountain towns.
The home features a game room with entertainment options, a hot tub for mountain sunset soaking, a fire pit perfect for s’mores and stargazing, decks with lake and mountain views, and proximity to hiking trails, lakes, and skiing within short drives.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“The home was beautiful, clean with lots of open space. The kitchen was easy to work in, everything we needed was there. Family enjoyed the game room, and especially the hot tub. Bonus feature- we enjoyed the lake arrowhead fireworks from the top balcony, while roasting marshmallows for our s’mores on the fire pit. Perfect location to make family memories in an amazingly beautiful area. Lakes, hiking, just a short drive away. Lovely bedrooms, plenty of bathrooms, lovely wood floors, and decor!! Thank you 🙏”– Mary F.
Can accommodate up to 16 guests | 5 beds and 3 baths
Large families or groups find Tranquil Waterside a space for quality time without feeling cramped. Bedroom views showcase natural beauty that makes waking up feel like a vacation instead of just another morning.
You are literally located on the lake, so expect lake views everywhere you go! Plus, the convenient layout means everyone accesses common areas easily while maintaining privacy in sleeping quarters.
Why You’ll Love Tranquil Waterside: Charge your EV on-site while enjoying Pocono’s lake activities without stressing about finding charging stations in rural mountain areas.
The home features a private boat dock for kayaking and water adventures, a game room with a pool table, ping pong, and foosball, a fire pit for evening gatherings under stars, and Poconos community amenities access.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This is a fantastic home for large family members or groups. The space is very convenient to good quality time. The views from the bedrooms are stunning. Very nice location and very helpful Host it was great time.”– Kipa S.
Can accommodate up to 16 guests | 7 beds and 5 baths
This Coachella Valley property accommodates large groups where everyone finds space. The layout at Villa del Gallo creates private areas where families retreat when needed, while maintaining gorgeous common spaces for gathering.
Beautiful decor also adds the colorful personality of this home, without feeling overwhelming; it makes every photo you take in this home look Instagram-worthy without trying.
Why You’ll Love Villa del Gallo: Charge your electric vehicle overnight while enjoying desert adventures across the Coachella Valley without hunting for public charging stations.
The home features a private swimming pool with tons of lounge seating, a spa that heats quickly for desert evening soaks, a game room packed with board and table games, comfortable beds across multiple bedrooms, and a well-stocked kitchen with quality appliances.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This house was perfect for our group of 15 women! The house was beautiful and the decor was colorful and fun! Beds were comfortable, kitchen was well stocked, pool area had tons of nice lounge seating, spa heated quickly, game room was so much fun, EV charger was a nice amenity – what more could we need?! Location was great too – not far from La Quinta, Palm Desert or Indio. I would definitely recommend this house for a large group of friends, or it would be a great spot for families too. Given the home layout, you could comfortably fit 4 families (or more) and all feel like you had your own private areas to retreat to.”– Lindsay P.
Can accommodate up to 18 guests | 7 beds and 4 baths
Stay at Otter Banks. A Poconos property that accommodates large families or friend groups, where everyone gets comfortable and prevents morning traffic jams. The location has peaceful surroundings with convenient access to restaurants, shops, and stunning nature spots.
Kids can find plenty of space for running around, while adults can start appreciating the layout that keeps noise contained to certain areas. Everyone is guaranteed to have a comfortable sleeping arrangement and enough bathrooms in this home.
Why You’ll Love Otter Banks: Park your electric vehicle and plug into the charging station while enjoying Pocono adventures without range stress.
The home features a hot tub perfect after hiking or skiing, a deck with outdoor seating, a cozy fireplace, a foosball and pool table for rainy day entertainment, arcade games, a Nintendo Switch for kids, and eight community amenity wristbands for pool and lake access.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had a really wonderful stay at this Airbnb! The house was clean, comfortable, and perfect for our family. The kids loved having space to play and the cozy setup made us feel right at home. We especially enjoyed relaxing in the hot tub in the evenings after exploring nearby attractions. The location was peaceful yet close to restaurants, stores, and beautiful nature spots. The host was friendly and responsive throughout our stay, which made everything smooth and easy. Overall, it was a great family getaway. We’d definitely love to come back again!” – Zahirul I.
Can accommodate up to 13 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Whidbey Island’s natural beauty frames this waterfront property. Fairway Harbor View is where the deck overlooks the bay and becomes everyone’s favorite spot. Two families can fit comfortably here without feeling like they’re living on top of each other.
Morning coffee and evening sunsets also happen from the deck chairs, where the harbor views will remind you why island getaways beat city vacations every time.
Why You’ll Love Fairway Harbor View: Charge your EV overnight while exploring Whidbey Island’s beaches, forests, and charming towns without worrying about limited island charging.
The home features a wonderful deck with stunning bay views, peaceful island setting with easy beach access, a well-equipped kitchen for family meals, proximity to Whidbey’s art galleries, restaurants, and outdoor activities that include kayaking and hiking.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This was a great house for our 2 families. Plenty of space for both kids and adults. Wonderful deck overlooking the bay was perfect for mornings and evenings.”– Nick D.
Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 3 beds and 2 baths
Asheville’s arts scene, brewery culture, and mountain backdrop are the balance you are looking for. Modern Escape sits in a quiet neighborhood that feels peaceful while staying close enough to downtown for easy brewery hopping and restaurant exploring.
This home’s garage solves one of electric vehicle owners’ biggest vacation headaches in mountain destinations, where public charging often requires driving back to main roads.
Why You’ll Love Modern Escape: The garage EV charger keeps your electric vehicle powered for Blue Ridge Parkway drives and Biltmore Estate visits without hunting for public stations.
The home features a hot tub for relaxation, a fire pit to gather around with your loved ones, a quiet location perfect for relaxation, a short drive to downtown Asheville’s breweries and restaurants, and proximity to hiking trails and mountain activities.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Fantastic place to stay! Perfect, quiet location and a short drive to downtown Asheville. The house is well equipped and having a garage with an EV charger was a definite plus. Highly recommend!”– Paul H.
Can accommodate up to 4 guests | 2 beds and 2 baths
Sonoma wine country living peaks at Grapevine Cottage, where a mini vineyard creates an authentic wine region atmosphere. The outdoor area still has privacy and space that hotels simply can’t match.
This home makes it perfect for couples seeking romantic getaways or small groups wanting intimate celebrations. The comfortable interior and well-equipped kitchen mean you can cook meals with local ingredients purchased at Sonoma farmers’ markets.
Why You’ll Love Grapevine Cottage: Power your EV on-site while exploring Sonoma’s hundreds of wineries and culinary destinations without range anxiety.
The home features a beautiful outdoor space with a private hobby vineyard, proximity to dozens of Sonoma wineries and tasting rooms, and easy access to Healdsburg, Glen Ellen, and downtown Sonoma’s restaurants and shops.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We thoroughly enjoyed our stay. The property was beautiful with the mini vineyard. We loved the outdoor area, which offered plenty of space and was very private. The house was comfortable with everything we needed, and the kitchen was well-equipped. We would definitely consider returning.”– Kelly S.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Every beach vacation dream becomes true at 30A, as this coastal place offers an easy walk to pristine sands and convenient access to the area’s famous bike path. Add in The Flying Pig as your home base as you enjoy sunny Florida.
This home works for everyone, from small kids to grandparents. And the location puts you close enough to 30A’s restaurants and shops while having a quiet residential experience where you can actually relax.
Why You’ll Love The Flying Pig: Keep your EV charged as you explore 30A’s beaches and coastal towns without worrying about limited charging options along this scenic highway.
The home features a beautiful private pool for days you want calm water instead of ocean waves, a hot tub perfect for evening relaxation, an easy walk to the beach with excellent access, and proximity to a walk/bike path for active exploration.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This is our third year of a multi-generational vacation to 30A (small kiddos through grandparents!) This is our favorite property to date: Clean, easy walk to a nice beach, next to a walk/bike path if you want to be active, great proximity to the stretch of everything 30A offers, and a highlight is the one block walk to a cute ice cream and shake shop. The hot tub and pool were also beautiful. House is spacious, modern, and clean.”– Courtney R.
Can accommodate up to 6 guests | 3 beds and 2 baths
Newport Beach living and a California coastal lifestyle can happen at the same time here at Stone Lagoon. This spacious home is near the beach and a quiet neighborhood that creates a perfect balance of relaxation and vacation.
The huge kitchen, dining room, and outdoor patio mean hosting family dinners will always feel natural instead of cramped. The hot tub is also ready for everyone to use and enjoy after a day at the beach.
Why You’ll Love Stone Lagoon: Charge your electric vehicle on-site when exploring Newport Beach, Laguna Beach, and Orange County’s coastal attractions without range concerns.
The home features an outdoor patio with dining and lounging areas, a hot tub in excellent working condition, a fire pit and fireplace, proximity to beaches, and beach towels & chairs that are provided for your use.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“My family had an amazing stay at this San Clemente home! The house was beautiful, spacious and felt like a beach home. Huge kitchen, dining room and outdoor patio. The hot tub was working in great condition and ready the moment we arrived. This home was close to the beach and quiet neighborhood. Hosts were very responsive when we had questions and requests. Altogether such a great find and location! Thank you for making our stay easy and great!”– Rocky T.
Choosing vacation homes with EV charging requires more consideration than just confirming a charger exists. Understanding these factors before booking prevents surprises and ensures your electric vehicle stays powered throughout your trip.
1. Charging Speed and Compatibility: Level 2 chargers deliver 25-30 miles of range per hour, making overnight charging sufficient for most daily adventures. Level 1 standard outlets add only 4-5 miles per hour, requiring longer charging times that might not work for active vacation schedules.
Tesla owners should confirm whether properties offer Tesla Wall Connectors or universal J1772 chargers requiring adapters. Most modern EVs handle universal chargers fine, but knowing beforehand prevents arrival-day stress.
2. Power Source and Reliability: Not all charging setups are created equal. Homes powered by solar or equipped with dedicated EV circuits tend to offer more stable charging without tripping breakers or competing with household power use.
If you’re visiting a remote cabin or mountain retreat, double-check that the property isn’t running on a limited generator or off-grid systems that may restrict charging hours. For peace of mind, look for listings that clearly state “dedicated 240V outlet for EVs.”
3. Parking and Accessibility: Properties with garage charging offer weather protection and security superior to outdoor driveway setups. Confirm the parking situation handles your vehicle size, since some garage spaces fit sedans but not SUVs or trucks.
Shared parking lots with charging stations work fine if you don’t mind coordinating with other guests, but dedicated spots eliminate those awkward “is that your car blocking the charger” conversations that ruin vacation vibes.
Stay, Charge, and Explore Effortlessly
Stop letting charging anxiety dictate your destination choices or force elaborate route planning around charging stops.
These thoughtfully equipped vacation houses with EV charging stations mean that you can easily plug in once you arrive, then forget about charging for the rest of your stay.
Your car powers up automatically while you’re creating memories, exploring destinations, and actually relaxing instead of watching charging progress bars at highway rest stops.
Plan your next adventure with us! Browse AvantStay’s collection of EV-ready vacation homes and discover how seamless sustainable travel becomes.
December destinations and vacations create holiday memories that stick around long after decorations get packed away: Christmas lights twinkling against fresh snow, hot cocoa steaming on cabin decks, families laughing while sledding down powdery hills.
Whether you’re craving guaranteed snow for building snowmen or cozy mountain towns with festive celebrations, the right destination transforms ordinary holidays into extraordinary adventures.
Finding the perfect Christmas vacation spot depends on what makes your family excited. Some want epic skiing and winter sports, while others prefer scenic small towns where holiday lights sparkle every night.
The good news is that there are the best places to go for Christmas vacation across the country, from the Rocky Mountains to the Smoky Mountains, each offering unique ways to celebrate the season away from home.
Christmas Vacation Destinations
These twelve Christmas vacation destinations deliver everything from world-class ski resorts to peaceful mountain retreats where families reconnect without daily routine interruptions. Pack your warmest layers and prepare for Christmas vacations that beat staying home every single time.
Breckenridge is a historic mining town at 9,600 feet elevation transforms into a real-life snow globe every December. Over 250,000 LED lights illuminate Main Street starting the first weekend of December during the Lighting of Breckenridge ceremony.
December brings average highs in the 30s with around 57 inches of snowfall, making white Christmas dreams a near guarantee. And the town’s Victorian architecture, covered in snow and lights, creates postcard scenes at every corner.
Winter Activities: World-class skiing and snowboarding, snowshoeing, dog sledding, sleigh rides, ice skating, cross-country skiing
Holiday Events: Race of the Santas, Lighting of Breckenridge, Ullr Fest, New Year’s Eve Torchlight Parade
Best For: Families wanting guaranteed snow, couples seeking romantic mountain getaways, groups celebrating special occasions
European-inspired village atmosphere at Vail makes Christmas feel like you’ve traveled to the Alps without the passport hassles. The pedestrian-only village stays beautifully decorated throughout December with lights, wreaths, and holiday displays, creating that festive ambiance.
World-renowned skiing attracts enthusiasts from around the globe, but the village itself offers plenty for non-skiers who just want to soak in holiday magic. The ski resort spans over 5,300 acres across seven Back Bowls, giving advanced skiers endless terrain to explore.
Tucked in a box canyon surrounded by 13,000-foot peaks, Telluride has the isolation that feels special instead of remote. The historic mining town maintains an authentic Colorado character without the crowds that plague more famous ski resorts.
But Telluride’s real magic lies in its scenery, where jagged peaks create dramatic backdrops for every activity. Christmas here means smaller crowds than Aspen or Vail while still having first-class skiing, dining, and accommodations that satisfy even picky travelers.
The 2002 Winter Olympics put Park City on the global ski map. The town’s elevation at 7,000 feet means easier altitude adjustment than higher Colorado resorts. Park City’s location, just 35 minutes from Salt Lake City airport, makes it one of the easiest ski destinations to reach, too.
Christmas here transforms Main Street into a winter wonderland where holiday lights sparkle against Victorian-era storefronts. The street’s steep grade means you burn calories shopping, but restaurants and breweries line the route, providing plenty of refueling stops.
North America’s largest alpine lake, Lake Tahoe, creates scenery that makes even jaded travelers pull out their cameras constantly. The crystal-clear blue water contrasts dramatically with snow-covered peaks, creating postcard views from nearly every angle.
Christmas at Tahoe means you split time between skiing mountains and enjoying lakefront activities. Christmas Eve services do happen at lakefront chapels where windows frame the water, creating spiritual moments enhanced by natural beauty.
The high desert and Cascade peaks can be found in Central Oregon, where volcanic landscapes create unique winter scenery. And Mt. Bachelor ski resort has over 4,000 acres of terrain without the crowds or prices of more famous destinations.
Bend’s downtown maintains a Pacific Northwest brewery culture while the Old Mill District delivers shopping and dining in a converted lumber mill setting along the Deschutes River. The Christmas lights strung through downtown creates a festive ambiance in this outdoorsy town.
This Southern California mountain lake sits just two hours from Los Angeles, making it the closest reliable snow destination for millions. Big Bear village’s compact size also means everything stays walkable instead of requiring constant driving.
Big Bear’s elevation at 7,000 feet sometimes means rain instead of snow during warmer December periods. But when storms hit, the mountain have that magical white Christmas Southern California residents rarely experience at home.
The Pocono Mountains serve as the East Coast’s accessible winter playground. Multiple ski resorts, indoor water parks, and town clusters are within easy driving distance. The region’s mix of activities means the weather doesn’t ruin plans since indoor alternatives exist everywhere.
Christmas here at Poconos is all about bundling up for outdoor ice skating, sledding down resort hills, and exploring historic towns decorated with wreaths and lights. The Christmas lights and decorations transform these towns into festive wonderlands that photographers love.
Winter Activities: Skiing, snowboarding, snow tubing, indoor water parks, ice skating, and historic town exploring
Holiday Events: Victorian Christmas in Jim Thorpe, tree lightings, holiday train rides
Best For: East Coast families, groups with non-skiers, travelers wanting indoor backup activities
Western Massachusetts’s rolling mountains have a New England charm where colonial history mixes with arts and culture. However, the region’s cultural institutions stay active through winter with concerts, plays, and gallery exhibitions.
Christmas in the Berkshires is composed of white-steepled churches framed by snow-covered hills, historic inns serving wassail by fireplaces, and small towns where everyone seems to know each other.
Winter in the Smokies means fewer crowds than summer while maintaining full access to restaurants, attractions, and entertainment. Snow happens occasionally but not reliably, making this destination perfect for families wanting mountain atmosphere without guaranteed bitterly cold weather.
However, the Great Smoky Mountains National Park stays open year-round, making Christmas an ideal time for uncrowded hiking and stunning winter views. Gatlinburg and Pigeon Forge also transform into holiday spectacles where millions of lights illuminate every surface.
Asheville has over 30 craft breweries where après-hiking beer happens year-round. Downtown’s independent shops sell handmade goods from regional artists and craftspeople, making Christmas shopping feel authentic instead of mall-like.
Christmas here means wandering downtown’s Art Deco architecture decorated with lights, sipping local beer, and eating creative mountain cuisine. Live music venues, farm-to-table restaurants, and the River Arts District provide entertainment beyond typical mountain towns.
Finding the right home transforms good Christmas vacations into unforgettable ones. These carefully selected AvantStay vacation rentals deliver holiday comfort, space for families, and locations that put you close to winter activities without sacrificing peace.
Smoky Ridge – Smoky Mountains, Tennessee
“We absolutely loved our stay here, and hope that we can visit this home again soon for our annual Christmas Tennessee trip. This home is close enough to all the activities of Pigeon Forge but out of the way with a great view. Easy to drive to. We enjoyed seeing the ‘Smokey mountains’ on the top porch every morning while drinking our coffee. The home is immaculate and very clean. The beds were so comfortable and the linens were all very nice! We have stayed all over TN for our annual Christmas trips and this home is the best! This dog friendly home was just what our family needed for Christmas and we had a great time with family! Thank you!”– Jon L.
“We had a wonderful experience at this beautiful modern Paso Robles property. Large clean rooms easily accommodated our group of 10. We enjoyed comfortable beds, a kitchen with every gadget we could want for cooking, a fully stocked game cabinet, and views from both the front and back of the house. AvantStay’s thoughtful personal touches were the icing on the cake: they provided welcome snacks and coffee; were incredibly responsive to questions; and after learning we were celebrating Christmas, they set up a Christmas tree and decorations for us. I’d give an extra star if we could. Thank you for the fabulous getaway- we will be back!”– Erin G.
“This was a fantastic home for our Christmas trip. The kitchen is excellently stocked, every time we wanted something it seemed to magically appear! The sauna and hot tub were great additions that functioned perfectly, as well. Thank you for a great stay!”– James S.
“We had an amazing time at this property! It was so clean and fully decorated for the holidays! There was nothing we needed that wasn’t handy and available—Our group was made up of young 20 somethings and older adults. The house and lake access was perfect! We kayaked, played games and watched Christmas movies! Thank you!”– Linda S.
Christmas vacation planning starts months before December when smart travelers lock in accommodations and flights before prices spike. Popular destinations also book quickly as families claim their favorite properties for annual traditions.
Starting early means you get first choice of homes instead of settling for whatever remains available. Here are a few things to consider when planning your next holiday vacation:
1. Budget Considerations: Winter holiday travel costs more than regular season trips. Ski destinations charge peak pricing during Christmas week, while even non-ski mountain towns raise rates.
Booking vacation rentals directly with property managers like AvantStay often delivers better value than third-party booking sites that add service fees. Cooking meals at your rental instead of eating every meal out also saves substantial money that buys better experiences like ski lessons or excursions.
2. Weather Preparedness: Mountain weather changes quickly, where morning sunshine transforms into afternoon snowstorms within hours. Packing layers allows adjusting to temperature swings without suffering.
Guaranteed snow destinations like Breckenridge and Vail deliver white Christmas reliability, while places like the Smokies offer mountain atmosphere without bitter cold guarantees. Checking historical weather patterns helps set realistic expectations before booking.
3. Family Coordination: Christmas vacations work best when everyone agrees on the destination and activities beforehand. Discuss expectations with your group about daily schedules, meal responsibilities, and budget splits before booking.
Families with mixed generations should choose destinations offering both challenging and easy activities so everyone stays entertained. Creating a loose itinerary prevents the “what should we do today” arguments that waste vacation time and create tension.
Make This Christmas Unforgettable
Families building snowmen in front of mountain cabins and kids’ laughter echoing across frozen lakes. These moments don’t happen scrolling through phones at home during another ordinary December.
Christmas vacations create these memories that define childhoods and strengthen family bonds in ways regular weekends never achieve. If you want to experience this Christmas magic, it’s finally the best time to consider booking a place.
Book your Christmas escape today! Browse our Christmas-ready vacation rentals and start planning the holiday trip your family will remember forever.
Wake up to sunlight dancing across glassy water, coffee in hand, watching your boat gently bob at your private dock just steps from the back door. No marina fees, no crowded launches, no hauling gear across parking lots.
From serene mountain lakes to coastal waterways, these vacation rentals with boat docks transform lake trips from logistical nightmares into seamless adventures where you drop anchor at your own slice of waterfront paradise.
Experience dock-to-dip convenience that makes spontaneous sunset cruises, early morning fishing, and lazy afternoon paddleboard sessions actually happen instead of staying on your “someday” list.
If you’re planning wakeboarding adventures, peaceful kayak explorations, or simply floating with a good book, direct water access from your rental changes everything about lake vacations.
💡 Looking for more waterfront options? Check out our guide to the best waterfront homes for more lakeside or beachside properties
Lake Living – Lake Norman, North Carolina
Can accommodate up to 22 guests | 8 beds and 8 baths
Two adjacent lakefront homes here at Lake Living create an epic compound perfect for family reunions or friend groups wanting everyone close but not cramped. Jet ski ramps flank the boat slips, making launching water toys ridiculously easy instead of the usual hassle.
Why You’ll Love Lake Living: The two private boat docks will become your lakeside hangout spot for afternoon drinks, sunset watching, and those late-night conversations that make vacation memories stick.
Best Home Features:
Swimming pool, two hot tubs, and kayaks are provided
Multiple kitchens, living areas, patios, and balconies with lake views
Near Lake Norman State Park, Jetton Park, Birkdale Village, and NASCAR Racing Experience
“The houses were perfect for our multiple ages. The rooms were spacious. We were surprised to have paper products and all soaps, detergents and cleaning supplies at a surplus provided. The dock had jet ski ramps along with the boat slip. We were able to cook at ease since all pans and cookware were provided. I appreciated the keurig and drip coffee maker. Everyone enjoyed the grounds with the pool and hot tubs.”– Lori C.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 4 baths
Shoreline Lakehouse is a Big Bear gem that sits in deep water, unaffected by fluctuating lake levels. This home solves the common Big Bear dock problem. No more beach launch struggles, no public dock crowds, just tie up and walk inside for dinner.
Why You’ll Love Shoreline Lakehouse: Your private dock extends into Big Bear Lake’s deep water and the area’s most popular fishing holes. This is an angler’s dream location, letting you pull your boat right up after cruising the lake all day.
Best Home Features:
Well-kept, sizable back yard, hot tub, outdoor fire pit, and fireplace
Game room with a poker table and bar, multiple decks, and lakeside lounging
Near Bear Mountain and Snow Summit ski resorts, Big Bear Marina, and Alpine Zoo
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Wonderful house on the lake with gorgeous views. Plenty of room. Nice fully equipped kitchen. Lots of games to play. Outdoor fire pit was wonderful and we enjoyed the spa!”– Debbie W.
Can accommodate up to 15 guests | 6 beds and 4 baths
Tucked into a charming fishing village along Laguna Madre Bay, Keeper Trout has a serious fishing enthusiast vibe. The location between Corpus Christi and North Padre Island means you’re central to everything without being stuck in tourist trap territory.
Seventeen private boat slips in the community, plus a nearby ramp, solve all your boating logistics instantly.
Why You’ll Love Keeper Trout: Community boat dock access with 17 private boat slips, plus a nearby ramp, means your vessel parks steps from your door instead of miles away at some crowded marina. The shallow-water bay setting also works perfectly for fishing boats.
Best Home Features:
Community pool with ocean views and a shaded cabana with loungers
Two balconies with outdoor dining, BBQ grill, and a lower patio
10 minutes to North Padre Island Beach, Mustang Island Beach, and the Texas State Aquarium
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️⭐️ We had such a great stay at this AvantStay property! The home was super spacious and spotless, with a beautiful fresh remodel that made it feel brand new. We especially loved having four bathrooms, which made it perfect for a group stay, and the balcony view was stunning. The location couldn’t be better—close to the beaches, shops, and restaurants—and the price was very reasonable for what you get. Absolutely loved our time here and can’t wait to come back!”– Alex P.
Can accommodate up to 7 guests | 2 beds and 2 baths
Newport Beach living reaches the peak at this canalfront property, where a Duffy boat rental docks right at your back door. Canalfront Charmer is cruising legendary canals, beating driving any day, especially when restaurants and bars have their own docking spots.
Why You’ll Love Canalfront Charmer: Boats replace cars for evening adventures here. You can easily rent the Duffy boat docked at the property and cruise Newport Harbor like a local. Dock at waterfront restaurants for dinner and explore hidden canal neighborhoods.
Best Home Features:
Expansive patio with a hot tub, al fresco dining area, BBQ grill, and sun loungers
Modern interior with a fully equipped kitchen, and a fire pit is available
Walking distance to Newport Beach restaurants, shops, and Balboa Island
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Loved the place, especially renting the Duffy boat docked at the home. We cruised around and docked at multiple restaurants and landings. Very cool”– Adam D.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Lake Tahoe’s crystal-clear waters literally lap at your back door at Lakefront Haven. This is where the dock and paddleboards wait for spontaneous water adventures. The location near cafes and restaurants means you’re never far from quality coffee or good meals.
Why You’ll Love Lakefront Haven: Step from your back door onto a private dock extending into Lake Tahoe’s famously clear waters, where you can see the bottom even in deep sections. Paddleboards come with the rental, and the dock will surely become your favorite spot.
Best Home Features:
Access to the lake and the Homewood Mountain Resort
Spacious deck with outdoor dining and BBQ grill, hot tub, and fireplace
Two paddleboards, one canoe, and life vests are included
Steps from cafés and restaurants, near Squaw Valley and Alpine Meadows
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had a wonderful stay here! The home was very clean, cozy, and exactly as described. The location is perfect—just steps away from great cafés and restaurants, with gorgeous scenery right out the back. AvantStay was quick and responsive to any requests, which made everything smooth and easy. The rooms were well made and comfortable, and we especially loved the dock and paddleboards, which were perfect for our time on the water. Honestly, it was so peaceful and enjoyable that it was hard to leave for our adventures. Highly recommend!”– Josh T.
20 Morgan Place Drive – Coastal Charleston, South Carolina
Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 4 beds and 3 baths
Boating convenience is what you’ll expect here at 20 Morgan Place Drive. A coastal property where a private dock accommodates your vessel, making anyone stepping into this place keep returning. Plus, the dock location is accessible for spontaneous afternoon cruises.
Why You’ll Love 20 Morgan Place Drive: Your private boat dock is now updated with electrical power. This means overnight boat charging without extension cords. Just tie up your boat after exploring Charleston’s waterways and Low Country creeks, then walk inside for dinner.
Best Home Features:
Community pool and Wild Dunes amenities, and recreation access
Well-maintained property, multiple outdoor spaces, and a grill are available
Easy drive to Sullivan’s Island, Mount Pleasant, and Historic Charleston
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Great location. 4th visit and house is always clean. I love the dock for my boat. They recently updated power to the dock which helps a lot… The left boat tie downs on the dock need replacing. One is loose and scratched my boat but it’s very minor. 5 star overall for sure.”– James C.
Can accommodate up to 16 guests | 5 beds and 3 baths
Poconos peace starts with kayaking and boating that happens right from your backyard at Tranquil Waterside. Nature surrounds the property, creating that true mountain lake escape where wildlife sightings outnumber neighbor encounters.
Why You’ll Love Tranquil Waterside: Private boat dock access opens Pocono lake exploration without dealing with crowded public launches. Simply kayak from your dock into peaceful coves instead of jet ski traffic. The dock setup welcomes your own boat, too.
Best Home Features:
3 kayaks, 1 rowboat, and life jackets are provided
Community pool, with an EV charger, fireplace, and a dedicated office space
Game room with pool table, ping pong, and foosball, fitness equipment available
Near Stroudsburg Borough Outdoor Ice Skating Rink and Kalahari Waterpark.
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This property was so beautiful and peaceful, exactly like the pictures and description. Kayaking and boating was amazing, as well as enjoying the nature around the firepit outside. Inside, there is an abundance of activities, from pool to table tennis to foosball. The hosts were responsive and friendly as well! I greatly recommend”– Mofei W.
Can accommodate up to 18 guests | 7 beds and 7 baths
Destin beach access and private harbor docking are what Harborside is. This is the home where you enjoy both Gulf beaches and calm harbor waters, while being near the beach. Alternating between ocean swimming and harbor boating is also incredibly easy.
without ever moving your car. Multiple families vacation together comfortably here, making it perfect for friend groups or extended family needing space without hotel hallways.
Why You’ll Love Harborside: The private boat dock keeps your vessel secure in calm harbor waters. The dock location also gives you best-of-both-worlds access to Gulf fishing, harbor island hopping, and waterfront restaurant docking.
Best Home Features:
Private swimming pool, lower patio lounge with outdoor dining setup
Ping pong table, BBQ grill, and a small wet bar
Near Destin Harbor and beaches, waterfront dining, and Emerald Coast attractions
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Beautiful home with private dock, just a 5 min walk from the beach. The house was perfect for our groups of families vacationing together. We will stay here again!”– Ann B.
Can accommodate up to 6 guests | 2 beds and 2 baths
Goss Lake Chalet is a private lake chalet where the dock extends into waters warm enough for comfortable swimming. Feel the Whidbey Island serenity with a cabin that perfectly nails the Pacific Northwest vibe.
Why You’ll Love Goss Lake Chalet: Your private lake dock opens up swimming opportunities in the water. The dock will also be your diving platform, sun lounging spot, and evening gathering place where families collect after exploring Whidbey’s forests and beaches.
Best Home Features:
Lake access and a small boat available, a large deck, and an alfresco dining table
Ping pong table, fire pit, vintage VCR, and well-appointed kitchen
Short bike ride to Putney Woods, short drive to historic Langley, or Freeland
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had a fantastic time at this beautiful cabin! The house was very well appointed, comfortable and clean. We especially liked the kitchen, the ping pong table and the fire pit. And though it wasn’t super warm, we enjoyed swimming in the lake from the private dock. Would highly recommend!”– Greg W.
Boat docks aren’t just convenient parking for watercraft. They fundamentally change how you experience lake properties by removing barriers between you and the water.
When the boat waits at your back door instead of across town at a marina, spontaneous adventures actually happen instead of getting talked out of due to logistics.
Here’s why choosing a vacation rental with a private boat dock is worth it:
Skip the Marina Hassles
Public marinas mean fees, waiting lists, and driving to your own boat like it belongs to someone else. Private docks eliminate monthly slip fees that add hundreds to vacation costs. You control launch times instead of waiting for ramp availability during peak hours when everyone wants to be on the water simultaneously.
Spontaneous Water Adventures Happen
Private dock access turns “let’s go for a sunset cruise” from a 90-minute production into a 5-minute reality. Kids jump off the dock between activities without elaborate planning. Early morning fishing happens because walking to your dock beats driving to public access points before coffee even kicks in.
Your Gear Stays Organized
Dock boxes store water sports equipment instead of cluttering garages or creating vehicle Tetris every lake day. Life jackets, ropes, tubes, and fishing gear live where you use them. Loading the boat happens incrementally throughout the day instead of one frantic pre-launch scramble where someone always forgets the cooler.
Make the Most of Your Lake Vacation
Private dock access opens endless water-based adventures that hotel pools and beach walks just can’t match.
Imagine sunrise fishing to midnight stargazing from the dock, and end the day with an evening hangout with your family by the dock. Family stories being told for years: someone catches an unexpected fish, loons call across the water at sunset, or meteor showers appear overhead.
These experiences don’t happen at properties where water stays perpetually three parking lots away. And staying in a vacation rental with a boat dock means these homes create vacation experiences that stick in memory long after tan lines fade and vacation photos get buried in phone galleries.
Ready to wake up where the water is? Browse these incredible AvantStay waterfront homes and experience how private dock access transforms ordinary lake trips into those vacations everyone remembers forever.
Imagine a vacation rental where bounce houses wait in the backyard, movie theaters hide upstairs, and themed bedrooms transport them to their favorite worlds. Your kids running through the house, discovering a new adventure around every corner, instead of whining “I’m bored” five minutes after arrival.
Finding accommodations that actually keep children entertained saves your sanity and creates those magical vacation moments families remember for years.
From indoor water slides to backyard playhouses, arcade machines to basketball courts, these fun airbnbs for kids are packed with enough fun features to make kids forget about their tablets and actually want to play outside or explore indoors.
No more desperately searching for activities because the house itself becomes the entertainment. Parents get to relax while kids burn energy safely within the property, making everyone’s vacation actually feel like a vacation.
The Date Palm Estate – Coachella Valley, California
Can accommodate up to 20 guests | 8 beds and 5 baths
Catering to active families who need space for sports and outdoor play, The Date Palm Estate is the best sprawling desert estate. Outdoor courts mean kids burn energy through actual physical activity instead of just screens and swimming.
Why This House is Fun: Full-size basketball, pickleball, and bocce ball courts transform the backyard into a family sports complex. The courts work for all ages and skill levels, creating opportunities for active and engaged family bonding.
Big lawn with a cornhole game, hammock, and an expansive outdoor living setup
Salt water pool, hot tub, fire pit, pool table, foosball, and arcade machines
Walking distance to the Empire Polo Club grounds and near the Santa Rosa and San Jacinto Mountains National Monument
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Beautiful house and property for a big family vacation. Very spread out and lots to do for kids and adults. Our group of 16 slept comfortably with lots of extra space. Would love to go back!”– David H.
Can accommodate up to 28 guests | 10 beds and 8 baths
Game Farm Villa is a 12,000-square-foot estate on 10 acres that redefines family fun with features that make kids forget their devices exist. Multiple living areas mean adults get space while children create their own entertainment universe in dedicated play zones.
Why This House is Fun: The recreation room features two full-size inflatable bounce houses with turf flooring that lets kids jump themselves into exhaustion. When they finally tire of bouncing, the game room has pool tables and arcade games.
Best Home Features:
Outdoor pool, hot tub, fire pit, and private pond with a pedal boat
Sauna room, poker table, bridge, and ramp by the pond
Located in the Catskill Mountains near hiking trails, waterfalls, and Olana State Historic Site
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“This was an awesome family vacation in a lovely location. We never left the property as there was plenty to do for all ages from 2 to 83. The yard and pool, fire pit, game room were big hits. The beds were so comfortable and rooms dark and well insulated from neighboring rooms and temperatures were individually controlled. The kitchen with 2 ovens and 2 dishwashers and lots of space was fabulous for cooking large meals. Highly recommend!”– Linna R.
Can accommodate up to 17 guests | 8 beds and 8 baths
Nestled on 25 acres along Snowmass Creek, Twin Creeks Ranch has luxury living vibes with serious kid appeal. The property spans enough land for kids to roam safely while parents maintain that coveted vacation peace of mind.
Why This House is Fun: The outdoor cabin playhouse becomes the kids’ headquarters for the entire trip, complete with enough space for imaginative adventures. Add a teepee for camping dreams, plus pickleball and basketball courts when they need to burn energy before dinner.
Best Home Features:
Private pond, hot tub, outdoor pavilion, fire pit, fireplace, sauna
Pickleball court, basketball court, pool table, outdoor gear
20 minutes from downtown Aspen and world-class ski resorts
This property is awaiting its first guest reviews. Be the first to create memories here and share your family’s experience!
Can accommodate up to 20 guests | 11 beds and 10 baths
Spanning 12 acres with three separate houses, The Pond Estate has entertainment on a scale that most families only dream about. The massive property means kids explore different zones throughout the day without ever feeling confined.
Why This House is Fun: The 3,000-square-foot converted garage game house packs wall-to-wall entertainment, including every game imaginable, plus a wet bar for parents. Kids rotate between indoor and outdoor pools, tennis courts, and multiple expansive lawns.
Best Home Features:
Indoor and outdoor pools, hot tubs, fire pit,a tennis & pickleball court, and a private lake
14-person dining table, grand piano, yoga and studio space, presentation space
Private fitness gym, movie room, outdoor kitchen, with an EV charger, helipad
10 minutes from downtown Palm Springs, Indian Canyons hiking, and championship golf courses
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Beautiful property, would definitely recommend to others and will be back again! Hosts were wonderful and ready to accommodate.”– Khloe W.
Can accommodate up to 18 guests | 7 beds and 4 baths
Located in a peaceful setting, this cozy Poconos retreat proves you don’t need massive estates to keep kids entertained during mountain getaways. The intimate size of Otter Banks actually brings families together while still offering enough activities to prevent boredom.
Why This House is Fun: The Nintendo Switch gaming console becomes the rainy day hero when mountain weather doesn’t cooperate. Kids can play their favorite games while parents enjoy the hot tub on the deck.
Best Home Features:
Hot tub, deck with outdoor seating, picnic table, fireplace, and high chair
8 amenity wristbands, an Electric guitar, with an EV charger, foosball, and a pool table
Close to restaurants, stores, nature spots, and ski resorts
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had a really wonderful stay at this Airbnb! The house was clean, comfortable, and perfect for our family. The kids loved having space to play and the cozy setup made us feel right at home. We especially enjoyed relaxing in the hot tub in the evenings after exploring nearby attractions. The location was peaceful yet close to restaurants, stores, and beautiful nature spots. The host was friendly and responsive throughout our stay, which made everything smooth and easy. Overall, it was a great family getaway. We’d definitely love to come back again!”– Zahirul I.
Can accommodate up to 15 guests | 5 beds and 7 baths
The entertainment here at Alta Vista Estate focuses on water fun that keeps children occupied for hours. This LA property features the amenity that makes kids squeal with excitement, while the outdoor area becomes the main attraction during California’s endless sunny days.
Why This House is Fun: The pool water slide creates that resort feeling right at your private rental. Kids can spend entire afternoons racing down the slide and jumping back in for another turn.
Infinity swimming pools, 2nd swimming pool with a long water slide
Hot tub, sauna, putting green, pool table, arcade machines, piano, private gym
Basement game room with ping pong, foosball, air hockey, and shuffleboard
Near Malibu beaches, Beverly Hills, and downtown LA, and 30 minutes from Hollywood and Universal Studios
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“I gotta say this is one of the best Airbnb’s I have ever stayed at! It was clean Private And the house and everyone involved were super amazing with response time and getting things done I loved the entire stay, you will not regret booking this place. It is so amazing! If you love waterslides, it’s such a fun little waterslide and the hot tub is great There’s so many beautiful rooms Honestly, I cannot give this place more than five stars but if I could, I would!”– Bianca B.
Can accommodate up to 25 guests | 9 beds and 6 baths
Coconut Breeze is located in the Disney vacation rental capital. It is an Orlando gem with themed bedrooms that make kids’ eyes light up at bedtime. The home sits close enough to theme parks for easy access without the hotel hassle.
Why This House is Fun: Game rooms mean entertainment continues even on park rest days when everyone needs to recharge. Combined with multiple character-themed bedrooms, kids get transported into their favorite movies and stories, and get imaginative or active.
Best Home Features:
Frozen, Mickey Mouse, Star Wars, Avengers, Jurassic Park, and Harry Potter rooms
Private pool, back patio with outdoor setup, arcade machines, 14-seater dining table
Short drive to Disney World, Universal Studios, and Solara Resort
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Perfect home to share with families. Plenty of space, huge living and dining area, short drive to the parks. All of the themed rooms and game rooms were amazing. The property manager was very responsive and great to work with. Would definitely recommend this property!”– Leslie S.
Can accommodate up to 12 guests | 5 beds and 3 baths
A private home comfort with resort amenities that keep families entertained beyond their rental walls. Welcome ot Clint at Brasada Ranch Resort, where kids enjoy activities and programs without parents planning every minute.
Why This House is Fun: Resort amenities become an extension of your rental, offering supervised activities and entertainment. Activities can include a golf course, volleyball, basketball, horse riding, fishing, extensive hiking trails, and many more.
Best Home Features:
Resort access to pools, arcade, playground, spa, gym, and fitness classes
Fire pit table, shuffleboard, high chair, and family-friendly games
Located near Smith Rock State Park and Central Oregon outdoor activities
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Our family had a great time. This home is fully prepped with everything you need. From kid toys, to a high chair and games, we felt like we have everything we needed for a perfect stay.” – Jason A.
Can accommodate up to 10 guests | 5 beds and 4 baths
Here at Chardonnay Charm, parents can tour wineries during the day while kids anticipate evening game tournaments back at the house. This wine country retreat proves luxury adult destinations can absolutely work for families, too.
Why This House is Fun: The collection of table games, including pool, ping pong, foosball, and a poker table, creates an entertainment center where families actually interact. The game room features classic table games that bring multiple generations together.
Best Home Features:
Swimming pool and spa, shaded al fresco dining, and BBQ area
Putting green, movie theater, and fire table available
Located in Temecula wine country, near Wilson Creek Winery and Ponte Winery
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had a great time, relaxed, had so much fun, celebrated 2 birthdays, all of us were so happy staying here. The house is really LUX! Large, gorgeous and full of all type of games: pool, table tennis, poker table and etc. The swiming pool and spa were amazing, we had really memorable time there. Highly Recommended!!!”– Suzanna S.
Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 3 beds and 2 baths
Kids experience nature-based fun that creates different memories than typical vacation rentals offer here at Lake View Retreat. This lakeside property has natural playground features that entertain through outdoor exploration.
Why This House is Fun: Nature is integrated into the property, which lets kids climb, explore, and play using natural features and structures. The Towamensing Trails community also adds 190 acres of recreational activities beyond your rental’s boundaries.
Best Home Features:
Big yard, outdoor deck, hot tub, cozy fireplace, arcade, pool table
Community pool, lake and community amenities access
Near Big Boulder, Split Rock, Hickory Run State Park, and Hawk Falls
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“My family and I had an amazing time at this beautiful house. we felt at home very peaceful, great neighborhood, very friendly people and the hosts were fabulous, fantastic and amazing very responsive we literally had everything we needed in that house it was a great getaway my kids and parents are still talking about the house they really loved it! and we will for sure return soon! A huge thanks to AvantStay for an amazing customer service. Great job!”– Sandi S.
Can accommodate up to 8 guests | 3 beds and 3 baths
Nadelhorn is a mountain cabin that brings retro gaming nostalgia to family vacations. Lake views and mountain setting also create that classic California mountain getaway, while modern entertainment keeps everyone engaged.
Why This House is Fun: The classic arcade machines transport kids and nostalgic parents back to gaming’s golden age. Children discover games without in-app purchases or online requirements, just pure button-mashing fun.
Outdoor deck, fully stocked kitchen, BBQ grill, and comfortable beds
Gorgeous lake and San Bernardino mountain views from the balcony
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Great cabin in Arrowhead! Kitchen is fully stocked for pretty much anything you would want to cook. Game room was awesome and kids loved it! Beds were moderately comfortable, not the best mattress’s and big dips in both beds. Love the view from the patio. Gorgeous view of the lake and mountains.”– Amanda O.
Can accommodate up to 19 guests | 6 beds and 5 baths
Multiple entertainment options at Boulder Ridge ensure this large property keeps everyone in your extended family or friend group occupied. This Smoky Mountain property helps transform family nights into a perfect wind-down activity and unforgettable experiences.
Why This House is Fun: The dedicated home movie theater creates that special cinema experience with comfortable seating and a proper screen. Kids can pick movies for theater showings while parents enjoy the convenience of entertainment without leaving the house.
Indoor pool, hot tub, game room with a ping pong table, mini putting green
Deck balcony with outdoor lounging areas and sitting, an alfresco dining table
Near Pigeon Forge, Dollywood, and the Great Smoky Mountains National Park
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“The place was amazing! Filled with several activities for teenagers and kids! My family enjoyed every single bit of it. We were a total of 17 and we all had a place to sleep/ enough bathrooms and all. The pool was great for the kids! The hot tub was great for the adults! The kitchen was very well supplied. The fridge had an ice maker! The neighborhood was amazing with great views. Everything was wonderful! Thank you AvantStays!”– Yulissa M.
Can accommodate up to 12 Guests | 6 beds and 3 baths
A unique desert mansion that caters to creative families with musical interests. Joshua Tree Mansion has a rock ‘n’ roll luxury vibe that creates a special atmosphere without being stuffy. Multiple hangout areas mean kids and adults find their own spaces while staying connected.
Why This House is Fun: Real musical instruments, including a piano in the game room, let kids explore their creative side. They can try to compose songs, put on mini-concerts for the family, and discover music in a hands-free, authentic way.
Best Home Features:
Private pool, outdoor kitchen, shaded pergolas, alfresco dining table, and fire pit
Attic library, chef’s kitchen with high-end appliances, luxe soaking tub
Near Joshua Tree Coffee Company and within driving distance to Joshua Tree National Park
“I’ve stayed in Joshua Tree plenty of times, but this place really stood out. If you’re looking for something that feels like your own private resort in the desert, this is it. The moment we arrived, we just stopped to take it all in…the pool glistening in the sun, the outdoor kitchen perfectly set up for sunset dinners, and those endless desert views. Inside, the vibe is rock ‘n’ roll meets luxury: bold art, beautiful chandeliers, and thoughtful details that make it feel special without trying too hard. With six bedrooms and several hangout areas, everyone had space to relax and unwind. The hosts were friendly, responsive, and the home was spotless. One night we gathered around the piano in the game room, another by the fire pit under the stars. Everything about it feels both thoughtful and effortless. Already planning our next trip back!”– Cheryl A.
Can accommodate up to 14 guests | 5 beds and 4 baths
Desert landscaping and spacious design accommodate large family gatherings beautifully here at Farrier. This is a Scottsdale property that caters to families with junior golfers or kids interested in learning the sport.
Why This House is Fun: The professional putting green turns kids into mini golfers, practicing their short game. Plus, it becomes an active entertainment that’s quieter than trampolines but equally engaging.
Best Home Features:
Swimming pool, pickleball court, and basketball court
Pool table, poker table, ping pong table, and fireplaces
Close to Old Town, Scottsdale attractions, golf courses, and shopping
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“Beautiful and spacious and property. We were in Scottsdale for a wedding a had a large group of extended family and this property was perfect.”– Joe M.
Can accommodate up to 18 guests | 6 individual suites with private spaces
Firefly Mountain Suites is a unique property that offers suite-style accommodations with communal spaces that bring families together. The shared amenities create opportunities for kids to make vacation friends while parents socialize.
Why This House is Fun: The indoor pool means the weather never ruins plans for water fun. It can be used for year-round swimming regardless of Tennessee mountain weather. Kids can spend hours in heated water with a courtyard and a game room for more entertainment options.
Best Home Features:
Hot tub, lounge area with a pool table, arcade room
Back courtyard with outdoor fire pit, mini playhouse, playground, bocce ball
Picnic tables and a communal dining room & kitchen for family meals
“The suite we stayed in was decorated very nicely, even tho we had 5 kids and 2 adults it still felt spacious and well laid out. Having the back courtyard with things for the kids to do plus the pool and game room made it so fun and relaxing to spend lots of time there! We have never stayed at a place with a communal dining room and kitchen so that was really cool and we wished we had thought ahead more to use them. Overall I’d highly recommend for any family with kids of all ages. The towns and hiking we wanted to go to were within reasonable distance too which is always a plus!”– Seth L.
Can accommodate up to 8 Guests | 3 beds and 3 baths
Angels Camp Lodge is your Big Bear cabin for classic mountain vacation vibes with board game entertainment that brings families together. The property accommodates groups and even your furry friends comfortably while maintaining that cozy cabin atmosphere.
Why This House is Fun: The extensive board game collection in this home is amazing. It creates old-school family entertainment that builds actual memories. Kids discover games beyond their tablets while parents introduce classics from their own childhoods.
Best Home Features:
Hot tub, outdoor deck with lounge area, fire pit, BBQ
Game room with pool table, card table, and shuffleboard, piano, and fireplace
A few minutes’ drive to Bear Mountain Ski Resort and Big Bear Lake
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had such a great stay at this cabin! The space was perfect for our group—three roomy bedrooms each with a king bed, which made it super comfortable. Our dogs loved having space to run around in a fully fenced outdoor area. The cabin came stocked with tons of amenities and games that kept us entertained all weekend. The pool table was definitely a highlight, and we loved the unique chess table too. Everything was very clean and well taken care of. The only thing to note is they were pretty firm with the check in time – which wasn’t a big issue for us – but maybe something to keep in mind. Overall, we really enjoyed our stay and would absolutely recommend this cabin!!”– Diane L.
Can accommodate up to 9 Guests | 4 beds and 2 baths
The spotless property and amazing pool here at Bella Vista create that resort experience in a private setting. Perfect for families wanting simple water-focused fun without elaborate entertainment needs.
Why This House is Fun: The spectacular swimming pool with rock waterfalls becomes the entire entertainment center during hot Arizona days. Kids can spend morning to evening swimming, playing pool games, and enjoying that vacation feeling.
Best Home Features:
Fully fenced backyard with outdoor lounging and cornhole games
Pool fence and gate, shaded back patio, side patio, al fresco dining tables, and fireplace
Close to downtown Chandler, just 5 minutes to Golfland Sunsplash Water Park
What Our Past Guests Are Saying:
“We had the perfect staycation! The place was spotless, and the pool was incredible — we spent the whole weekend swimming and relaxing with my husband and kids. It was just what we needed to unwind and enjoy some family time without going far from home. Highly recommend!”– Rhianna F.
Can accommodate up to 16 Guests | 6 beds and 6 baths
Perfect for California’s year-round pleasant weather, Sunset Point Estate is a San Diego property that offers expansive outdoor spaces. The property size accommodates large family gatherings without anyone feeling cramped.
Why This House is Fun: The massive backyard and playground become the main entertainment venue where kids play safely while parents supervise. It provides open space for running, playing, and outdoor games that apartments and small homes can’t match.
Best Home Features:
Infinity pool, hot tub, pickleball court, tennis court, private gym, pilates studio, and sauna
Movie theater, grand piano, classic chess table, poker table, fireplace
Pergola with outdoor kitchen and dining, study room with two secret doors,
Steam styler for clothes, a popcorn machine, a gourmet kitchen with a 5′-long galley sink
Near Maddera’s Golf Course, iconic Potato Chip Rock, and Lake Poway
This property is awaiting its first guest reviews. Be the first to create memories here and share your experience with future families!
Why Kid-Friendly Amenities Matter for Family Vacations
Vacation planning with children requires different priorities than adult-only trips. The house itself needs to provide entertainment because relying solely on local attractions gets expensive and exhausting quickly.
Smart families choose properties where kids stay engaged without parents constantly planning the next activity. However, here are some more reasons why you should consider kid-friendly amenities on your next family trip:
1. Kids Get Bored Faster Than Adults: Children need stimulation and variety throughout vacation days. Downtime at the rental should feel fun instead of boring, preventing the “there’s nothing to do” complaints that ruin everyone’s mood. Properties with built-in entertainment create buffer time between outings, where kids recharge while still having fun.
2. Save Money on Outside Entertainment: Theme parks, attractions, and constant dining out drain vacation budgets quickly. Rentals with pools, game rooms, and activities mean some days stay home-based without feeling like you’re missing out. Kids get excited about house amenities, making “pool days” feel special instead of disappointing.
3. Everyone Actually Relaxes: When kids entertain themselves safely on-property, parents finally relax instead of constantly supervising or planning. You can read a book by the pool while children play, sip coffee while they bounce, or enjoy adult conversation knowing they’re engaged and secure. This balance creates actual vacation feelings for everyone.
Choosing the Right Fun House for Your Family
Beyond amenities, several factors determine whether a property works for your specific family’s needs. Age ranges, interests, and group size all influence which features matter most. Consider these elements below when browsing options.
Match Amenities to Ages
Toddlers need different entertainment than teenagers. Bounce houses and playgrounds work for younger kids, while teens want game rooms and sports courts. Properties with varied amenities accommodate mixed age groups better than those focusing on single age ranges. Check out the best vacation rentals for toddlers for age-specific guidance.
Consider Group Size Honestly
Don’t cram too many people into spaces advertised for maximum occupancy. Kids need room to spread out and play without tripping over luggage and adults constantly. Generous space allowances mean everyone stays happier throughout the trip, reducing conflicts that ruin family time.
Location Matters for Activities
Proximity to attractions balances house-based fun with exploration. Being close enough to theme parks for day trips while far enough for quiet evenings creates the best scenario. Research what’s nearby and how much time you’ll spend at the property versus out exploring.
Start Planning Your Kid-Approved Getaway
Vacation memories come from those unexpected moments: kids’ laughter echoing through game rooms, cannonballs into pools, and discovering secret hideaways around properties. These specially-designed homes create those moments naturally without parents forcing fun.
Stop settling for boring hotels where kids bounce off the walls from boredom. Choose a fun Airbnb for kids where entertainment lives in every room and outdoor space, making your accommodation part of the adventure instead of just somewhere to sleep.
Ready to book the vacation your kids will talk about all year? Browse more fun AvantStay homes and watch your family’s faces light up when they discover their temporary home is actually the coolest place they’ve ever stayed.
Lake Tahoe sits at 6,224 feet in the Sierra Nevada, straddling the California-Nevada border with crystal-clear waters that seem impossibly blue.
The lake stretches 22 miles long and drops 1,645 feet deep, making it North America’s largest alpine lake. And year-round adventures define this mountain paradise.
This guide breaks down exactly how to spend your time at Tahoe, from quick weekend resets to extended mountain escapes.
Planning your trip? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Lake Tahoe for ideal weather and events before building your itinerary.
2 Days in Lake Tahoe: Weekend Mountain Sprint
This fast-paced getaway works for Bay Area locals extending a long weekend or travelers passing through the Sierra Nevada. Even with just 48 hours, you’ll hit Tahoe’s most iconic views without spreading yourself too thin. Perfect for couples seeking mountain romance or friends wanting maximum alpine vibes packed into one power weekend.
Day 1: South Shore Highlights
Morning: Start at Emerald Bay State Park before crowds arrive around 9 AM. The glacier-carved bay creates Tahoe’s most photographed vista with turquoise waters framed by granite cliffs. Walk down to Vikingsholm Castle, a 1929 Scandinavian mansion nestled at water level. The steep trail down takes about 15 minutes, but coming back up requires breaks for catching your breath.
Lunch: The Red Hut Cafe near South Lake Tahoe serves hearty American breakfast and lunch all day. Their hash browns and omelets fuel afternoon adventures with portions that actually satisfy mountain appetites.
Afternoon: Ride the Heavenly Gondola to 9,123 feet for views stretching across the entire basin. The 2.4-mile ride delivers observation decks, hiking trails, and a mountain coaster if you’re feeling adventurous. In winter, this becomes your ski access. In summer, the panoramic views alone justify the ticket price.
Evening: Drive to Sand Harbor on the North Shore for sunset. The granite boulders and clear water create postcard scenes as golden hour light paints the rocks orange and pink. Dinner at Lone Eagle Grille in Incline Village offers lakefront fine dining with locally-sourced ingredients.
Day 2: North Shore and Truckee
Morning: Breakfast at Fire Sign Cafe in Tahoe City delivers creative morning fare in a mountain lodge setting. Their salmon eggs Benedict and stuffed French toast earn fierce loyalty from locals. Explore the Tahoe City Marina and Commons Beach afterward for easy lakefront access.
Lunch: Drive to Truckee’s historic downtown for lunch. FiftyFifty Brewing Company serves craft beer and elevated pub food in a renovated railroad building. The pulled pork sandwich and seasonal brews pair perfectly after a morning by the lake.
Afternoon: Hike the Eagle Rock and Eagle Falls trail from Emerald Bay for moderate exercise with waterfall rewards. The 2-mile loop delivers Upper and Lower Eagle Falls views plus Tahoe overlooks. The trail stays manageable for most fitness levels while providing legitimate mountain experiences without the all-day commitment.
Evening: Final sunset from Kings Beach, Tahoe’s longest stretch of sand on the North Shore. Grab dinner at Pianeta in Truckee for authentic Italian cuisine before heading home. Toast your quick Tahoe escape with locally-brewed beer and mountain views.
Three days capture Tahoe’s range perfectly for first-time visitors or groups celebrating birthdays, bachelorette parties, or anniversaries. This itinerary balances outdoor activities with scenic relaxation without burning you out. You’ll experience the alpine character from beaches to peaks while still having time to actually relax at your rental.
Day 1: Emerald Bay and South Shore
Morning: Early start at Emerald Bay State Park for the iconic view everyone posts on Instagram. Hike down to Vikingsholm Castle for the 9:30 AM tour exploring the 38-room mansion’s Scandinavian architecture. The guided tour reveals 1920s craftsmanship and Lake Tahoe’s resort history. Afterward, kayak to Fannette Island if you brought gear or rented from nearby outfitters.
Afternoon: Drive to Taylor Creek Visitor Center for easy nature walks through meadows and forests. The Rainbow Trail and Stream Profile Chamber lets you watch fish underwater during the fall spawning season. This area stays family-friendly while delivering genuine alpine ecosystem education that’s actually interesting.
Lunch: Driftwood Cafe near Tahoe Keys serves waterfront casual dining with views. Their fish tacos and burgers satisfy without breaking budgets or taking forever to arrive.
Evening: Sunset from Nevada Beach, a quieter alternative to busier South Shore spots. The wide sandy beach rarely feels crowded, even on summer weekends. Dinner at Edgewood Restaurant delivers upscale mountain cuisine with floor-to-ceiling lake views. Their seasonal menu highlights local ingredients with creative preparations worthy of special occasions.
Day 2: Adventure Day
Morning: Book a morning kayak tour departing from Sand Harbor. The guided tours explain lake geology while paddling past granite formations and crystal-clear coves. The North Shore’s water clarity creates those unforgettable “I can see the bottom at 30 feet” moments. Tours run 2-3 hours, including instruction and all equipment.
Lunch: Pack a picnic for Sand Harbor Beach or grab lunch at Tunnel Creek Cafe in Incline Village. Their sandwiches and salads work perfectly for refueling between water activities.
Afternoon: Spend the afternoon at Sand Harbor Beach, consistently rated one of America’s best. The granite boulders, turquoise water, and mountain backdrop create the kind of paradise that makes you question why you ever go anywhere else. Rent paddleboards or simply relax on the sand with a book. The Shakespeare Festival performs here every summer evening in an outdoor amphitheater if you’re into that.
Evening: Drive to Tahoe City for sunset from Commons Beach. The west-facing views showcase the sun setting behind mountain peaks in a way that makes everyone pull out their phones. Dinner at Wolfdale’s Cuisine Unique serves Asian-fusion fine dining in an intimate setting. Their seasonal menu earns consistent awards from regional food critics who actually know what they’re talking about.
Day 3: Truckee and Donner
Morning: Breakfast at Squeeze In in Truckee delivers creative omelets in a funky atmosphere that feels properly mountain town. The “Racy Tracy” and other named omelets pack ingredient combinations you wouldn’t think to try but totally work. Explore Truckee’s historic downtown afterward, browsing local shops and galleries that actually sell unique stuff, not just tourist junk.
Afternoon: Visit Donner Memorial State Park to learn about the tragic 1846 pioneer expedition. The museum explains Western migration history, while the beach and trails provide recreation that doesn’t feel morbid despite the heavy history. The lake here offers quieter swimming than Tahoe proper, with warmer water temperatures.
Lunch: Moody’s Bistro Bar & Beats in Truckee serves elevated American cuisine with local ingredients. Their lunch menu balances quality with prices that won’t make you wince.
Evening: Return to your Tahoe rental for the final sunset from your deck or favorite discovered spot. Farewell dinner at Gar Woods Grill & Pier in Carnelian Bay for their famous Wet Woody cocktail and lakefront dining. The classic Tahoe atmosphere and views create the kind of endings that make you start planning your next trip before this one’s even over.
Best Homes to Stay for a 3-Day Lake Tahoe Weekend:
Four days lets you dig deeper into Tahoe’s outdoor options while hitting the cultural sites that give context to all that natural beauty. This works perfectly for families with kids or groups wanting both adventure and those lazy afternoons by the water. You’ll balance famous spots with local experiences that residents actually recommend when you ask where they go.
Day 1: South Shore Orientation
Morning: Take the Heavenly Gondola ride first thing before the midday crowds show up. The observation deck delivers 360-degree views that help you understand Tahoe’s geography and figure out where everything is. Hike the short trail to Tamarack Lodge or take the summer tubing lanes if traveling with kids who need to burn energy.
Lunch: Base Camp Pizza in South Lake Tahoe serves creative pies in a mountain lodge setting that nails the Tahoe vibe. Their outdoor patio provides prime people-watching and lake breezes that feel worth the price of admission alone.
Afternoon: Beach time at El Dorado Beach in South Lake Tahoe. The central location and facilities make it perfect for families who need actual bathrooms nearby. Rent kayaks, paddleboards, or beach chairs from the concessions. The shallow entry works well for younger swimmers who aren’t quite Michael Phelps yet.
Evening: Walk the Heavenly Village shops and restaurants for casual dining options. The pedestrian area features ice skating in winter and live music in summer, giving it that resort town energy. Dinner at Azul Latin Kitchen for creative Latin-fusion cuisine with craft cocktails that taste like vacation.
Day 2: Emerald Bay Deep Dive
Morning: Start early at Emerald Bay for the steep hike down to Vikingsholm before the heat really kicks in. Tour the castle, then continue on the trail to Lower Eagle Falls if your legs are game for it. The easy additional walk rewards with cascading water views that photograph beautifully. Budget 3-4 hours total for both attractions, including the brutal climb back up.
Lunch: Pack a picnic for Emerald Bay’s beach or drive to Camp Richardson Resort for their casual Beacon Bar & Grill. The lakefront location and simple menu work perfectly when you’re tired from morning hikes and just want food without fuss.
Afternoon: Rent bikes at Camp Richardson and ride the paved Tallac Trail along the shore. The flat path connects beaches and historic estates without making you feel like you’re training for the Tour de France. Stop at Tallac Historic Site to explore three grand estates from Tahoe’s resort era in the 1890s-1920s, when rich people summered here in style.
Evening: Sunset kayak tour from Tahoe Keys if you still have energy left, or simply relax at your rental with drinks on the deck. Dinner at Artemis Lakefront Cafe for Mediterranean cuisine right on the water. Their sunset views and Greek-influenced menu create those memorable evenings worth the splurge.
Day 3: North Shore Loop
Morning: Drive the scenic highway around the North Shore, stopping at viewpoints that make you pull over even when you’re trying to get somewhere. Visit Kings Beach for morning swimming or beach walking. The wide beach and mountain backdrop create those classic Tahoe postcard scenes.
Lunch: Lunch at Sunnyside Restaurant & Lodge on the West Shore. The historic lodge serves lakefront dining with mountain views that remind you why you came here in the first place. Their burgers and fish dishes satisfy without any pretentious nonsense.
Afternoon: Hike the Rubicon Trail from D.L. Bliss State Park toward Emerald Bay. The 4.5-mile one-way trail hugs the shoreline with constant lake views that make the effort worthwhile. Turn around at your preferred distance for moderate exercise with outstanding scenery. The trail stays relatively level despite the impressive views, making it accessible for most fitness levels.
Evening: Sunset from Speedboat Beach or Chimney Beach on the East Shore for local favorite spots that tourists often miss. Dinner back at Incline Village or return to your rental for a relaxed evening meal and early bed after all that hiking.
Day 4: Donner and Truckee
Morning: Leisurely breakfast at your rental or visit Coffee Bar in Truckee for excellent coffee and pastries that fuel the morning properly. Drive to Donner Lake for paddleboard rentals or beach time. The smaller lake offers calmer water and warmer temperatures than Tahoe, making it perfect for less confident swimmers.
Lunch: Cottonwood Restaurant & Bar in Truckee delivers California cuisine in a modern setting that feels both upscale and approachable. Their lunch menu features local ingredients with creative preparations that justify the prices.
Afternoon: Visit Donner Memorial State Park museum for pioneer history and Western migration stories that give context to those wagon ruts you see everywhere. The exhibits explain the tragic Donner Party expedition and California Trail history without being too gruesome for kids. Walk the nature trails afterward for peaceful forest time that cleanses the palate after heavy history.
Evening: Final Tahoe sunset from your preferred spot discovered over the past few days. Farewell dinner at Manzanita in Tahoe City for contemporary American cuisine with mountain elegance. Toast four days knowing you’ve experienced Tahoe beyond the Instagram highlights and tourist traps.
Five days reveal Tahoe beyond the postcards and give you time to understand why people choose to live here despite brutal winters and high costs. Perfect for families planning their annual vacation or couples wanting a thorough exploration without the rushed feeling that ruins trips. This pace lets you experience the full range from water sports to mountain peaks with built-in recovery time.
Day 1: Welcome to Tahoe
Morning: Arrive and settle into your rental without trying to cram activities into your first day. Quick orientation drive around South Shore to get your bearings and figure out where grocery stores are. Stop at a local market to stock the fridge with basics and breakfast supplies.
Lunch: Lucky Beaver Bar & Burger for a casual welcome meal. The creative burgers and mountain atmosphere set the vacation tone perfectly without overwhelming you on day one.
Afternoon: Easy first-day activities at Nevada Beach or Kiva Beach. The gentle introduction to Tahoe’s waters and views prepares you for the week ahead without exhausting you right out of the gate. Rent paddleboards if you’re eager to get on the water immediately, but nobody will judge if you just want to sit on the beach with a book.
Evening: Sunset from your rental deck or walk to nearby viewpoints to scout locations for later in the week. Casual dinner exploring your neighborhood’s restaurant options. Save the fancy meals for when you’re not still recovering from travel.
Day 2: South Shore Highlights
Morning: Heavenly Gondola ride for panoramic basin views that help you understand Tahoe’s scale. In summer, hike the summit trails or take the mountain coaster for those seeking thrills. In winter, this becomes your ski access for morning powder runs before the crowds arrive.
Lunch: Heidi’s Pancake House serves all-day breakfast and lunch in portions designed for people who’ve been hiking all morning. Their German pancakes and omelets satisfy mountain appetites created by high altitude and outdoor activity.
Afternoon: Explore Emerald Bay State Park thoroughly since you’re not rushing to fit it into a tight schedule. Take the Vikingsholm tour, hike to Eagle Falls, and kayak to Fannette Island if conditions allow and you’re feeling ambitious. Budget the whole afternoon for Tahoe’s most famous spot, since it deserves the time.
Evening: Dinner at The Bistro at Edgewood Tahoe for upscale lakefront dining. The seasonal menu and golf course views create that sophisticated mountain atmosphere that reminds you this isn’t just any lake vacation.
Day 3: Water Adventures
Morning: Book a morning sailing or kayak tour on Lake Tahoe. Multiple operators offer half-day excursions exploring hidden coves and shoreline features you’d never find on your own. The guided tours explain geology and ecology while delivering lake access that makes you feel like a local who knows secret spots.
Lunch: Your tour typically includes lunch, or grab food after returning to shore from whatever vendor smells best.
Afternoon: Relax at Sand Harbor Beach, recovering from morning activity and sunshine exposure. The clear water and granite formations create perfect swimming and sunbathing conditions when you need zero-effort entertainment. Rent snorkel gear to explore the underwater rocks and pretend you’re swimming in the Caribbean.
Evening: Sunset cruise from Zephyr Cove aboard the M.S. Dixie II paddlewheeler. The historic boat delivers dinner cruises with live music and Emerald Bay views as evening light transforms the lake’s blue waters to gold and pink. It’s touristy but actually good touristy.
Day 4: Tahoe Rim Trail
Morning: Tackle a section of the famous Tahoe Rim Trail. The Mount Rose section delivers wildflower meadows and panoramic views that make the huffing and puffing worthwhile. Choose your distance based on fitness levels and how much you like your knees. Even short hikes on this 165-mile trail reward with outstanding scenery that humbles you with nature’s scale.
Lunch: Pack a trail lunch with views, or grab food after hiking in Incline Village from whatever place doesn’t have a wait.
Afternoon: Recover at your rental pool or visit a quieter beach for low-key afternoon activities. The hiking payoff comes from that relaxed afternoon when you appreciate sore muscles and mountain views from a horizontal position with a cold drink.
Evening: Dinner at Lone Eagle Grille for lakefront fine dining. Their sunset views from the Hyatt’s private beach create a romantic atmosphere with a locally-sourced seasonal menu that actually tastes as good as it sounds on paper.
Day 5: Truckee and Donner
Morning: Breakfast at Squeeze In before driving to Truckee. Explore the historic downtown’s shops, galleries, and railroad heritage that preserves the actual Old West character instead of the fake movie set version. The architecture and vibe feel authentically mountain town in a way that’s increasingly rare.
Lunch: FiftyFifty Brewing Company for award-winning craft beer and elevated pub food. The brewery frequently wins national medals for its brews, which taste even better at altitude after morning exploring.
Afternoon: Visit Donner Memorial State Park and museum. The exhibits explain the tragic 1846 Donner Party expedition that got trapped by early Sierra snowstorms in a way that’s sobering but not gratuitous. The history contrasts with the beautiful lake and forest setting, creating a perspective on how different modern mountain travel is.
Evening: Final Tahoe sunset from your favorite discovered spot over the past few days. Farewell dinner at Gar Woods or Sunnyside Lodge, both classic Tahoe restaurants that locals and visitors equally appreciate for good reason beyond just convenience.
Best Homes to Stay for a 5-Day Lake Tahoe Adventure:
A full week lets you settle into Tahoe’s rhythm instead of just visiting it. This itinerary works for remote workers extending their stay, extended families needing space and flexibility, or anyone wanting complete immersion in mountain life. You’ll have time to revisit favorite spots, establish morning coffee routines, and venture to surrounding areas without feeling rushed.
Days 1-5: Follow the 5-Day Itinerary
Start with the comprehensive five-day plan covering South Shore, North Shore, and Truckee. This foundation ensures you experience Tahoe’s essential character before exploring the deeper cuts that make locals fall in love with living here.
Day 6: Desolation Wilderness
Morning: Early start for a full-day hike into Desolation Wilderness. The Echo Lakes trailhead accesses this protected backcountry area filled with alpine lakes and granite peaks that look like movie sets. Choose from multiple trails based on fitness and how much you enjoy suffering uphill. Even shorter hikes deliver wilderness experiences without the overnight camping commitment.
Lunch: Pack a substantial trail lunch since the backcountry doesn’t have food trucks or restaurants conveniently located every mile. The self-sufficiency requirement is part of the experience.
Afternoon: Continue hiking or return to your vehicle for afternoon relaxation, depending on how your legs are holding up. The Desolation Wilderness lives up to its name with rugged beauty and minimal development that reminds you what the Sierra Nevada looked like before ski resorts. Permits are required for overnight stays but not day hikes.
Evening: After the long hiking day, a casual dinner near your rental or a simple takeout, because your legs will appreciate avoiding additional walking. Relax on the deck watching stars emerge over the lake in a way that makes you understand why people move here despite the challenges.
Day 7: Choose Your Adventure
Morning: By day seven, you know your Tahoe preferences better than any guidebook can predict. Choose from skiing at another resort in winter, revisiting your favorite beach in summer, or exploring a new trail you heard about from locals at breakfast. The freedom to follow your interests creates those perfect vacation endings.
Lunch: Return to your favorite restaurant discovered during the week, whether that’s the hole-in-the-wall taco place or the lakefront spot with the view.
Afternoon: Final activities at your preferred spots. Maybe it’s one more paddle on that glassy morning water, another gondola ride for photos in better light, or shopping in Tahoe City for souvenirs and local art that’s actually worth bringing home.
Evening: Sunset from your absolute favorite viewpoint. Splurge on a farewell dinner at The Edge at Edgewood Tahoe or Wolfdale’s if you saved budget for a final big meal. Toast seven days knowing you’ve experienced the alpine lake beyond typical tourism in a way that makes you start planning your return trip.
Best Homes to Stay for a 7-Day Lake Tahoe Experience:
Ten days transform Tahoe from a destination into a temporary home where you establish routines and favorite spots. This extended stay suits digital nomads who can work remotely, sabbatical travelers escaping normal life, or anyone craving complete mountain immersion. You’ll discover local secrets, venture throughout the Sierra Nevada, and explore the region in a way that changes how you think about vacation.
Days 1-7: Follow the 7-Day Itinerary
Complete the week-long plan, ensuring comprehensive Tahoe coverage from beaches to wilderness. By day seven, you’ll know which coffee shop makes the best lattes and which beaches stay sunny longest.
Day 8: Squaw Valley and Olympic Valley
Morning: Drive to Olympic Valley to explore Palisades Tahoe, the resort formerly known as Squaw Valley, until the name change. Ride the aerial tram to High Camp for hiking, swimming in the heated pool, and mountain views that make the ticket price seem reasonable. The 1960 Winter Olympics venue maintains world-class facilities year-round with activities beyond just skiing.
Lunch: High Camp offers restaurants with views that make mediocre food taste better, or descend for lunch at one of the base village eateries if you’re picky. The valley atmosphere differs from lakeside Tahoe in a way that provides welcome variety.
Afternoon: Hike the valley trails or visit the Olympic Museum showcasing the 1960 Winter Games history through photos and artifacts that bring the past alive. Mountain bike trails attract enthusiasts throughout summer and fall with enough variety for different skill levels.
Evening: Return to your Tahoe rental for familiar comforts after exploring new territory. Simple dinner because you’ve been going hard for over a week, and sometimes pizza in your pajamas is the right call.
Day 9: South Shore Deep Cuts
Morning: Explore South Shore areas you haven’t visited yet or glossed over earlier. Try Taylor Creek’s Stream Profile Chamber for underwater fish viewing through glass windows that let you watch trout and salmon without getting wet. The facility is surprisingly cool, even for people who think nature centers sound boring.
Afternoon: Visit the Tallac Historic Site thoroughly, touring all three estates and gardens instead of just driving past. The preserved mansions reveal Tahoe’s resort history from the 1890s to the 1920s, when wealthy families built summer compounds that make today’s vacation homes look modest.
Lunch: Camp Richardson’s Beacon Bar & Grill for classic lakeside casual dining that locals actually frequent instead of just recommending to tourists.
Evening: Attend a live music event at one of South Shore’s venues if anything good is playing. Check local listings for concerts at Harveys or Hard Rock Casino. The entertainment scene offers quality shows that go beyond the casino buffet stereotype.
Day 10: Reflections and Farewells
Morning: Return to your absolute favorite breakfast spot discovered during the ten days, whether that’s the place with the best pancakes or the cafe with the perfect lake view. Final morning at the beach, soaking in the mountain lake atmosphere that you’ve grown to understand on a deeper level than any weekend trip could provide.
Lunch: Last Tahoe meal at your preferred restaurant. You’ve earned strong opinions about the area’s food scene and can now authoritatively argue about which place has the best fish tacos.
Afternoon: Final souvenir shopping or simply sitting at your rental’s deck reflecting on ten days. The mountain views that initially amazed now feel familiar and comforting in a way that makes leaving genuinely difficult.
Evening: Sunset from Emerald Bay or your personal favorite spot that nobody put in any guidebook. Toast ten days knowing you’ve truly experienced the Sierra Nevada beyond tourism statistics and Instagram photos. The alpine lake that seemed overwhelming on day one now feels like a place you could return to forever, and probably will.
Best Homes to Stay for a 10-Day Lake Tahoe Immersion:
If you have extra time or are looking for other things to do in Lake Tahoe, consider exploring these places to make your trip even more memorable.
Day Trips Beyond Lake Tahoe
Reno: Less than an hour away, Reno offers an urban contrast to Tahoe’s nature-focused vibe. The city features casinos if gambling is your thing, museums if culture calls, and the Truckee River whitewater course for kayaking through downtown. The National Automobile Museum houses an impressive classic car collection that car enthusiasts could spend hours exploring.
Yosemite National Park: Three hours southwest, Yosemite delivers world-famous granite cliffs and waterfalls that make Tahoe’s scenery look modest by comparison. Half Dome and El Capitan create iconic vistas photographed by millions. The drive through the Sierra Nevada is rewarded with mountain scenery even before you arrive at the park entrance.
Nevada Historic Towns: Virginia City and Carson City preserve Old West history in a way that feels authentic instead of theme park fake. The former silver mining boomtown maintains 1800s architecture and offers mine tours where you descend into actual shafts instead of sanitized tourist versions.
Hidden Tahoe Gems
Vikingsholm Castle: Beyond just viewing from the overlook above, the guided tours reveal 1920s craftsmanship and Scandinavian architectural details you can’t appreciate from a distance. The steep hike down rewards with intimate access to Tahoe’s most elaborate historic estate and stories about the eccentric woman who built it.
Taylor Creek Stream Profile Chamber: This unique facility lets you view underwater fish activity through glass windows in a way that beats regular aquariums. During the fall spawning season, watch kokanee salmon swim upstream in their natural habitat, doing their ancient dance of reproduction and death.
Thunderbird Lodge: This 1930s estate on the East Shore requires boat access or advance tour reservations, keeping crowds manageable. The stone castle and grounds preserve Tahoe’s historic resort era with original furnishings and enough intrigue to justify the access hassle.
Not sure where to stay? Check out our curated lists of top Airbnbs in Lake Tahoe for neighborhood-specific recommendations.
Getting Around Lake Tahoe
Lake Tahoe’s 72-mile shoreline and surrounding mountain communities spread across terrain that makes transportation planning essential. Most visitors drive because public transit barely exists, and distances between spots add up quickly. Understanding your options helps maximize outdoor time while minimizing the frustration of wrong turns on mountain roads.
Rental Car: Most Tahoe visitors drive, and honestly, you’ll want a car here. The region’s spread-out nature makes cars almost essential for reaching trailheads, different beaches, and restaurants worth visiting. Reserve vehicles well ahead during peak seasons when rental car shortages become real problems. Snow tires or chains are legally required in winter conditions, and the California Highway Patrol doesn’t mess around with enforcement.
Tahoe Transportation District (TTT): Free or low-cost buses connect South Shore communities and major attractions during limited hours. The system works okay for beach hopping in summer without parking hassles. However, limited schedules restrict flexibility for early morning hikers or people who want to eat dinner past 7 PM.
Uber and Lyft: Rideshare operates in populated areas, but availability varies wildly by location and time. South Shore and Tahoe City have decent service most days. Rural areas and late nights pose challenges that leave you stranded more often than you’d expect. Prices surge during peak periods in ways that make taxis look cheap.
Biking: Many areas feature bike paths and relatively flat shoreline routes that make cycling pleasant. The Pope-Baldwin and Truckee River trails deliver car-free recreation through pretty scenery. However, steep mountain grades and narrow shoulders make biking genuinely dangerous in many areas where cars fly past inches from your handlebars.
Boat: During summer, water taxis connect some North Shore locations if you’re feeling adventurous. Private boat rentals let you explore the lake independently like a local. However, boats don’t solve the basic transportation puzzle for getting to restaurants, trailheads, or your rental from the airport.
Where to Stay in Lake Tahoe
Choosing the right home base shapes your entire Tahoe experience in ways that matter more than any guidebook admits. AvantStay offers premium vacation rentals across the basin’s best locations with the space and privacy of a home but hotel-level service that actually responds when you need something.
Why Choose AvantStay
Unlike traditional vacation rentals, where you’re gambling on whether photos match reality, AvantStay properties maintain consistent quality standards across all locations. Every home features thoughtful design, modern amenities, and professional management that make your stay comfortable instead of an adventure in problem-solving.
Our Lake Tahoe homes span from lakefront luxury to mountain retreats tucked in the pines. Whether you want South Shore’s casino action and nightlife or North Shore’s quiet beaches and family vibes, we’ve got the perfect base for whatever Tahoe experience you’re seeking.
Concierge Services and Upgrades
AvantStay’s personal concierge service elevates your vacation beyond just having a place to sleep. We handle details so you can focus on experiencing Tahoe’s mountain magic instead of dealing with logistics that drain vacation energy.
Mid-Stay Cleaning: General Cleaning: Refresh your space! Our professional team will tidy the home and wipe down main surfaces.
Bring Your Pets: AvantStay encourages time spent with loved ones, and pets are no exception! We just ask that your dog is housebroken and respectful of our property and neighbors.
Private Chef: Elevate your dining experience with unique culinary creations, right at your dinner table.
Stocked Fridge: Leave the grocery shopping to us! Send us your list or select from our packages like BBQ night, S’mores, and Salty Snacks.
Transportation: Need a ride? Let us handle your transportation throughout your stay.
Find Local Child Care: Find & hire local sitters with detailed profiles, references & reviews, direct messaging, and background checks.
In-Home Massage: Indulge in the ultimate relaxation experience with our professional massage services in your AvantStay home.
Rent Baby Gear: Traveling with a baby? Rent all the equipment you need for your getaway, including cribs, strollers, car seats, toys, and more.
And many more.
Book Through the AvantStay App
Download the AvantStay app to browse properties, manage bookings, and access concierge services all in one place. The app provides 24/7 support, check-in details, local recommendations, and direct messaging with our team when you need help.
Before you dive into crystal-clear waters and explore mountain peaks, a little preparation goes a long way. These essential travel tips help you feel at ease while having the best Tahoe experience instead of learning lessons the hard way.
Getting To and From Lake Tahoe
Reno-Tahoe International Airport (RNO): The closest major airport is 45 minutes from North Shore and 75 minutes from South Shore. Most visitors fly here and rent cars for the scenic drive through the high desert to the lake. The airport is small and easy to navigate, which beats dealing with San Francisco or Sacramento crowds.
Sacramento International Airport (SMF): Two hours from South Shore, Sacramento offers more flight options than Reno, including cheaper fares on budget airlines. The drive crosses the Sierra Nevada on Highway 50, delivering mountain scenery that serves as your introduction to Tahoe’s grandeur.
San Francisco Bay Area: Three to four hours driving from San Francisco or San Jose, depending on traffic and how many times you stop for photos. Most Bay Area visitors drive their own vehicles, making weekend trips practical without the hassle of rental car returns.
Airport Transportation: Rental cars are strongly recommended and honestly not optional unless you’re staying at one specific beach and never leaving. Public transit and rideshare options from airports to Tahoe remain limited and expensive enough to make rental cars look reasonable. Reserve vehicles well ahead during peak seasons when rental shortages become genuine problems.
Packing for Lake Tahoe
Year-Round Essentials: Sunscreen because high elevation means UV rays that burn you faster than you expect, layered clothing since temperatures swing dramatically between sun and shade, reusable water bottles for staying hydrated at altitude, and comfortable hiking shoes with actual ankle support. Casual dress prevails even at nicer restaurants, so leave the fancy outfits at home.
Winter (December-March): Pack ski gear or plan to rent locally. Warm layers, waterproof outerwear, and snow boots are essential even if you’re not skiing because walking from parking lots to restaurants in the snow is still a thing. Car snow chains are legally required, and you’ll get turned back at checkpoints without them. The high-altitude sun remains intense despite cold temperatures, so sunscreen isn’t just for summer.
Summer (June-September): Swimsuits in multiples because wetsuits take forever to dry at this elevation, sun protection that you’ll need to reapply constantly, hiking gear for trails you’ll definitely want to explore, and light layers for evening cooling. Temperatures range 70s to the 80s during the day but drop to the 40s to the 50s at night in that shocking mountain way. Afternoon thunderstorms appear occasionally in July and August, so rain gear helps.
Spring/Fall (April-May, October-November): Shoulder seasons require packing flexibility because the weather is genuinely unpredictable. Pack layers for temperatures ranging from 30s to 70s within the same day. Rain gear helps with spring showers that appear without warning. These periods offer the best balance of good weather, smaller crowds, and lower prices if you can handle temperature uncertainty.
Practical Lake Tahoe Preparation
Altitude Adjustment: At 6,224 feet, some visitors experience altitude symptoms, including headaches, shortness of breath, and fatigue that feels worse than any hangover. Drink extra water beyond what seems necessary, limit alcohol initially because it hits harder at altitude, and take it easy the first day instead of immediately hiking 10 miles. Most people adjust within 24-48 hours if they’re smart about it.
Costs: Tahoe is expensive in ways that shock people who think California is already pricey. Expect $15-30 for casual meals, $40-80 for nice dinners, $8-12 for beers, and $12-16 for cocktails that are mostly ice. Lift tickets cost $150-200 during peak season, making ski trips genuinely expensive family vacations. Budget accordingly and don’t assume credit cards solve everything.
Reservations: Book popular restaurants days or weeks ahead, especially for lakefront dining with sunset views that everyone wants. Summer beach parking fills early at spots like Sand Harbor and Emerald Bay, where arriving before 9 AM becomes necessary for parking within walking distance. Winter ski rentals and lessons book up fast during the holidays when everyone has the same vacation week.
Weather Unpredictability: Mountain weather changes faster than you can drive between locations. Pack layers and rain gear regardless of forecasts that promise sunshine all week. Afternoon thunderstorms appear with little warning in summer, complete with lightning that makes you question your life choices on exposed ridges. Snow can fall any month, though June-September rarely see it stick.
Lake Safety: The lake remains cold year-round, averaging 68°F at the surface even in peak summer. Hypothermia risks exist even in July for people who think they’re tougher than physics. Wear life jackets when boating or paddling because drowning in cold water happens faster than in warm water. Sudden afternoon winds create dangerous conditions for small watercraft, turning pleasant paddles into genuine emergencies.
Bear Awareness: Black bears inhabit the area and will trash your car for a granola bar wrapper. Never leave food in vehicles at trailheads where bears have learned to break windows like professionals. Store all scented items, including toiletries, in the provided bear boxes at campgrounds. Bears rarely threaten humans directly, but they will absolutely damage your rental car, leaving you with insurance headaches.
More Questions About Your Lake Tahoe Trip?
Planning a Sierra Nevada adventure involves countless details, and we’re here to help instead of leaving you to figure everything out alone. Whether you need recommendations for family-friendly properties, locations near specific ski resorts, or homes with hot tubs for après-ski recovery, our team can answer questions and guide your booking process.
Contact us via:
Email: experience@avantstay.com
Phone: (833) 442-8268
Experience the Sierra Nevada Adventure
Crystal waters stretching to mountain peaks, pine-scented air filling your lungs, that first run down fresh powder that makes you forget work exists.
The sunrise alpenglow painting granite pink and orange, paddling glassy water at dawn when the lake looks like a mirror, watching stars emerge over the alpine lake from your deck with a drink in hand.
Tahoe works for skiers seeking powder, hikers chasing views, water enthusiasts who live for summer, and anyone seeking mountain paradise without leaving the United States or dealing with international travel hassles.
The Conch Republic isn’t just a nickname here. Key West floats at America’s southernmost point where the Atlantic meets the Gulf, historic Conch houses line narrow streets, and roosters roam freely like they own the place.
This 2×4-mile island built its reputation on shipwreck salvaging and literary legends while evolving into a laid-back beach destination that surprises even frequent Florida visitors.
From Mallory Square’s nightly sunset celebration to the Hemingway Home’s six-toed cats, the island offers adventures without ever feeling overwhelming.
If you’re snorkeling the coral reefs, bar-hopping down Duval Street, or simply watching Key West’s quirky characters pass by, this Florida Key delivers tropical paradise at an easy pace.
This guide breaks down the perfect Key West itinerary, whether for a quick weekend escape or a full week exploring the southernmost city.
Planning your trip? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Key West for ideal weather and events before building your itinerary.
2 Days in Key West: 48 Hours Island Sprint
This fast-paced itinerary works for travelers driving through the Florida Keys or Miami visitors extending their trip. You’ll experience Key West’s most iconic moments without spreading yourself thin. Perfect for couples seeking romance or groups wanting maximum tropical vibes packed into one power weekend.
Day 1: Old Town and Duval Street
Morning: Start at the Southernmost Point buoy for photos marking just 90 miles to Cuba. Walk to the Hemingway Home and Museum for tours starting at 9 AM. The author’s former residence features six-toed cats, descendants of his original pets. The Spanish Colonial house and lush gardens capture old Key West character.
Lunch: Blue Heaven on Thomas Street serves Caribbean-inspired cuisine in a funky outdoor garden setting. Their shrimp and grits and lobster Benedict earn raves. Chickens and roosters wander the property freely.
Afternoon: Walk Duval Street exploring its mile of bars, shops, and galleries. Stop at the Key West Butterfly and Nature Conservatory for a climate-controlled butterfly habitat. Browse local galleries and grab Key lime pie at Kermit’s Key West Key Lime Shoppe. The tart-sweet pie represents authentic Florida Keys flavor.
Evening: Head to Mallory Square by 5:30 PM for the nightly sunset celebration. Street performers, artists, and crowds gather watching the sun sink into the Gulf. Dinner at Latitudes on Sunset Key requires a quick boat ride from the Westin dock. The island restaurant delivers upscale seafood with water views. Return to Duval for nightlife at Sloppy Joe’s or the Green Parrot.
Day 2: Water Adventures and History
Morning: Book a morning snorkel tour to the coral reefs. Multiple operators depart from the Historic Seaport, taking you to protected waters teeming with tropical fish and coral formations. The clear water and marine life create unforgettable underwater scenes. Tours typically run 3-4 hours, including equipment and instruction.
Lunch: Half Shell Raw Bar at the Historic Seaport serves fresh seafood in a casual waterfront setting. Their conch fritters and peel-and-eat shrimp represent classic Keys dining.
Afternoon: Visit Fort Zachary Taylor State Park for beach time and snorkeling right off the shore. The fort’s Civil War history interests history buffs, while the beach attracts swimmers and sunbathers. The underwater reef here rivals tour spots without the boat ride.
Evening: Final sunset from Smathers Beach, Key West’s longest stretch of sand. Dinner at Santiago’s Bodega for Spanish tapas, or El Meson de Pepe for Cuban cuisine. Toast your quick Key West escape with a mojito or rum runner.
Three days capture Key West’s essence perfectly for first-time visitors or groups celebrating special occasions. This itinerary balances water activities with cultural experiences, making it ideal for bachelorette parties, anniversaries, or friend reunions. You’ll experience the island’s unique character from historic sites to beach bars.
Day 1: Historic Key West
Morning: Breakfast at The Cafe for creative morning fare in a funky outdoor space. Tour the Harry S. Truman Little White House, where the president spent 175 days during his term. The guided tours reveal 1940s White House operations and Truman’s relaxed Key West visits.
Afternoon: Walk through the Key West Cemetery, where above-ground tombs and humorous epitaphs create quirky character. One famous marker reads “I Told You I Was Sick.” Continue to Fort East Martello Museum and Gardens, housing Robert the Doll, supposedly haunted. The Civil War fort’s towers provide elevated island views.
Lunch: Cuban Coffee Queen food truck serves authentic Cuban sandwiches and strong espresso. Multiple locations make it convenient for on-the-go eating.
Evening: Sunset from Mallory Square with street performers and artists. Dinner at Seven Fish, a tiny restaurant serving outstanding seafood with Asian influences. Their fish specials change daily based on fresh catches. Reservations are essential for this local favorite. End at Duval Street bars sampling Key West’s famous nightlife.
Day 2: Water World
Morning: Full-day sailing and snorkeling catamaran tour to the reef. These popular excursions include breakfast, lunch, unlimited drinks, and all snorkel gear. The calm morning seas make for comfortable sailing. Swimming with tropical fish and exploring coral formations creates highlight memories.
Afternoon: Your tour returns mid-afternoon. Relax at your rental’s pool or walk to the nearby beaches in Key West. The full day on the water delivers plenty of sun exposure and activity without additional planning.
Evening: Casual dinner at Garbo’s Grill food truck on Caroline Street. This tiny spot serves fish tacos and Cuban-Korean fusion dishes, earning a cult following. Simple picnic tables and friendly service capture Key West’s laid-back vibe. Walk Duval Street afterward for live music venues.
Day 3: Island Exploring
Morning: Rent bikes or scooters and explore the island independently. Key West’s compact 2×4-mile size makes biking perfect for getting around. Ride through residential neighborhoods, admiring Conch houses with their pastel colors and gingerbread trim. Stop at Higgs Beach for swimming.
Lunch: Grab lunch at B.O.’s Fish Wagon, another food truck institution serving grouper sandwiches and conch fritters since 1980.
Afternoon: Visit the Key West Aquarium, seeing local marine life including sharks, stingrays, and sea turtles. The touch tanks let you interact with sea creatures. Continue to the Shipwreck Museum, learning about Key West’s salvaging history through interactive exhibits and costumed guides.
Evening: Final sunset from Mallory Square, if you can’t get enough, or try Sunset Pier for bar atmosphere. Farewell dinner at Hot Tin Roof at Ocean Key Resort for waterfront fine dining. The rooftop views and fresh seafood menu suit celebration dinners. Toast three days in the Conch Republic.
Four days lets you dig deeper into Key West’s water activities while hitting cultural sites. This works perfectly for families with kids or groups wanting both adventure and beach relaxation. You’ll balance famous spots with local experiences that residents actually know.
Day 1: Downtown Deep Dive
Morning: Start at Blue Heaven for brunch in their famous garden setting. The fresh fruit pancakes and eggs Benedict fuel exploration. Walk to the Hemingway Home for morning tours before the heat intensifies. The house and gardens reveal the author’s Key West life from 1931-1939.
Afternoon: Explore Duval Street’s shops, galleries, and bars. Stop at the Key West Aloe factory store for locally-made skin products. Visit the Custom House Museum showcasing local art and history in a beautifully restored 1891 building.
Lunch: El Siboney serves authentic Cuban food in a no-frills setting off the tourist path. Their ropa vieja and moros y cristianos represent real Cuban home cooking.
Evening: Sunset sailboat cruise with Danger Charters or Fury Water Adventures. The two-hour sail includes champagne and snacks while watching the sunset from the water. Dinner afterward at Latitudes, requiring the Sunset Key ferry, or try the Cafe Sole for French-Caribbean fusion in an intimate setting.
Day 2: Reef and Beach Day
Morning: Book a morning dive or snorkel trip to Looe Key Reef, considered one of America’s best coral reefs. The pristine reef 7 miles offshore teems with tropical fish, sea turtles, and occasional dolphins. Dive shops offer both scuba and snorkel options for all experience levels.
Lunch: Pack lunch for the boat or grab food after returning to shore.
Afternoon: Spend the afternoon at Fort Zachary Taylor State Park. The beach here combines calm swimming with excellent snorkeling right off the sand. The Civil War fort provides historical interest when you need a beach break. Rent chairs and umbrellas or bring your own gear.
Evening: Dinner at Louie’s Backyard for upscale island dining on the water. The oceanfront deck and fresh seafood attract both tourists and locals celebrating special occasions. Their Key lime pie is legendary. End with drinks at the Green Parrot, Key West’s oldest bar with live music nightly.
Day 3: Day Trip to Dry Tortugas
Morning: Early ferry departure (typically 8 AM) to Dry Tortugas National Park. The 70-mile journey west takes 2.5 hours aboard a high-speed catamaran. The remote park encompasses Fort Jefferson, pristine beaches, and incredible snorkeling. The Civil War fort rises dramatically from the turquoise water.
Afternoon: Explore the fort’s hexagonal walls and chambers, snorkel the moat and nearby reefs, or simply relax on the beach. The park’s isolation means crystal-clear water and abundant marine life. Tours include breakfast, lunch, and all snorkel gear. The narrated boat ride provides Key’s history and marine life explanations.
Evening: Return to Key West around 5:30 PM, exhausted but amazed. A simple dinner near your rental or delivery lets you recover from the full day. The Dry Tortugas trip ranks as most visitors’ highlight despite requiring a full-day commitment.
Day 4: Local Life
Morning: Sleep in after yesterday’s early start. Leisurely breakfast at Harpoon Harry’s for waterfront casual dining. Rent kayaks or paddleboards, exploring the mangroves and backcountry waters. Several outfitters offer guided eco-tours explaining the ecosystem’s importance.
Lunch: Stock Island’s Matt’s Stock Island Kitchen serves creative New American cuisine at the Marina. The mahi-mahi and Key West pink shrimp showcase local seafood.
Afternoon: Visit the Key West Tropical Forest & Botanical Garden for native plants and butterflies in a quiet natural setting. Or tour the Key West Lighthouse, climbing 88 steps for panoramic island views. The keeper’s quarters museum explains lighthouse history.
Evening: Final sunset at Mallory Square, joining locals and tourists for the nightly ritual. Farewell dinner at Michaels Restaurant for an upscale American steakhouse, or Salute! on the Beach for Italian cuisine with sand-in-your-toes dining. Toast four days knowing you’ve experienced Key West beyond the Duval Street party scene.
5 Days in Key West: The Complete First-Timer’s Journey
Five days reveal Key West beyond the postcards and give time to appreciate why people move here for the lifestyle. Perfect for families planning vacations or couples wanting a thorough exploration without rushing. This pace lets you experience the island’s full range from water sports to lazy beach afternoons.
Day 1: Island Orientation
Morning: Conch Tour Train or Old Town Trolley provides narrated tours explaining Key West history and pointing out major sites. The 90-minute tours offer hop-on-hop-off convenience, making them perfect orientation tools. Learn about wreckers, Hemingway, and the Conch Republic’s quirky independence.
Lunch: Stop at DJ’s Clam Shack in the Historic Seaport for clam chowder and seafood baskets in a waterfront setting.
Afternoon: Walk Duval Street end-to-end, exploring its full mile. Browse galleries showing local artists’ work, including tropical paintings and photography. Stop at Fast Buck Freddie’s for Key West souvenirs and gifts. The historic building houses quirky merchandise across multiple themed rooms.
Evening: Sunset from Mallory Square, experiencing the nightly celebration. Dinner at Pier House Resort’s Chart Room Bar for casual waterfront dining, or Bagatelle for romantic fine dining in a Victorian house. End with a ghost tour learning about Key West’s haunted history and colorful characters.
Day 2: Hemingway and History
Morning: Start at the Hemingway Home before crowds arrive. The guided tours run continuously throughout the day, but mornings offer cooler temperatures and smaller groups. The house, writing studio, and gardens capture 1930s Key West when the author lived and worked here.
Lunch: Thirsty Mermaid on Caroline Street serves tacos and fresh seafood in a funky outdoor space with swings at the bar.
Afternoon: Visit the Harry S. Truman Little White House, learning about the president’s Key West retreats. The preserved 1890 home shows how Truman conducted government business while vacationing. Continue to the Custom House Museum for rotating art exhibitions and local history displays.
Evening: Dinner at Azur Restaurant for Mediterranean-inspired cuisine in an elegant setting. Their fresh fish and creative preparations earn consistent praise. End at Sunset Pier for drinks with live music and water views.
Day 3: Water Adventures
Morning: Book a full-day sailing and snorkel catamaran to the reef. Multiple companies offer similar trips, including Fury, Sebago, and Danger Charters. The tours provide breakfast, lunch, unlimited drinks, and all equipment. Swimming with tropical fish and exploring coral formations creates unforgettable experiences.
Afternoon: Your tour returns mid-afternoon. Relax poolside or at the beach, letting the sun and rum drinks wear off. The full day on the water delivers plenty of activity and exposure.
Evening: Casual dinner at Pepe’s Cafe, Key West’s oldest restaurant since 1909. Their steaks and seafood in a historic setting attract locals and visitors. The outdoor garden and indoor dining rooms maintain an old Key West atmosphere. Walk off dinner, strolling residential streets, admiring Conch architecture.
Day 4: Dry Tortugas Expedition
Morning: Early departure for Dry Tortugas National Park aboard Yankee Freedom ferry. The 2.5-hour journey west reaches this remote park accessible only by boat or seaplane. The massive Fort Jefferson rises from turquoise water, creating dramatic views. The hexagonal fort covers 16 acres on Garden Key.
Afternoon: Explore the fort’s dark passageways and gun emplacements, snorkel the moat and nearby reefs teeming with fish, or relax on the pristine beach. The park’s isolation, 70 miles from Key West, means crystal-clear water and minimal crowds. Tours include breakfast, lunch, and snorkel gear.
Evening: Return to Key West around 5:30 PM. Simple dinner and early bed after the long day. The Dry Tortugas trip requires a full-day commitment but delivers once-in-a-lifetime experiences.
Day 5: Beach and Chill
Morning: Sleep in after yesterday’s adventure. Brunch at Banana Cafe for French crepes and Key West atmosphere. Spend the morning at Smathers Beach, the island’s longest stretch of sand. Rent jet skis, paddleboards, or beach chairs. The wide beach rarely feels crowded.
Lunch: Picnic on the beach with takeout from nearby restaurants or food trucks.
Afternoon: Kayak tour through the mangroves with Blue Planet Kayak or similar outfitter. The guided eco-tours explain the ecosystem while paddling through narrow channels. Wildlife sightings might include herons, ibis, and occasional sharks in shallow water.
Evening: Final sunset at Mallory Square or from your favorite discovered spot. Farewell dinner at Cafe Marquesa for upscale New American cuisine in an intimate setting. The seasonal menu highlights local ingredients with creative preparations. Toast five days knowing you’ve experienced Key West comprehensively.
Best Homes to Stay for a 5-Day Key West Adventure:
A full week lets you settle into Key West’s rhythm, discovering why artists and escapists choose this tiny island despite hurricane risks and high costs. This itinerary works for remote workers, extended families, or water enthusiasts wanting complete immersion. You’ll have time to revisit favorite spots and venture to other Keys.
Days 1-5: Follow the 5-Day Itinerary
Start with the comprehensive five-day plan covering history, water adventures, and beaches. This foundation ensures you experience Key West’s essential character before exploring deeper.
Day 6: Keys Road Trip
Morning: Drive north through the Florida Keys on Overseas Highway (US 1). Stop at Bahia Honda State Park (Mile Marker 37) for stunning beaches and the old Bahia Honda Rail Bridge ruins. The park’s Sandspur Beach ranks among Florida’s best with turquoise water and soft sand.
Lunch: Grab lunch at No Name Pub on Big Pine Key. This dive bar serves pizza and burgers in an authentic Keys atmosphere that locals love.
Afternoon: Continue to John Pennekamp Coral Reef State Park in Key Largo (Mile Marker 102). The first underwater park in the US offers glass-bottom boat tours, snorkeling, and diving. The Christ of the Abyss underwater statue creates unique photo opportunities. Return south, stopping at various Mile Markers, exploring small Keys communities.
Evening: Back in Key West, dinner at Tavern N Town for upscale casual dining off Duval Street. The neighborhood restaurant serves creative American fare that locals frequent regularly.
Day 7: Your Choice Day
Morning: Sleep in, enjoying a leisurely breakfast at a favorite spot discovered during the week. Final morning activity at your preferred beach or attraction. Maybe it’s one more snorkel trip, paddleboard rental, or simply beach lounging with a book.
Afternoon: Last-minute shopping for Key lime products, rum, and local art. The Truman Annex neighborhood offers quieter browsing than Duval Street. Or bike residential streets photographing colorful Conch houses and roosters.
Lunch: Final meal at Blue Heaven, B.O.’s Fish Wagon, or your personal favorite.
Evening: Sunset from Mallory Square one last time, appreciating the nightly ritual. Splurge on a farewell dinner at Latitudes on Sunset Key or Cafe Marquesa. Toast seven days knowing you’ve experienced the Conch Republic beyond tourism. End with drinks at the Green Parrot or wherever live music calls you.
Best Homes to Stay for a 7-Day Key West Experience:
Ten days transform Key West from a destination to a temporary home. This extended stay suits digital nomads, sabbatical travelers, or anyone craving complete island immersion. You’ll establish routines, discover secret beaches, and venture across the Florida Keys, exploring the island chain comprehensively.
Days 1-7: Follow the 7-Day Itinerary
Complete the week-long plan, ensuring comprehensive Key West coverage from historic sites to water adventures. By day seven, you’ll know your favorite restaurants and bars.
Day 8: Islamorada and Upper Keys
Morning: Drive to Islamorada (Mile Marker 80), the sportfishing capital. Visit Robbie’s Marina to feed tarpon from the dock. These massive fish swarm in feeding frenzies, creating exciting wildlife encounters. Continue to Windley Key Fossil Reef Geological State Park, exploring ancient coral formations.
Lunch: Lazy Days Restaurant in Islamorada serves waterfront seafood and island atmosphere.
Afternoon: Snorkel or dive at Molasses Reef, one of the Keys’ best coral reefs. Several dive shops in Islamorada offer trips to multiple reef sites. The clear water and abundant marine life rival Key West’s spots. Return stopping at various viewpoints and beaches along Overseas Highway.
Evening: Back in Key West, casual dinner near the rental or simple takeout after a full driving day.
Day 9: Marathon and Middle Keys
Morning: Drive to Marathon (Mile Marker 50), visiting the Turtle Hospital. This rehabilitation facility rescues and treats injured sea turtles. Guided tours explain conservation efforts and let you see patients recovering. The educational tours run four times daily by reservation.
Afternoon: Continue to Sombrero Beach, Marathon’s beautiful public beach with palm trees and calm water. The reef offshore provides excellent snorkeling right from the beach. Or visit Crane Point Museum and Nature Center, exploring hardwood hammock trails and a butterfly garden.
Lunch: Keys Fisheries in Marathon serves dockside seafood, including their famous lobster reuben.
Evening: Return to Key West for the final night. Dinner at your absolute favorite spot discovered during ten days, or splurge at Seven Fish or Cafe Sole one more time. Reflect on ten days knowing you’ve experienced the Keys beyond typical tourism.
Day 10: Favorite Spots and Farewell
Morning: Return to favorite breakfast spot for final Key West morning. Maybe it’s Blue Heaven’s chickens, Cuban Coffee Queen’s espresso, or somewhere you discovered independently. Final beach time at Fort Zachary Taylor or Smathers Beach, soaking in the tropical atmosphere.
Lunch: Last Key lime pie at Kermit’s or your preferred shop. You’ve earned strong opinions about Key West’s signature dessert.
Afternoon: Last-minute exploring or souvenir shopping. Duval Street shops offer everything from tacky t-shirts to fine art. Or simply sit at Mallory Square watching the world pass by, appreciating the laid-back island pace.
Evening: Sunset from Mallory Square or your personal favorite spot. Farewell dinner at Louie’s Backyard, Latitudes, or Cafe Marquesa, depending on celebration level and budget. Toast ten days knowing you’ve truly experienced the Conch Republic beyond the party reputation.
Best Homes to Stay for a 10-Day Key West Immersion:
If you have extra time or are looking for other things to do in Key West, consider exploring these places to make your trip even more memorable.
Day Trips Beyond Key West
Everglades National Park: Two hours north, this UNESCO World Heritage Site protects sawgrass marshes and mangrove forests. Airboat tours show alligators and wading birds in their natural habitat. The park’s unique ecosystem contrasts dramatically with the Keys’ island character.
Miami: Three hours north via Overseas Highway, Miami offers an urban contrast to Key West’s small-town vibe. South Beach’s Art Deco district, Wynwood’s street art, and Little Havana’s Cuban culture make for worthy day trips.
Key Largo: One hour north (Mile Marker 100), this largest Florida Key features John Pennekamp Coral Reef State Park. The underwater preserve offers outstanding snorkeling and diving with glass-bottom boat tours for non-swimmers.
Hidden Key West Gems
Key West Cemetery: The above-ground tombs and humorous epitaphs create quirky character. Self-guided walking reveals interesting residents and funny markers like “I Told You I Was Sick.” Free to explore daily.
Fort East Martello: This Civil War fort houses museums, gardens, and Robert the Haunted Doll. The towers provide elevated island views that tourists miss. Admission benefits the Key West Art & Historical Society.
The Key West Butterfly and Nature Conservatory: Climate-controlled habitat houses hundreds of butterflies from around the world. The peaceful garden with a waterfall provides an escape from Duval Street energy. Birds and flowers add to the tropical atmosphere.
Not sure where to stay? Check out our curated lists of top Airbnbs in Key West for neighborhood-specific recommendations.
Getting Around Key West
Key West’s compact 2×4-mile size makes getting around easy compared to mainland cities. Most visitors walk, bike, or use scooters to explore the island. Understanding transportation options helps maximize beach time while minimizing hassle.
Biking and Scooters: The flat terrain and short distances make biking perfect for Key West exploring. Dozens of rental shops offer beach cruisers, electric bikes, and scooters. Expect $15-25 daily for bikes, $35-60 for scooters. Bike lanes on major streets provide some protection from cars. Lock bikes securely as theft occurs.
Walking: Old Town’s compact layout makes walking viable for most attractions. Duval Street stretches one mile from the Gulf to the Atlantic side. However, August heat and afternoon thunderstorms make walking challenging. Distances to outlying areas like Smathers Beach or Fort Zachary Taylor require wheels or rides.
Rental Cars: Not necessary for Key West proper, but useful for Keys road trips. Limited parking and one-way streets make cars more hassle than help on the island. If driving from Miami, consider returning the rental at Key West Airport and exploring the island car-free.
Taxis and Rideshare: Taxis wait at major hotels and can be hailed on Duval Street. Uber and Lyft operate with decent availability. Expect $8-15 for cross-island trips. However, short distances often make walking or biking faster during high traffic times.
Pedicabs: Bicycle taxis cruise Duval Street, offering rides. Negotiate prices before riding, as no meters exist. These work well for short trips when feet hurt from walking.
Where to Stay in Key West
Choosing the right home base shapes your entire Key West experience. AvantStay offers premium vacation rentals across the island’s best locations. From Old Town historic homes to beachside condos, our curated collection positions you perfectly for exploring the Conch Republic.
Why Choose AvantStay
Unlike traditional vacation rentals, AvantStay properties are professionally managed with consistent quality standards. Every home features thoughtful design, high-end furnishings, and modern amenities, making your stay comfortable and memorable.
Our Key West homes span from central Old Town to quieter residential neighborhoods, ensuring you’re positioned for whatever Key West experience you’re seeking.
Concierge Services and Upgrades
AvantStay’s personal concierge service elevates your vacation beyond simple accommodation. We handle the details so you can focus on experiencing Key West’s tropical magic.
Mid-Stay Cleaning: Keep your space fresh during extended stays, so you can relax without worrying about upkeep during your island adventure.
Bring Your Pets: AvantStay encourages time spent with loved ones, and pets are no exception. We offer pet-friendly properties where your furry family members are welcome.
Private Chef: Elevate your dining experience with a personal chef creating island-inspired cuisine featuring fresh seafood without restaurant waits.
Stocked Fridge: Skip the grocery store hassle and let us handle the shopping. Send us your list or select from our curated packages featuring tropical fruits and local products.
Transportation: Need a ride to the airport, Dry Tortugas ferry, or Keys road trips? We arrange reliable transportation throughout your stay, exploring Key West stress-free.
Find Local Child Care: Traveling with kids, but want adults-only sunset sails? We help you find and hire local sitters with detailed profiles, references, and reviews.
In-Home Massage: Perfect after snorkeling and beach days, indulge in ultimate relaxation without leaving your rental with spa-quality treatments.
Rent Baby Gear: Traveling with a baby doesn’t mean packing your entire nursery. Rent cribs, strollers, car seats, beach toys, and more.
For other requests, rentals, or special occasion setups, our concierge team handles whatever makes your Key West vacation exceptional.
Book Through the AvantStay App
Download the AvantStay app to browse properties, manage bookings, and access concierge services all in one place. The app provides 24/7 support, check-in details, local recommendations, and direct messaging with our team.
Before you dive into turquoise waters and explore Duval Street, a little preparation goes a long way to avoid mistakes for your Key West trip. These essential travel tips will help you feel at ease while having the best Key West experience.
Getting To and From Key West
Key West International Airport (EYW) sits on the island’s east side with direct flights from major cities, including Miami, Fort Lauderdale, Atlanta, and Charlotte. The small airport makes arrivals easy compared to mainland hubs. Most visitors either fly directly or drive the Overseas Highway from Miami or Fort Lauderdale.
Airport Transportation: The tiny airport sits 4 miles from Old Town. Taxis wait outside baggage claim, charging a flat $15-20 to downtown hotels. Uber and Lyft pick up outside arrivals with similar pricing. Several hotels offer free shuttle service. Rental cars are available, but unnecessary for island exploring unless planning Keys road trips.
Driving from Miami: The scenic 3.5-4 hour drive along Overseas Highway (US 1) crosses 42 bridges connecting the island chain. Stop at various Mile Markers, exploring different Keys. Book accommodation with parking, as street parking is limited downtown. Consider a one-way rental returning the car upon Key West arrival.
Ferry Service: Key West Express operates high-speed ferry from Fort Myers and Marco Island (seasonal). The boats carry passengers only, no vehicles. The scenic cruise takes 3.5 hours each way, making day trips possible, though overnight stays work better.
Packing for Key West
Year-Round Essentials: Reef-safe sunscreen (Key West bans harmful chemicals), swimsuits (bring multiple), flip-flops and water shoes, light breathable clothing, sun hat and sunglasses, and a light rain jacket for afternoon showers. Casual dress prevails even at nicer restaurants. Bring your own snorkel gear if you plan frequent reef trips.
Winter (December-March): Peak season brings perfect weather with 70-80°F days and minimal rain. Pack light layers for occasional cooler evenings. This is the driest season and the prime tourist time, meaning higher prices and crowded attractions. Book everything well ahead.
Summer (June-September): Hot and humid with 85-90°F temperatures and afternoon thunderstorms. Hurricane season runs from June through November, though direct hits are rare. Pack rain gear and prepare for sudden downpours. Rates drop significantly, making summer attractive for budget travelers who can handle the heat.
Spring/Fall (April-May, October-November): Shoulder seasons offer warm weather with fewer crowds. Occasional rain possible, but generally pleasant conditions. Spring brings spring breakers in March, while fall sees fewer tourists. These seasons balance good weather with reasonable prices.
Practical Key West Preparation
Island Time: Key West operates on a relaxed island schedule. Restaurants open late for breakfast, close between lunch and dinner, and stay open late for nightlife. Service can be slow but rarely rude. Embrace the pace rather than fighting it.
Roosters and Chickens: Feral chickens roam freely throughout Key West, protected by ordinance. They crow at all hours, not just dawn. Light sleepers should pack earplugs. Feeding chickens is illegal as it attracts them to areas and makes them aggressive.
Costs: Key West is expensive. Expect $20-35 for casual meals, $50-100 for nice dinners, $8-12 for beers, and $12-18 for cocktails. Attractions range from free beaches to $200 for Dry Tortugas trips. Groceries at local markets cost 30-50% more than mainland prices.
Reservations: Book popular restaurants like Blue Heaven, Latitudes, and Louie’s Backyard days or weeks ahead, especially for sunset times. Dry Tortugas ferry sells out during peak season. Snorkel tours and water activities book up quickly from November through April.
Hurricane Season: June through November brings hurricane risk, though Key West rarely receives direct hits. Monitor weather forecasts if visiting during this period. Most hotels and rentals offer hurricane evacuation policies. Mandatory evacuations happen occasionally when storms approach.
Reef Protection: Key West’s coral reefs are protected by law. Don’t touch, stand on, or remove coral or marine life. Use reef-safe sunscreen only, as harmful chemicals damage these fragile ecosystems. Violations result in hefty fines. Follow the snorkel and dive guides’ instructions carefully.
Water Safety: Strong currents exist at some beaches and snorkel sites. Always check conditions before entering water. Jellyfish appear seasonally. Watch for red flags indicating dangerous conditions. Never snorkel alone and stay aware of boat traffic when swimming.
More Questions About Your Key West Trip?
Planning a Florida Keys adventure involves countless details, and we’re here to help. Whether you need recommendations for family-friendly properties, locations near beaches, or homes with specific amenities, our team can answer questions and guide your booking process.
Contact us via:
Email: experience@avantstay.com
Phone: (833) 442-8268
Let the Conch Republic Welcome You
Turquoise water stretching to the horizon, roosters crowing at sunrise, that first bite of authentic Key lime pie. The sunset applause at Mallory Square, six-toed cats lounging at Hemingway’s, tropical fish darting through coral reefs like living rainbows.
The memories you create here will absolutely become the stories you’ll tell for years. Key West is the perfect place for beach lovers, snorkelers, history buffs, and adventurers seeking a tropical escape without leaving the United States.
The City of Angels sprawls across 500 square miles where mountains meet the Pacific, movie studios produce dreams, and tacos taste better than anywhere else.
Los Angeles isn’t one city but dozens of distinct neighborhoods from glitzy Beverly Hills to artsy Downtown, beachy Santa Monica to hipster Silver Lake.
Each area maintains its own character while contributing to LA’s reputation as America’s entertainment capital.
From Hollywood’s star-studded sidewalks to Malibu’s surf breaks, the city offers adventures for every visitor type.
This guide breaks down the perfect Los Angeles itinerary, whether for a quick weekend escape or a full week exploring Southern California’s biggest city.
Planning your trip? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Los Angeles for ideal weather and events before building your itinerary.
2 Days in Los Angeles: 48 Hours in the City of Angels
This fast-paced itinerary works for travelers passing through California or business visitors extending their trip. You’ll experience LA’s most iconic moments without spreading yourself thin. Perfect for photographers and movie fans wanting maximum star power packed into one power weekend.
Day 1: Hollywood and Entertainment
Morning: Start at the Hollywood Walk of Fame before 9 AM to avoid crowds. Find your favorite stars’ names among 2,700+ embedded in the sidewalk along Hollywood Boulevard. Walk to the TCL Chinese Theatre for handprints and footprints of movie legends. The ornate architecture alone warrants photos.
Afternoon: Drive up to Griffith Observatory for panoramic LA views, including the Hollywood Sign. The free museum inside explains astronomy and Los Angeles history. Hike behind the observatory for closer Hollywood Sign views if energy permits. The moderate trail takes 30-45 minutes one way.
Lunch: Grab tacos at Leo’s Tacos Truck on La Brea near Hollywood or head to Grand Central Market downtown for diverse food stall options.
Evening: Universal Studios Hollywood stays open until 9 PM many nights. Tour the working studio backlot, seeing actual film sets, then experience themed rides including Wizarding World of Harry Potter and Jurassic World. CityWalk outside the park offers dinner and entertainment. Alternatively, explore Sunset Strip’s legendary music venues and restaurants.
Day 2: Beaches and Culture
Morning: Breakfast at Eggslut in Grand Central Market for their famous breakfast sandwiches. Walk across the street to Angels Flight, the historic funicular railway. Browse the Bradbury Building’s Victorian ironwork featured in Blade Runner. Continue to The Broad museum for contemporary art, including Yayoi Kusama’s Infinity Mirrors (advance reservations required).
Afternoon: Drive to Santa Monica Pier for the classic SoCal beach experience. The Ferris wheel, arcade games, and street performers create a carnival atmosphere. Walk or bike the beachfront path south to Venice Beach. The Venice Boardwalk’s street performers, Muscle Beach, and skateboard park deliver quintessential LA people-watching.
Lunch: Grab fish tacos or burgers at one of Venice Beach’s casual beachfront restaurants.
Evening: Sunset at Santa Monica Beach, watching the sun sink into the Pacific. Dinner at The Ivy on Robertson Boulevard if you want celebrity spotting potential, or keep it casual at In-N-Out Burger for cult-favorite California burgers. End with drinks at a West Hollywood rooftop bar.
3 Days in Los Angeles: The Essential Hollywood Weekend
Three days capture LA’s essence perfectly for first-time visitors or groups celebrating special occasions. This itinerary balances entertainment industry tourism with beach time, making it ideal for bachelorette parties, milestone birthdays, or friend reunions. You’ll experience the city’s diverse character from downtown culture to coastal beauty.
Day 1: Hollywood Immersion
Morning: Tour Warner Bros. or Paramount Studios for behind-the-scenes studio experiences. The WB tour shows actual production areas and backlot streets. Tours run 2-3 hours and require advance booking. Alternatively, visit the Academy Museum of Motion Pictures, exploring film history through interactive exhibits.
Lunch: Pink’s Hot Dogs on La Brea serves famous chili dogs and celebrity-named specialties since 1939. The line moves despite its length.
Afternoon: Drive through Beverly Hills, spotting mansions on Rodeo Drive’s luxury shopping district. Continue to West Hollywood for shopping and gallery browsing. The Sunset Strip’s legendary rock clubs and billboards capture LA’s music history.
Evening: Catch sunset from Runyon Canyon’s hiking trails with Hollywood Sign and city views. The moderate 3-mile loop attracts locals and tourists. Dinner at Republique for French-California cuisine in a historic building, or try trendy restaurants along Melrose Avenue. End with comedy at The Comedy Store or Largo at the Coronet.
Day 2: Beach Cities and Coastal Culture
Morning: Breakfast at Gjusta in Venice for outstanding pastries and coffee. Walk the Venice Canals, exploring this quiet neighborhood mimicking Venice, Italy. The pedestrian bridges and canal-front homes create surprising serenity blocks from the beach chaos.
Afternoon: Head to Malibu via Pacific Coast Highway. Stop at El Matador State Beach for dramatic sea caves and rock formations. Continue to Malibu Pier and Surfrider Beach, where modern surfing culture began. The Getty Villa in Pacific Palisades showcases ancient Greek and Roman art in a recreated Roman villa (free but requires timed-entry reservations).
Lunch: Malibu Farm on the pier serves farm-to-table California cuisine overlooking the ocean.
Evening: Return to Santa Monica for Third Street Promenade’s pedestrian shopping and street performers. Dinner at The Lobster overlooking Santa Monica Pier, or grab upscale Mexican at Border Grill. Watch the sunset from Palisades Park’s bluffs before heading back.
Day 3: Downtown Arts and Culture
Morning: Start at Grand Central Market for breakfast from multiple vendors. Tour the nearby Bradbury Building’s Victorian architecture and ride Angels Flight funicular. Walk to The Broad museum for contemporary art, then explore Downtown’s Arts District with street art murals and galleries.
Lunch: Bestia in the Arts District serves innovative Italian cuisine in an industrial-chic space. Reservations essential.
Afternoon: Visit LACMA (Los Angeles County Museum of Art) for extensive art collections and the famous Urban Light installation. The adjacent La Brea Tar Pits reveal Ice Age fossils still being excavated. Continue to The Grove shopping complex and Original Farmers Market for browsing and snacking.
Evening: Final sunset from Griffith Observatory if you missed it earlier. Farewell dinner at Perch rooftop in Downtown for French bistro fare with skyline views. The rooftop atmosphere suits celebrations. End with cocktails in Downtown’s speakeasy bars or Arts District breweries.
Best Homes to Stay for a 3-Day Los Angeles Weekend:
Four days lets you dig deeper into LA’s distinct areas while hitting major attractions. This works perfectly for families with kids or groups wanting both theme park thrills and cultural experiences. You’ll balance famous spots with local neighborhoods that Angelenos actually frequent.
Day 1: Theme Park Magic
Morning: Early arrival at Universal Studios Hollywood beats crowds. The Studio Tour reveals working backlot and special effects demonstrations. Harry Potter’s Wizarding World attracts massive crowds, so hit this first. Other themed areas include Jurassic World and Transformers rides.
Afternoon: Continue exploring Universal Studios. The park requires a full day for a complete experience. CityWalk outside offers dining and entertainment if you finish early.
Lunch: Multiple restaurants inside Universal Studios and CityWalk offer casual dining from burgers to sushi.
Evening: Exit the park and drive to Burbank for dinner at Porto’s Bakery and Cafe. Their Cuban pastries, potato balls, and sandwiches deliver authentic flavors at affordable prices. The line moves quickly despite appearing long. Alternatively, explore Burbank’s restaurants near the studios.
Day 2: Museum Mile and Beverly Hills
Morning: Breakfast at The Griddle Cafe in Hollywood for massive pancakes and creative morning fare. Drive to Museum Row on Wilshire Boulevard. Choose between LACMA for broad art collections, the Petersen Automotive Museum for car enthusiasts, or the Academy Museum for film lovers. Each requires 2-3 hours minimum.
Afternoon: Continue to Beverly Hills for window shopping on Rodeo Drive. Even if luxury retail isn’t your thing, the people-watching and architecture entertain. Walk residential streets near Rodeo, spotting impressive homes. Continue to West Hollywood for The Grove and Original Farmers Market complex.
Lunch: The Original Farmers Market offers dozens of food stalls serving everything from Louisiana gumbo to Brazilian grilled meat. The historic market opened in 1934.
Evening: Sunset from West Hollywood’s rooftop bars like EP & LP or Laurel Hardware. Dinner at Catch LA for seafood and celebrity spotting, or keep it casual at Jon & Vinny’s for Italian comfort food. End with live music on Sunset Strip at Whisky a Go Go or The Roxy.
Day 3: Beach Day and Coastal Culture
Morning: Drive to Manhattan Beach for a small-town beach atmosphere. The Manhattan Beach Pier and surrounding sand offer excellent swimming and people-watching. Local surfers catch waves while volleyball players compete on courts. Breakfast at Uncle Bill’s Pancake House for classic diner fare.
Afternoon: Continue south to Palos Verdes Peninsula for coastal drives along stunning cliffs. Stop at Point Vicente Lighthouse and Terranea Resort’s coastal trail. Whale watching is possible from November through April. Return north through Redondo Beach’s harbor area.
Lunch: Grab seafood at one of Redondo Beach Pier’s restaurants overlooking the marina.
Evening: Head to Abbot Kinney Boulevard in Venice for trendy boutiques, galleries, and restaurants. This mile-long street captures LA’s creative spirit. Dinner at Gjelina for California-Mediterranean sharing plates. Their roasted squash and lamb neck ragout earns raves. End with drinks at The Bungalow in Santa Monica.
Day 4: Hidden LA
Morning: Breakfast at Republique for pastries and French-inspired brunch. Explore Los Feliz and Silver Lake neighborhoods with vintage shops, coffee roasters, and local character. Visit Griffith Park’s Autry Museum of the American West or explore hiking trails. The park offers 4,300 acres of recreation space.
Lunch: Alimento in Silver Lake serves Italian-California cuisine in a casual neighborhood setting. Or try HomeState for Texas-style breakfast tacos served all day.
Afternoon: Drive to Pasadena for the Huntington Library, Art Museum, and Botanical Gardens. The 120-acre estate showcases rare books, British and American art, and themed gardens, including Japanese and desert collections. Allow 3+ hours for thorough exploring. Or visit the Norton Simon Museum for European art.
Evening: Dinner in Old Town Pasadena’s pedestrian district with dozens of restaurants. The Raymond 1886 offers upscale California cuisine in a historic Craftsman cottage. Return to LA via the 110 freeway for nighttime city light views.
5 Days in Los Angeles: The Complete First-Timer’s Journey
Five days reveal Los Angeles beyond the postcard scenes and give time to appreciate why people accept traffic for the lifestyle. Perfect for families planning vacations or couples wanting a thorough exploration without rushing. This pace lets you experience the city’s full range from urban Downtown to mountain trails.
Day 1: Downtown Deep Dive
Morning: Start at Grand Central Market for breakfast. Tour the historic Bradbury Building’s Victorian architecture has been featured in countless films. Ride Angels Flight funicular up Bunker Hill. Visit The Broad museum for contemporary art, including Jeff Koons and Yayoi Kusama (reserve Infinity Mirrors ahead).
Lunch: Eat at one of Grand Central Market’s many vendors. Villa’s Tacos holds a Michelin Bib Gourmand for its exceptional tacos.
Afternoon: Walk through the Arts District, exploring street art murals and galleries. Hauser & Wirth gallery offers free admission in a converted flour mill. Continue to Little Tokyo for Japanese shops, gardens, and cultural experiences. The Japanese American National Museum explains immigration history.
Evening: Dinner at Bestia for innovative Italian or Otium next to The Broad for California cuisine. End at rooftop bars like Perch or Spire 73 for skyline views and cocktails.
Day 2: Hollywood and Griffith Park
Morning: Early arrival at Griffith Observatory before crowds. Hike to the Hollywood Sign via the Mount Hollywood Trail (6 miles round trip) or the Brush Canyon Trail (3 miles). The exposed trails require sun protection and plenty of water but deliver iconic LA views.
Lunch: Griffith Observatory’s cafe offers basic fare, or pack picnic supplies to eat with views.
Afternoon: Tour Warner Bros. or Paramount Studios for behind-the-scenes access. The working studio tours last 2-3 hours, showing real production areas. Book well ahead as tours fill quickly. Or visit the Hollywood Museum in the historic Max Factor Building for film memorabilia.
Evening: Walk the Hollywood Walk of Fame and TCL Chinese Theatre after sunset when temperatures cool. Dinner at Musso & Frank Grill, Hollywood’s oldest restaurant since 1919. Their martinis and old-school steakhouse atmosphere capture Hollywood’s golden era. End with live music at Hotel Cafe or shows at Hollywood Bowl if the season aligns.
Day 3: Coastal Highway
Morning: Drive Pacific Coast Highway north to Malibu. Stop at El Matador State Beach for dramatic rock formations and photo opportunities. Continue to Malibu Pier and Surfrider Beach, where modern surfing culture developed. The Getty Villa requires free timed-entry tickets but showcases ancient Greek and Roman art in a spectacular hilltop setting.
Lunch: Malibu Farm or Neptune’s Net for casual seafood with ocean views.
Afternoon: Continue north to Zuma Beach for swimming and sunbathing, or Point Dume State Beach for tide pools and sea lion viewing from the promontory. The scenic drive along PCH delivers endless Pacific views with dramatic cliffs and hidden beaches.
Evening: Return south, stopping at the Santa Monica Pier for sunset. Walk the Third Street Promenade before dinner at The Lobster overlooking the pier. The seafood restaurant balances special occasion elegance with beach proximity. End with drinks at rooftop bars in Santa Monica.
Day 4: Theme Parks or Studios
Morning: Full day at either Universal Studios Hollywood, Disneyland in Anaheim, or Knott’s Berry Farm. Each theme park requires a full day for thorough exploration. Universal’s backlot tour and movie-themed rides capture LA’s entertainment industry. Disneyland offers classic Disney magic 45 minutes south in Anaheim.
Afternoon: Continue at your chosen park. Most stay open until evening with night shows and fireworks.
Lunch: Theme parks offer numerous dining options from quick service to sit-down restaurants.
Evening: Exit the park exhausted but exhilarated. A simple dinner near your accommodation or delivery lets you recover. If energy remains, explore your neighborhood’s local restaurants and bars.
Day 5: Neighborhood Favorites
Morning: Brunch at The Butcher, The Baker, The Cappuccino Maker in West Hollywood for modern takes on breakfast classics. Explore West Hollywood’s design district and Santa Monica Boulevard. Continue to Beverly Hills for architecture tours of historic homes.
Afternoon: Visit LACMA for art collections and the Urban Light installation of 202 restored street lamps. The adjacent La Brea Tar Pits preserve Ice Age fossils with ongoing excavations. Or tour the Getty Center in Brentwood for European art and stunning architecture. The hilltop museum offers free admission but charges for parking.
Lunch: The Getty Center’s restaurant serves California cuisine with views, or grab food trucks near LACMA.
Evening: Final sunset from Baldwin Hills Scenic Overlook for 360-degree LA views from mountains to ocean. The 282 steps to the top workout but a reward. Farewell dinner at Providence for Michelin-starred seafood tasting menus, or Republique for more approachable upscale dining. Toast five days exploring the City of Angels.
Best Homes to Stay for a 5-Day Los Angeles Adventure:
7 Days in Los Angeles: Entertainment Capital Like a Local
A full week lets you settle into LA’s rhythm, discovering why creative types choose this sprawling city despite traffic and costs. This itinerary works for remote workers, extended families, or entertainment industry enthusiasts wanting complete immersion. You’ll have time to revisit favorite spots and venture into neighborhoods tourists skip.
Days 1-5: Follow the 5-Day Itinerary
Start with the comprehensive five-day plan covering Downtown, Hollywood, beaches, and theme parks. This foundation ensures you experience LA’s essential character before exploring deeper.
Day 6: South Bay and Beach Cities
Morning: Breakfast at Uncle Bill’s Pancake House in Manhattan Beach. Walk the Manhattan Beach Pier and the surrounding sand, watching surfers. This beach town maintains a small-community vibe despite LA proximity. Rent bikes and cruise The Strand beachfront path connecting beach cities.
Afternoon: Continue to Hermosa Beach for lunch at one of the pier restaurants. Walk the beach and check out surf shops. Drive to Palos Verdes Peninsula for dramatic coastal cliffs and hiking. The Point Vicente Lighthouse and adjacent trails offer whale watching from December through April.
Evening: Return via Torrance for dinner at one of the area’s many Asian restaurants. The South Bay hosts large Asian communities with authentic Japanese, Korean, and Vietnamese dining. Alternatively, sunset dinner at Terranea Resort’s Nelson’s restaurant overlooks the Pacific from a clifftop perch.
Day 7: Your Choice Day
Morning: Sleep in and enjoy a leisurely breakfast at a favorite spot discovered during the week. Maybe return to Grand Central Market or try a new neighborhood cafe. Final morning hike at Runyon Canyon, Temescal Canyon, or Griffith Park, enjoying LA’s surprising nature access.
Afternoon: Options abound for the final day. Revisit a favorite museum, explore neighborhoods you haven’t fully seen, or simply relax poolside. Shopping on Melrose, Abbot Kinney, or Robertson Boulevard makes a great last-day activity. Venice Beach boardwalk people-watching never gets old.
Lunch: In-N-Out Burger for the final California burger fix. The cult chain appears throughout LA, making it convenient.
Evening: Final sunset from your favorite spot. Maybe it’s Santa Monica Pier, Griffith Observatory, or a beach you discovered. Splurge on dinner at Providence, n/naka, or Vespertine for Michelin-starred tasting menus. Or keep it casual at Gjelina, Jon & Vinny’s, or your personal favorite. Toast seven days knowing you’ve experienced LA beyond tourism.
Best Homes to Stay for a 7-Day Los Angeles Experience:
10 Days in Los Angeles: Total Southern California Immersion
Ten days transform Los Angeles from a destination to a temporary home. This extended stay suits digital nomads, sabbatical travelers, or anyone craving complete SoCal immersion. You’ll establish routines, discover secret hiking trails, and venture across Southern California exploring the broader region.
Days 1-7: Follow the 7-Day Itinerary
Complete the week-long plan, ensuring comprehensive LA coverage from Downtown to the beaches. By day seven, you’ll know your favorite neighborhoods and coffee shops.
Day 8: Orange County Day Trip
Morning: Drive south to Laguna Beach for art galleries and pristine coves. This seaside town features 30+ galleries and monthly art walks. The beaches nestled between cliffs create intimate swimming spots. Walk the coastal trail between Heisler Park and Main Beach.
Afternoon: Continue to Newport Beach for Balboa Island exploring. The tiny island accessed by bridge features charming shops and famous frozen bananas. Rent bikes or simply walk the waterfront path. The Balboa Fun Zone offers vintage amusement attractions.
Lunch: Ruby’s Diner on Balboa Pier serves classic American diner food with ocean views.
Evening: Return to LA via Pacific Coast Highway, stopping at Huntington Beach if time permits. “Surf City USA” lives up to its nickname with consistent waves and beach culture. Dinner back in LA at a neighborhood favorite or simple takeout after a full day.
Day 9: Day Trip Options
Morning: Choose your adventure: Santa Barbara (90 minutes north) for wine tasting and Spanish architecture, Joshua Tree National Park (2.5 hours east) for desert hiking and rock formations, or San Diego (2.5 hours south) for beaches and attractions. Each destination deserves an overnight stay, but day trips work for quick tastes.
Afternoon: Continue exploring the chosen destination. Santa Barbara’s State Street pedestrian area offers shopping and dining. Joshua Tree’s alien landscape and rock climbing attract outdoor enthusiasts. San Diego’s Gaslamp Quarter and beaches deliver a beach city vibe.
Lunch: Each destination offers numerous dining options from casual to upscale.
Evening: Return to LA exhausted but enriched. Long driving days mean a simple dinner near the rental. Reflect on how the ten days revealed California’s diversity beyond LA proper.
Day 10: Favorite Spots and Farewell
Morning: Return to a favorite breakfast spot from the week. Final morning activity at your preferred spot. Maybe it’s beach time, hiking, or simply sitting at a cafe, people-watching. Last-minute shopping at Rose Bowl Flea Market (second Sunday monthly) or Melrose Trading Post (Sunday) if timing works.
Lunch: Final meal at In-N-Out or favorite taco spot. You’ve earned opinions about LA food by now.
Afternoon: Last-minute exploring or souvenir shopping. The Hollywood & Highland complex offers tourist gifts. Abbot Kinney and Silver Lake boutiques provide more unique local products. Or simply drive through favorite neighborhoods, appreciating the vibe.
Evening: Sunset from Griffith Observatory, Santa Monica Pier, or your personal favorite spot. Farewell dinner at Michelin-starred Providence, innovative Vespertine, or your discovered gem. Toast ten days well spent in the City of Angels, knowing you’ve experienced LA beyond Hollywood stereotypes.
Best Homes to Stay for a 10-Day Los Angeles Immersion:
Disneyland Resort: The Anaheim theme park deserves a full day or an overnight stay. Both Disneyland and California Adventure parks offer classic Disney entertainment with themed lands and attractions.
Santa Catalina Island: Ferry from Long Beach or San Pedro reaches this Mediterranean-like island in an hour. Avalon’s harbor town and island interior offer hiking, diving, and escape from mainland bustle.
Temecula Wine Country: 90 minutes south, this inland wine region produces quality wines with a Mediterranean climate. Over 40 wineries offer tastings amid rolling hills and vineyard views.
Hidden LA Gems
The Last Bookstore: This multi-story bookstore in Downtown features new and used books in a former bank building. The tunnel of books and art installations creates Instagram-worthy shopping.
Sunken City: This landslide area in San Pedro reveals abandoned streets and foundations sliding into the Pacific. Technically closed but accessible with caution. The ruins and coastal views attract urban explorers.
Self-Realization Fellowship Lake Shrine: This peaceful temple and garden in Pacific Palisades offers meditation areas, koi ponds, and a spiritual atmosphere. Free admission provides escape from LA chaos.
Not sure where to stay? Check out our curated lists of top Airbnbs in Los Angeles for neighborhood-specific recommendations.
Getting Around Los Angeles
Los Angeles sprawls across 500 square miles with limited public transportation. The city’s car-centric design means rental vehicles provide the most flexibility. Understanding traffic patterns and parking challenges helps maximize sightseeing time while minimizing frustration.
Rental Cars: Essential for comprehensive LA exploring. Book ahead as prices fluctuate wildly during peak seasons. Expect $50-100 daily, depending on vehicle type. LA traffic gets heavy during rush hours (6-10 AM and 3-7 PM). Google Maps provides real-time traffic routing. Parking downtown costs $10-30 daily, while beach areas offer metered street parking.
Public Transportation: Metro rail and bus systems connect some areas, but remain impractical for tourists. The Expo Line links Downtown to Santa Monica. Red and Purple lines serve Hollywood and Universal City. However, reaching attractions requires multiple transfers, making rental cars more efficient.
Rideshare: Uber and Lyft operate throughout LA with good availability except during peak hours. Expect $20-40 for cross-town trips, $50-70 from LAX to beach areas. Surge pricing affects popular areas during events and evenings. Budget-conscious travelers can combine rideshare with Metro rail for a hybrid approach.
Biking: Some neighborhoods like Santa Monica, Manhattan Beach, and Venice offer bike-friendly paths. Metro Bikes provides bike-share throughout the city. However, LA’s sprawl and car culture make cycling challenging for tourists trying to cover multiple areas.
Walking: Individual neighborhoods stay walkable, but distances between areas require transportation. Downtown’s Arts District, Venice Beach, and Third Street Promenade allow pedestrian exploration. However, LA wasn’t built for walking, and sidewalks disappear in many areas.
Where to Stay in Los Angeles
Choosing the right home base shapes your entire LA experience. AvantStay offers premium vacation rentals across Los Angeles’ best neighborhoods.
From Hollywood Hills homes to beach condos, our curated collection positions you perfectly for exploring the entertainment capital.
Why Choose AvantStay
Unlike traditional vacation rentals, AvantStay properties are professionally managed with consistent quality standards. Every home features thoughtful design, high-end furnishings, and modern amenities, making your stay comfortable and memorable.
Our Los Angeles homes span from central Hollywood to coastal Santa Monica, ensuring you’re positioned for whatever LA experience you’re seeking.
Concierge Services and Upgrades
AvantStay’s personal concierge service elevates your vacation beyond simple accommodation. We handle the details so you can focus on experiencing LA’s entertainment and culture.
Mid-Stay Cleaning: Keep your space fresh during extended stays, so you can relax without worrying about upkeep during your LA adventure.
Bring Your Pets: AvantStay encourages time spent with loved ones, and pets are no exception. We offer pet-friendly properties where your furry family members are welcome.
Private Chef: Elevate your dining experience with a personal chef creating California-inspired cuisine without restaurant reservations.
Stocked Fridge: Skip the grocery store hassle and let us handle the shopping. Send us your list or select from our curated packages.
Transportation: Need a ride to studios, theme parks, or beaches? We arrange reliable transportation throughout your stay, exploring LA stress-free.
Find Local Child Care: Traveling with kids but want adults-only studio tours? We help you find and hire local sitters with detailed profiles, references, and reviews.
In-Home Massage: Perfect after theme park days and hiking, indulge in ultimate relaxation without leaving your rental.
Rent Baby Gear: Traveling with a baby doesn’t mean packing your entire nursery. Rent cribs, strollers, car seats, and more.
For other requests, rentals, or special occasion setups, our concierge team handles whatever makes your Los Angeles vacation exceptional.
Book Through the AvantStay App
Download the AvantStay app to browse properties, manage bookings, and access concierge services all in one place. The app provides 24/7 support, check-in details, local recommendations, and direct messaging with our team.
Before you cruise the PCH and hike to the Hollywood Sign, a little preparation goes a long way. These essential travel tips will help you feel at ease while having the best LA experience.
Getting To and From LAX
Los Angeles International Airport (LAX) serves as one of America’s busiest airports, with terminals scattered across two miles. The sprawling layout can confuse first-time visitors, but shuttle buses connect all terminals.
Airport Transportation: Rideshare pickup moved to the LAX-it lot, requiring shuttle from terminals. The consolidated pickup area reduces terminal congestion but adds 10-15 minutes. Expect $35-60 to Hollywood, $25-45 to Santa Monica, $60-80 to Pasadena. The FlyAway bus connects LAX to Union Station downtown for $10. Rental cars require a shuttle to the consolidated facility off-airport.
Alternative Airports: Burbank Airport (BUR) serves the Valley and Pasadena with easier access and less congestion. Long Beach Airport (LGB) and John Wayne Airport (SNA) in Orange County offer additional options depending on your destination.
Rental Cars: All major companies operate from LAX’s consolidated facility. Book ahead for better rates. Expect $40-100 daily, depending on vehicle and season. Navigation apps are essential for LA driving. Download offline maps in case cell service drops.
Packing for Los Angeles
Year-Round Essentials: Sunglasses, sunscreen, layers for temperature variations between neighborhoods, comfortable walking shoes, and a light jacket for evening coastal fog. LA’s Mediterranean climate means pleasant weather year-round, but mornings can be cool.
Spring/Summer (April-September): Perfect beach weather with 70-85°F temperatures. Pack swimsuit, beach gear, and sun protection. June Gloom brings morning fog to the coast, burning off by afternoon. Concerts and festivals fill the summer calendar, so book ahead.
Fall/Winter (October-March): Mild temperatures 60-75°F with occasional rain, November through March. Pack a light jacket and layers. Santa Ana winds bring hot, dry conditions randomly. Winter is actually LA’s wet season, though rain remains infrequent compared to other cities.
Practical Los Angeles Preparation
Traffic Reality: LA traffic is legendary for good reason. Plan extra time for everything. Rush hours extend from 6-10 AM and 3-7 PM, but congestion persists throughout the day. Fridays are the worst for beach-bound traffic. Use Google Maps or Waze for real-time routing.
Parking Challenges: Read parking signs carefully as restrictions vary block by block. Street sweeping tickets cost $73+. Valet parking is common at restaurants and hotels. Beach parking fills early summer weekends. Downtown parking garages charge $10-30 daily.
Costs: LA isn’t cheap. Expect $15-30 for casual meals, $50-100 for nice dinners, $7-10 for craft beers, and $12-18 for cocktails. Theme park tickets cost $100-150+. Activities range from free museum days to $200+ studio tours.
Reservations: Book popular restaurants weeks ahead, especially for weekend dinners. The Broad Museum’s Infinity Mirrors require advance reservations. Studio tours sell out during peak seasons. Theme parks offer cheaper tickets purchased online ahead of the visit.
Neighborhood Distances: LA’s size deceives. Santa Monica to Pasadena takes 60-90 minutes despite being just 25 miles. Downtown to Malibu requires 45-75 minutes. Plan fewer activities per day than you think possible. The journey between spots eats time.
More Questions About Your Los Angeles Trip?
Planning an LA adventure involves countless details, and we’re here to help. Whether you need recommendations for group-friendly properties, locations near beaches or studios, or homes with specific amenities, our team can answer questions and guide your booking process.
Contact us via:
Email: experience@avantstay.com
Phone: (833) 442-8268
Your Hollywood Story Starts Here
Palm trees silhouetted against pink sunsets, the Hollywood Sign glowing white on the hillside, waves crashing at Malibu’s El Matador Beach.
Studio backlots where movie magic happens, street tacos that taste better than any restaurant, endless sunshine warming your skin while ocean breezes cool the air.
The memories you create here will absolutely become the stories you’ll tell for years. Los Angeles is the perfect place for movie fans, beach lovers, families, and adventurers seeking California dreaming at its finest.
Red Rock Country isn’t just a nickname here. Sedona rises from the Arizona desert with towering sandstone formations that glow crimson at sunset, spiritual vortexes believed to channel Earth’s energy, and hiking trails that reward every level of explorer.
This desert town built its reputation on natural beauty while evolving into a wellness and arts destination that surprises even frequent visitors. From Cathedral Rock’s spires to Oak Creek’s swimming holes, the landscape offers adventures without overwhelming crowds of larger parks.
Whether you’re hiking Bell Rock at sunrise, soaking in a spa under red rock views, or browsing art galleries in Tlaquepaque, Sedona delivers desert magic at 4,500 feet elevation with four distinct seasons.
This guide breaks down the perfect Sedona itinerary, whether for a quick weekend escape or a full week exploring Arizona’s most photogenic destination.
Planning your trip? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Sedona for ideal weather and events before building your itinerary.
2 Days in Sedona: 48 Hours Red Rock Sprint
This fast-paced itinerary works for travelers driving between Phoenix and the Grand Canyon or couples seeking a quick nature escape. You’ll experience Sedona’s most iconic red rocks without spreading yourself thin. Perfect for photographers and hikers wanting maximum scenery packed into one power weekend.
Day 1: Iconic Formations
Morning: Start with sunrise at Airport Mesa for 360-degree red rock views. The easy 3.5-mile loop trail accesses one of Sedona’s famous vortex sites believed to emit upward energy. The trailhead sits right off Airport Road with ample parking. After hiking, breakfast at Coffee Pot Restaurant for classic American fare with Coffee Pot Rock views out the window.
Afternoon: Drive to Cathedral Rock trailhead. The steep 1.2-mile hike challenges but rewards with Sedona’s most photographed rock formation towering overhead. Expect crowds on weekends. The exposed trail requires water and sun protection. Swimming in Oak Creek at Red Rock Crossing offers post-hike cooling with Cathedral Rock backdrop.
Lunch: Grab takeout at Wildflower Bread Company for sandwiches and salads perfect for creek-side picnics.
Evening: Sunset at Bell Rock, another vortex site with easier trails circling the base. The formation glows brilliant red-orange as the sun sets. Dinner at Elote Cafe for creative Mexican cuisine is worth the wait. Their lamb tacos and corn-crusted scallops earn raves. Reservations are essential or expect 90+ minute waits.
Day 2: Canyons and Culture
Morning: Drive Oak Creek Canyon Scenic Drive north toward Flagstaff. Stop at Slide Rock State Park for natural water slides down smooth creek rocks. The swimming hole stays cold year-round but refreshes summer visitors. Arrive early as parking fills quickly.
Lunch: Indian Gardens Cafe in Oak Creek Canyon serves casual sandwiches with shaded creek-side patio seating.
Afternoon: Return to Sedona for the Chapel of the Holy Cross, built directly into red rock cliffs. The architectural marvel requires a short walk from the parking lot but delivers stunning views. Browse Tlaquepaque Arts Village for galleries and shops in a Mexican-inspired plaza. Local artists showcase paintings, jewelry, and sculptures.
Evening: Final sunset from Airport Mesa vortex if you missed sunrise, or try Schnebly Hill Vista for elevated views. Dinner at Mariposa for Latin-inspired upscale dining with expansive red rock vistas. Their sunset views rival the food. End with drinks at Sound Bites Grill, featuring live music nightly.
Three days capture Sedona’s essence perfectly for first-time visitors or couples celebrating special occasions. This itinerary balances hiking with wellness experiences, making it ideal for anniversaries, milestone birthdays, or friend reunions seeking both adventure and relaxation. You’ll experience the area’s diverse character from rugged trails to art galleries.
Day 1: Red Rock Immersion
Morning: Breakfast at Pump House Station Urban Eatery for creative morning fare. Their avocado toast and breakfast burritos fuel hiking. Head to Devil’s Bridge Trail for Sedona’s largest natural arch. The moderate 4.2-mile round trip is rewarded with a dramatic arch spanning a canyon gap. Arrive by 7 AM to beat crowds and heat.
Afternoon: Cool off at Crescent Moon Ranch day-use area. This Oak Creek spot offers swimming, picnicking, and Cathedral Rock views. The iconic red rock reflection in calm creek waters creates Sedona’s most photographed scene. Rental equipment available for kayaking or stand-up paddleboarding.
Lunch: Pack picnic supplies from New Frontiers Natural Marketplace before heading to the creek.
Evening: Sunset from Airport Mesa vortex. The sweeping 360-degree views encompass most major formations at once. Dinner at Cucina Rustica for Italian cuisine in the Village of Oak Creek. Their wood-fired pizzas and pasta satisfy heartily. End with stargazing away from town lights, where dark skies reveal endless stars.
Day 2: Vortex Energy and Wellness
Morning: Book a vortex tour with an experienced guide explaining energy sites and local history. Multiple companies offer half-day tours visiting Bell Rock, Cathedral Rock, and Boynton Canyon. These tours provide context about Sedona’s spiritual reputation. Alternatively, hike Boynton Canyon independently. The moderate 6-mile trail passes through a reported vortex site with beautiful red canyon walls.
Lunch: ChocolaTree Organic Eatery serves vegetarian cuisine in a garden setting. Everything is organic, gluten-free, and house-made. Their raw chocolate treats from the in-house factory make a perfect dessert.
Afternoon: Spa time at one of Sedona’s world-class wellness centers. Mii amo Spa, Enchantment Resort’s spa, or L’Auberge offer treatments incorporating vortex energy, red rock views, and local ingredients. Book a massage, facial, or sound healing. Many spas require advance reservations and minimum ages for treatments.
Evening: Dinner at Dahl & DiLuca for fine dining Italian in a romantic villa setting. This award-winning restaurant delivers special occasion elegance. Alternatively, keep it casual at Oak Creek Brewery & Grill for house-brewed beer and pub food on their second-floor patio.
Day 3: Art and Adventure
Morning: Pink Jeep Tour provides an off-road adventure accessing the remote red rock backcountry. The Broken Arrow tour is most popular with dramatic terrain and sweeping vistas. Tours run 2-3 hours, departing morning and afternoon. The rugged ride delivers thrills and photo opportunities impossible to reach independently.
Lunch: Butterfly Burger for elevated burgers and craft cocktails post-jeep tour.
Afternoon: Browse Uptown Sedona galleries featuring Southwestern art, photography, and sculpture. Jordan Road and Highway 89A host dozens of galleries. Stop at Tlaquepaque Arts Village for more shopping in a charming Mexican-style plaza. The architecture alone warrants photos. Coffee break at Oak Creek Espresso for locally roasted beans.
Evening: Final sunset at Schnebly Hill Vista requires a high-clearance vehicle or a short hike. The elevated viewpoint offers a different perspective on the red rock country. Farewell dinner at Cress on Oak Creek at L’Auberge. This fine-dining creek-side restaurant showcases French technique with Arizona ingredients. The romantic setting suits celebrations.
Four days lets you dig deeper into Sedona’s distinct areas while hitting major trails. This works perfectly for families with older kids or groups wanting both hiking and downtime. You’ll balance famous spots with hidden gems that locals actually frequent.
Day 1: South Sedona Trails
Morning: Breakfast at Secret Garden Cafe for healthy options and garden patio seating. Their smoothie bowls and egg dishes use organic ingredients. Hike Bell Rock Pathway starting at Bell Rock Vista parking. The 3.6-mile loop circles this vortex site with multiple trail options for varying fitness levels. Morning light illuminates the formation beautifully.
Afternoon: Continue to Courthouse Butte Loop, adding 4 miles for extended hiking. The trail circles Courthouse Butte with Bell Rock views. Relatively flat terrain makes this accessible for most hikers despite the distance. Pack plenty of water, as the exposed trail offers little shade.
Lunch: Picnic at Bell Rock or grab lunch back in the Village of Oak Creek at Mesa Grill.
Evening: Sunset at Red Rock Crossing with Cathedral Rock reflections in Oak Creek. This swimming and wading area stays popular with families. Dinner at SaltRock Southwest Kitchen at Amara Resort featuring regional cuisine with creative flair. Their patio overlooks the red rocks.
Day 2: West Sedona Adventures
Morning: Drive to Fay Canyon Trail for an easier 2.4-mile hike through a beautiful red rock canyon. The trail ends at a natural arch requiring off-trail scrambling to reach. The canyon walls tower overhead, creating a peaceful, enclosed feeling. Continue to nearby Boynton Canyon if energy remains.
Lunch: Head to Golden Goose American Grill for burgers and steaks with an outdoor patio.
Afternoon: Cool off at Slide Rock State Park if you skipped it earlier. The natural water slides and swimming holes attract families, but the cold creek water refreshes. Wear water shoes and prepare for crowds on summer weekends. Alternatively, visit Red Rock State Park’s gentler trails and visitor center, explaining local ecology.
Evening: Watch sunset from Sunset Vista at Sedona Cultural Park. Dinner at Hudson neighborhood restaurant for upscale casual dining. Their seasonal menu changes regularly but always highlights local ingredients. End with live music at Sound Bites Grill or Red Rock Brewing Company.
Day 3: Jerome Day Trip
Morning: Drive 40 minutes to Jerome, a historic mining town clinging to Cleopatra Hill. This National Historic Landmark features art galleries, shops, and mining history in buildings from the early 1900s. The town’s elevation provides sweeping Verde Valley views. Tour the Jerome State Historic Park’s Douglas Mansion Museum for mining history.
Lunch: Grapes restaurant serves creative cuisine in a restored historic building. Their wine list features Arizona wines from the nearby Verde Valley.
Afternoon: Explore Jerome’s galleries and quirky shops. The Jerome Artists Cooperative showcases local artists’ work. Continue to nearby Clarkdale for Verde Valley wineries. Caduceus Cellars, owned by Maynard James Keenan of Tool, offers tastings. Multiple wineries dot the valley, providing options for wine touring.
Evening: Return to Sedona, stopping at Blazin’ M Ranch in Cottonwood if timing works. This Old West town features a cowboy dinner show with music and comedy. Shows run Wednesday through Saturday evenings, March through October. Alternatively, a simple dinner in Sedona at your rental or casual spot.
Day 4: Hidden Corners
Morning: Breakfast at Mesa Grill near Airport Road. Hike Soldier Pass Trail to Seven Sacred Pools and Devil’s Kitchen sinkhole. The 4-mile trail passes multiple geological features, including arches and sinkholes. The pools hold water after rain, creating photo opportunities. This less-trafficked trail rewards with solitude.
Lunch: Coffee Pot Restaurant for breakfast all day. Their 101 omelet options include everything imaginable.
Afternoon: Visit Palatki Heritage Site, requiring free permits obtained through the Red Rock Ranger District. The ancient cliff dwellings and rock art date back 800+ years. Rangers provide tours explaining the Southern Sinagua people who lived here. The site requires rough road access but reveals fascinating history.
Evening: Final sunset at your favorite vortex site discovered during the week. Farewell dinner at The Hudson or Pump House, depending on vibe preference. Both deliver quality food in neighborhood settings that locals love.
Best Homes to Stay for a 4-Day Sedona Trip: Cathedral View
5 Days in Sedona: The Complete First-Timer’s Journey
Five days reveal Sedona beyond the postcard views and give time to appreciate why people move here for the lifestyle. Perfect for families planning vacations or couples wanting a thorough exploration without rushing. This pace lets you experience the area’s full range from extreme hiking to gentle wellness.
Day 1: Gateway Trails
Morning: Fuel up at Coffee Pot Restaurant before tackling Cathedral Rock via Baldwin Trail. This steep 1.2-mile climb challenges but rewards with summit views. The exposed scramble requires good shoes and comfort with heights. Many turn back before the top, but even halfway delivers stunning perspectives.
Lunch: Indian Gardens Cafe in Oak Creek Canyon provides mid-day refuge with creek-side seating.
Afternoon: Swim at Grasshopper Point day-use area on Oak Creek. The creek’s cold water stays refreshing year-round. Local families frequent this swimming hole with cliff jumping spots for brave souls. Rent paddle boards or kayaks from nearby outfitters for creek exploring.
Evening: Sunset at Airport Mesa, then dinner at Pisa Lisa for wood-fired Neapolitan pizza. Chef Lisa Dahl’s commitment to organic Arizona ingredients shows in creative topping combinations. Their gelato made in-house provides a perfect dessert.
Day 2: Extreme Adventure
Morning: Book an early morning hot air balloon ride with Northern Light Balloon Expeditions or Red Rock Balloons. Flights launch at sunrise, floating over red rock formations from above. The peaceful hour-long drift offers unique perspective and photo opportunities. Champagne toast follows landing.
Lunch: After ballooning, brunch at Creekside American Bistro overlooking Oak Creek.
Afternoon: Afternoon jeep tour exploring backcountry areas inaccessible by regular vehicles. Multiple companies offer various difficulty levels from scenic to extreme. The roughest tours deliver bigger thrills but require strong stomachs. Tours typically run 2.5-3 hours.
Evening: Recover from adventure day with a casual dinner at Cowboy Club featuring elk, buffalo, and rattlesnake alongside traditional steaks. The Old West atmosphere fits Sedona’s rugged character. End with drinks at Vino Di Sedona wine bar.
Day 3: Wellness and Vortexes
Morning: Sunrise yoga or meditation at a vortex site. Several instructors offer guided sessions at Bell Rock, Cathedral Rock, or Airport Mesa. The combination of vortex energy and sunrise light creates a transformative experience for believers and skeptics alike.
Lunch: ChocolaTree for organic vegetarian fare post-yoga.
Afternoon: Full spa afternoon at resort spa or local wellness center. Many offer half-day packages including multiple treatments. Sound healing, crystal therapy, and energy work complement traditional massage and facials. Book ahead as popular times fill weeks in advance.
Evening: Light dinner at Secret Garden Cafe or Indian Gardens to maintain wellness vibe. Alternatively, a stargazing tour reveals Sedona’s dark skies and constellations. Several companies offer tours with telescopes and astronomy guides.
Day 4: Oak Creek Canyon
Morning: Drive scenic Highway 89A through Oak Creek Canyon toward Flagstaff. Stop at overlooks, photographing the dramatic canyon carved by Oak Creek. Pull into West Fork Oak Creek Trail for a stunning 3-mile hike through a narrow canyon with creek crossings. The trail requires wading through water, creating adventure.
Lunch: Indian Gardens Cafe or pack a picnic for the West Fork trail.
Afternoon: Slide Rock State Park swimming, if you haven’t visited yet. The natural slides and pools stay popular, but the cold creek water refreshes. Alternatively, continue to Flagstaff for mountain town exploring and elevation relief from Sedona’s heat.
Evening: Return to Sedona for dinner at The Hudson featuring a rotating seasonal menu. Their commitment to local ingredients and craft cocktails makes them a neighborhood favorite. End at Oak Creek Brewery for house-brewed beers.
Day 5: Art and Culture
Morning: Leisurely breakfast at Pump House Station. Spend the morning gallery hopping through Uptown Sedona and Tlaquepaque. Local artists create Southwestern landscapes, Native American-inspired work, and abstract pieces influenced by red rocks. Many galleries feature artists working in studios.
Lunch: Eat at Tlaquepaque’s El Rincon restaurant for Mexican cuisine in a courtyard setting.
Afternoon: Visit Sedona Heritage Museum, learning town history from the 1870s settlement through tourism development. The small museum preserves pioneer buildings and artifacts. Or tour the Sedona Arts Center, featuring rotating exhibitions and classes in painting, pottery, and sculpture.
Evening: Final sunset at Schnebly Hill Vista or your personal favorite vortex site. Farewell dinner at Mariposa or Cress, depending on budget and occasion. Both restaurants deliver memorable meals with red rock views. Toast five days well spent in Red Rock Country.
Best Homes to Stay for a 5-Day Sedona Adventure: Roca Roja
7 Days in Sedona: Red Rock Living Like a Local
A full week lets you settle into Sedona’s rhythm, discovering why retirees and artists choose this desert town despite summer heat. This itinerary works for remote workers, extended families, or wellness seekers wanting complete immersion. You’ll have time to revisit favorite trails and venture into the surrounding Verde Valley.
Days 1-5: Follow the 5-Day Itinerary
Start with the comprehensive five-day plan covering major hikes, vortexes, wellness, and day trips. This foundation ensures you experience Sedona’s essential character before exploring deeper.
Day 6: Verde Valley Wine Trail
Morning: Breakfast at your rental, then drive to Page Springs for Verde Valley wine tasting. This Arizona wine region produces surprising quality despite the desert climate. Start at Page Springs Cellars overlooking Oak Creek. Their Rhone-style wines and creek-side setting create a perfect morning.
Afternoon: Continue to nearby wineries, including Arizona Stronghold, Javelina Leap, and Alcantara Vineyards. Most wineries offer tastings daily with food trucks or picnic areas. The scenic valley with red rocks rising provides a beautiful backdrop. Plan a designated driver or book a wine tour transport.
Lunch: Most wineries allow picnics or have food trucks on weekends.
Evening: Return to Sedona, stopping at Montezuma Castle National Monument if timing permits. The ancient cliff dwelling built into limestone cliffs dates to the 1100s. A short walk from the parking lot provides views. Dinner at Thai Spices for fresh Thai cuisine adapted for vegetarian options.
Day 7: Your Choice Day
Morning: Sleep in and enjoy a leisurely breakfast at a favorite spot discovered during the week. Maybe return to Coffee Pot Restaurant or try Red Rock Cafe for blue corn huevos rancheros in a strip mall setting locals love.
Afternoon: Options abound for the final day. Revisit favorite trail, explore neighborhoods you haven’t fully seen, or book a final spa treatment. Munds Wagon Trail offers an easier 4-mile option if legs are tired. Shopping for local art and crystals makes meaningful souvenirs.
Lunch: Butterfly Burger or Golden Goose, depending on location.
Evening: Final sunset from Schnebly Hill Vista requires a high-clearance vehicle but delivers panoramic red rock views. Or stick with accessible Airport Mesa. Splurge on dinner at Dahl & DiLuca or Cress for a special farewell meal. Alternatively, keep it casual at a local favorite. End with night sky viewing away from town lights. The dark sky preserve status means spectacular star visibility.
Best Homes to Stay for a 7-Day Sedona Experience: Pyramid
10 Days in Sedona: Total Arizona Immersion
Ten days transform Sedona from a destination to a temporary home. This extended stay suits digital nomads, sabbatical travelers, or anyone craving complete desert immersion. You’ll establish routines, discover secret trails, and venture across Northern Arizona exploring the broader region.
Days 1-7: Follow the 7-Day Itinerary
Complete the week-long plan, ensuring comprehensive Sedona coverage from vortexes to wineries. By day seven, you’ll know your favorite cafes and trails.
Day 8: Grand Canyon Day Trip
Morning: Leave early (6 AM) for a 2.5-hour drive to the Grand Canyon South Rim. Stop in Flagstaff for coffee and breakfast supplies. The scenic drive through pine forests contrasts dramatically with Sedona’s red rocks. Arrive at Grand Canyon by 9 AM, beating peak crowds.
Afternoon: Walk rim trail between viewpoints, experiencing the canyon’s immensity. Mather Point, Yavapai Point, and Yaki Point offer different perspectives. Hike into the canyon on Bright Angel or South Kaibab trails if energy permits. Even 30 minutes down reveals changing geology layers.
Lunch: Pack lunch for Grand Canyon or eat at rim cafeterias.
Evening: Return to Sedona exhausted but awed. The 5-hour round-trip drive plus hiking makes for a long day. A simple dinner near the rental or delivery lets you rest and process the full day.
Day 9: Montezuma Castle and Verde Valley
Morning: Drive to Montezuma Castle National Monument, exploring the well-preserved cliff dwelling. Rangers provide context about the Southern Sinagua people. Continue to nearby Montezuma Well, a natural limestone sinkhole with ancient irrigation systems.
Lunch: Camp Verde offers casual dining options, including El Ranchero for Mexican food.
Afternoon: Visit Tuzigoot National Monument, another hilltop pueblo ruin with Verde Valley views. The visitor center explains ancient agriculture and trade networks. Or tour Jerome’s mines and ghost town character if you skipped earlier. Blazin’ M Ranch cowboy dinner show runs select evenings if you want Western entertainment.
Evening: Return to Sedona for dinner at Pump House or Hudson. Both neighborhood restaurants deliver quality without pretense. Reflect on ten days knowing you’ve truly experienced Red Rock Country beyond tourism.
Day 10: Favorite Spots and Farewell
Morning: Return to a favorite breakfast spot from the week. Maybe Coffee Pot Restaurant or try Red Rock Cafe, you kept meaning to visit. Final morning hike to your preferred vortex or trail. Bell Rock, Cathedral Rock, or Airport Mesa each offers different energy and views.
Lunch: Last meal at Elote Cafe if you couldn’t get reservations earlier, or grab takeout from Wildflower Bread Company for the final creek-side picnic.
Afternoon: Last-minute shopping for crystals, art, or local products. Sedona’s crystal shops offer stones from worldwide sources. Many shops provide guidance on choosing crystals based on energy or intention. Or simply sit at your favorite viewpoint reflecting on ten days immersed in red rock beauty.
Evening: Sunset from your personal favorite vortex site. Farewell dinner at Mariposa, Cress, or Dahl & DiLuca, depending on celebration level. These upscale restaurants provide memorable final meals. Toast ten days well spent in Arizona’s spiritual heart.
Best Homes to Stay for a 10-Day Sedona Immersion: Mystic Sunset
If You Have Extra Time
If you have extra time or are looking for other things to do in Sedona, consider exploring these places to make your trip even more memorable.
Day Trips Beyond Sedona
Flagstaff: One hour north, this mountain town offers elevation relief from Sedona’s heat. Historic Route 66 downtown features breweries, restaurants, and shops. Lowell Observatory lets you view stars through research telescopes. Arizona Snowbowl provides summer chairlift rides and winter skiing.
Antelope Canyon: Three hours northeast near Page, these slot canyons create a photographer’s paradise. Tours are required for both Upper and Lower Antelope Canyon. Book months ahead for peak season. Horseshoe Bend sits nearby for dramatic Colorado River views.
Petrified Forest National Park: Two hours east showcases ancient petrified wood and Painted Desert landscapes. The park requires a half-day minimum for driving the scenic loop and short hikes. Fewer crowds than in other Arizona parks.
Hidden Sedona Gems
Honanki and Palatki Heritage Sites: These cliff dwellings require permits but reveal impressive rock art and structures. Rangers provide tours explaining Southern Sinagua culture. The rough road access keeps crowds minimal.
Secret Canyon Trail: This 5-mile trail near Dry Creek Road offers solitude compared to popular routes. The narrow canyon walls tower overhead, creating a peaceful hiking experience. Local secret worth discovering.
Verde River Greenway: Outside Cottonwood, this riparian area provides birding and easy trails along the Verde River. The lush corridor contrasts with the surrounding desert. Kayaking and tubing are popular in the warmer months.
Not sure where to stay? Check out our curated lists of top Airbnbs in Sedona for neighborhood-specific recommendations.
Getting Around Sedona
Sedona sprawls across red rock formations with limited public transportation. Most visitors drive rentals or personal vehicles. Understanding road conditions and parking challenges helps maximize hiking time while minimizing frustration.
Rental Cars: Essential for Sedona exploring. Book ahead as availability gets tight during peak seasons (March-May, October). Expect $50-100 daily, depending on vehicle type. Standard sedans handle most roads, though high-clearance vehicles access more remote trailheads. Many popular trails require high-clearance or 4WD for the last mile to the parking.
Parking Challenges: Popular trailheads fill early on weekends and peak season. Cathedral Rock, Devil’s Bridge, and Bell Rock parking lots fill by 8 AM, November through April. Arrive before 7 AM or after 4 PM for easier parking. Many trails now require a Red Rock Pass ($5 daily, $15 weekly, $20 annual) purchased at visitor centers or online.
Driving Conditions: Highway 89A connects major areas with easy driving. Some trailheads require rough dirt roads unsuitable for low-clearance vehicles. Schnebly Hill Road, Soldier Pass Road, and roads to remote sites need high clearance. Winter snow occasionally closes Oak Creek Canyon Highway. Summer monsoons create flash flood risks in washes.
Rideshare: Uber and Lyft operate in Sedona, but availability varies. Service to trailheads may be unreliable. Expect higher prices than in urban areas. Most visitors need personal transportation for hiking access.
Biking: E-bikes and regular bikes offer alternative transportation on paved roads. Multiple shops rent bikes daily or weekly. However, narrow roads without bike lanes make cycling risky. Mountain biking trails exist, but hiking trails prohibit bikes.
Where to Stay in Sedona
Choosing the right home base shapes your entire Sedona experience. AvantStay offers premium vacation rentals across Sedona’s best locations. From Uptown condos to Village of Oak Creek homes, our curated collection of Sedona homes is perfect for desert exploring.
Why Choose AvantStay
Unlike traditional vacation rentals, AvantStay properties are professionally managed with consistent quality standards. Every home features thoughtful design, high-end furnishings, and modern amenities, making your stay comfortable and memorable. Our properties span from Uptown’s central location to quieter residential areas, ensuring you’re positioned for whatever Sedona experience you’re seeking.
Concierge Services and Upgrades
AvantStay’s personal concierge service elevates your vacation beyond simple accommodation. We handle the details so you can focus on experiencing Sedona’s red rock magic.
Mid-Stay Cleaning: Keep your space fresh during extended stays, so you can relax without worrying about upkeep during your desert adventure.
Bring Your Pets: AvantStay encourages time spent with loved ones, and pets are no exception. We offer pet-friendly properties where your furry family members are welcome.
Private Chef: Elevate your dining experience with a personal chef creating Southwestern-inspired cuisine without restaurant waits.
Stocked Fridge: Skip the grocery store hassle and let us handle the shopping. Send us your list or select from our curated packages featuring local Arizona products.
Transportation: Need a ride to trailheads, the airport, or day trips? We arrange reliable transportation throughout your stay, exploring Sedona stress-free.
Find Local Child Care: Traveling with kids but want adults-only spa time? We help you find and hire local sitters with detailed profiles, references, and reviews.
In-Home Massage: Perfect after hiking, indulge in ultimate relaxation without leaving your rental with spa-quality treatments.
Rent Baby Gear: Traveling with a baby doesn’t mean packing your entire nursery. Rent cribs, strollers, car seats, hiking carriers, and more.
For other requests, rentals, or special occasion setups, our concierge team handles whatever makes your Sedona vacation exceptional.
Book Through the AvantStay App
Download the AvantStay app to browse properties, manage bookings, and access concierge services all in one place. The app provides 24/7 support, check-in details, local recommendations, and direct messaging with our team.
Before you scramble up Cathedral Rock, a little preparation goes a long way. These essential travel tips will help you feel at ease while having the best Sedona experience.
Getting To and From Phoenix Airport
Most visitors fly into Phoenix Sky Harbor International Airport (PHX), 2 hours south of Sedona. The scenic drive north through the Sonoran Desert transitions to high desert and finally red rocks. Flagstaff Pulliam Airport (FLG) sits just 45 minutes north but offers limited flights.
Airport Transportation: Rental cars provide the most flexibility. All major companies operate from Phoenix Airport’s consolidated rental facility. Shuttle services like Arizona Shuttle and Groome Transportation offer shared rides to Sedona for $50-60 per person. Rideshare from Phoenix costs $150-200, making it impractical for most travelers.
Driving to Sedona: From Phoenix, take I-17 north to Highway 179 (exit 298) for the most scenic approach through the Village of Oak Creek. Alternatively, continue on Highway 89A (exit 337) approaching Sedona through Oak Creek Canyon. The canyon route is gorgeous but narrow, with switchbacks making it challenging for large vehicles or nervous drivers.
Packing for Sedona
Year-Round Essentials: Sturdy hiking shoes with ankle support, multiple water bottles or hydration pack, sun protection (hat, sunglasses, reef-safe sunscreen), layers for temperature changes, and comfortable clothes for dining out. Trekking poles help on steep trails. Bring your own gear, as rentals add up.
Spring/Fall (March-May, September-November): Perfect weather with 65-80°F days. Pack layers as mornings start cool. Light jacket for evenings. These peak seasons bring crowds, so book ahead. Occasional rain is possible, especially during spring.
Summer (June-August): Prepare for heat with temperatures reaching 95-105°F. Morning hikes are essential before the afternoon heat. Light, breathable clothing. Monsoon season (July-September) brings afternoon thunderstorms. Pack a rain jacket and avoid narrow canyons during storms due to flash flood risk. Evenings cool pleasantly.
Winter (December-February): Mild days (45-60°F) but freezing nights. Pack warm layers, including a jacket and long pants. Snow is possible, though infrequent, in town. Higher elevations, including Flagstaff, receive regular snow. Oak Creek Canyon sometimes closes due to ice.
Practical Sedona Preparation
Elevation: Sedona sits at 4,500 feet. Some visitors experience mild altitude effects, including fatigue or headaches. Drink extra water and take it easy first day. Flagstaff sits at 7,000 feet when doing day trips.
Weather Extremes: Desert weather changes rapidly. Summer afternoon thunderstorms appear suddenly. Lightning strikes are dangerous on exposed ridges. Flash floods fill washes within minutes. Monitor weather forecasts and start hikes early. Winter can bring surprise snow or ice, making trails treacherous.
Wildlife: Rattlesnakes, scorpions, and black widow spiders inhabit the desert. Watch where you place your hands and feet on trails. Javelina, coyotes, and occasional mountain lions live in the area. Keep a distance from all wildlife. Store food properly if camping.
Costs: Sedona prices reflect resort-town status. Expect $15-30 for casual meals, $40-80 for nice dinners, $7-10 for craft beers, and $12-18 for cocktails. Groceries at local stores cost more than in Phoenix. Activities range from free hiking to $200+ for jeep tours and $300+ for hot air balloons.
Reservations: Book accommodations months ahead for peak seasons (spring and fall). Popular restaurants like Elote Cafe, Mariposa, and Cress require advance reservations. Tours and spa treatments fill quickly. Some trailheads now require permits obtained online.
Sun Protection: Desert sun is intense at 4,500 feet. Wear sunscreen even in winter. Wide-brimmed hats and sunglasses protect against glare off red rocks. Start hikes before 9 AM during summer to avoid peak heat and sun exposure.
More Questions About Your Sedona Trip?
Planning a Red Rock Country adventure involves countless details, and we’re here to help. Whether you need recommendations for group-friendly properties, locations near trails, or homes with specific amenities, our team can answer questions and guide your booking process.
Contact us via:
Email: experience@avantstay.com
Phone: (833) 442-8268
Let Red Rocks Work Their Magic
Crimson formations glowing at sunset, vortex energy tingling up your spine, that first view from Cathedral Rock summit. Oak Creek running cold over smooth stones, the Milky Way stretching overhead in a dark desert sky, red dust coating your hiking boots like a badge.
The memories you create here will absolutely become the stories you’ll tell for years. Sedona is the perfect place for wellness seekers, hikers, photographers, and adventurers seeking Southwestern beauty.
The Gathering Place isn’t just a nickname here. Oahu brings together volcanic mountains, world-class surfing, and a cultural melting pot that defines modern Hawaii. This island houses Honolulu’s urban energy while maintaining pristine beaches and rural North Shore vibes just 40 minutes away.
From Pearl Harbor’s solemn history to Waikiki’s endless beaches, the island offers adventures for every traveler type. Whether you’re hiking Diamond Head at sunrise, learning to surf on gentle Waikiki waves, or watching massive winter swells pound the North Shore, Oahu delivers island paradise without ever feeling too remote.
This guide breaks down the perfect Oahu itinerary, whether for a quick stopover between islands or a full week exploring Hawaii’s most visited destination.
Planning your trip? Check out our guide on the best time to visit Oahu for ideal weather and events before building your itinerary.
2 Days in Oahu: 48 Hours Island Sprint
This fast-paced itinerary works for travelers island-hopping through Hawaii or business visitors extending their trip. You’ll experience Oahu’s most iconic moments without spreading yourself thin. Perfect for couples wanting Instagram-worthy beaches and cultural history packed into one power weekend.
Day 1: Waikiki and Diamond Head
Morning: Start with sunrise at Diamond Head Crater. The 0.8-mile hike takes 40 minutes up with stunning Honolulu and Pacific views from the summit. Reservations are required, so book weeks ahead. Return to Waikiki for breakfast at Heavenly Island Lifestyle for acai bowls and local coffee.
Afternoon: Hit Waikiki Beach for swimming and surfing lessons. Dozens of surf schools line the beach, offering beginner-friendly waves. Duke Kahanamoku Beach and Queen’s Beach offer calmer waters than the main Waikiki stretch. Rent a board or simply float in the warm Pacific.
Lunch: Giovanni’s Shrimp Truck near the beach serves garlic shrimp plates that represent local food truck culture. Or grab poke bowls at Ahi Assassins for fresh raw fish.
Evening: Sunset at Magic Island Lagoon next to Ala Moana Beach Park. The protected lagoon creates perfect swimming, and the grassy park hosts locals with picnics and slack key guitar. Dinner at Duke’s Waikiki for beachfront dining with live Hawaiian music. Their hula pie dessert is legendary.
Day 2: Pearl Harbor and North Shore
Morning: Drive to Pearl Harbor for the USS Arizona Memorial. Free but requires advance reservations at recreation.gov. The somber memorial honors the 1,177 sailors killed during the December 7, 1941, attack. Allow 2-3 hours, including the documentary film and boat ride to the memorial.
Lunch: Head north, stopping at Haleiwa town for lunch at Haleiwa Joe’s. Their coconut shrimp and Mai Tais capture North Shore casual dining perfectly.
Afternoon: Continue to the famous North Shore beaches. Waimea Bay offers summer swimming and winter surf spectating. Sunset Beach and Pipeline draw pro surfers from November through February. Stop at Ted’s Bakery for haupia (coconut) cream pie, a North Shore tradition.
Evening: Return to Waikiki, stopping at Dole Plantation for pineapple ice cream. Final dinner at Marukame Udon for authentic Japanese udon noodles at affordable prices. The line moves quickly despite wrapping around the block.
Three days capture Oahu’s essence perfectly for first-time visitors or groups celebrating special occasions. This itinerary balances beach time with cultural experiences, making it ideal for honeymoons, anniversaries, or friend reunions. You’ll experience the island’s diverse character from urban Honolulu to the rural windward coast.
Day 1: Honolulu and Waikiki Culture
Morning: Breakfast at Koko Head Cafe in Kaimuki for creative island-style brunch. Their cornflake French toast and scallop hash showcase local ingredients with global techniques. Walk off breakfast, exploring the neighborhood’s local shops.
Afternoon: Tour Iolani Palace downtown, America’s only royal palace. Guided tours reveal the Hawaiian monarchy’s history before the 1893 overthrow. Continue to Bishop Museum for comprehensive Polynesian and Hawaiian cultural exhibits. The planetarium show explains traditional wayfinding navigation.
Lunch: Helena’s Hawaiian Food serves authentic local cuisine in a no-frills setting. Their laulau, pipikaula, and poi represent traditional Hawaiian flavors. This James Beard Award winner maintains recipes passed through generations.
Evening: Sunset catamaran cruise from Waikiki Beach with cocktails and whale watching (December-April). Dinner at Roy’s Waikiki for Hawaiian fusion cuisine from Chef Roy Yamaguchi. End with drinks at RumFire for beachfront lounging with fire pits.
Day 2: Windward Coast Adventure
Morning: Drive over the Pali Highway, stopping at the Nuuanu Pali Lookout for dramatic windward coast views. Continue to Kailua Beach, consistently rated among Oahu’s best beaches. The turquoise water and soft white sand create postcard scenery. Rent kayaks to paddle to the Mokulua Islands offshore.
Lunch: Kalapawai Cafe in Kailua serves sandwiches and salads perfect for beach picnics. Or grab lunch at Buzz’s Original Steakhouse for beachfront casual dining since 1962.
Afternoon: Drive to Lanikai Beach for the famous pillbox hike. The 30-minute climb offers sweeping coastal views with turquoise water below. Continue north to Kualoa Ranch for ATV tours, horseback riding, or movie site tours through valleys featured in Jurassic Park and Lost.
Evening: Return via the scenic coastal route, stopping at Chinaman’s Hat viewpoint. Dinner at Mud Hen Water in Kaimuki offers innovative Hawaiian cuisine in a neighborhood setting. Their poke and local fish preparations showcase island flavors.
Day 3: North Shore and Cultural Sites
Morning: Drive directly to North Shore for breakfast at Haleiwa Beach House. Walk through Haleiwa town exploring surf shops, shave ice stands, and art galleries. This former sugar plantation town maintains authentic North Shore character.
Afternoon: Visit the Polynesian Cultural Center in Laie. This full-day experience showcases Pacific Island cultures through villages, demonstrations, and an evening luau show. Book the Ali’i Luau package for the best seating and buffet. If you skip PCC, explore North Shore beaches and snorkel at Shark’s Cove.
Lunch: Giovanni’s Shrimp Truck or Romy’s Kahuku Prawns for the famous North Shore shrimp experience. Eat at picnic tables while chickens roam.
Evening: Sunset at Sunset Beach, watching surfers tackle winter waves or swimmers enjoy summer calm. Return to Waikiki, stopping at Ted’s Bakery for chocolate haupia pie. Final dinner at Sushi Sho for omakase-style Japanese fine dining.
Four days lets you dig deeper into Oahu’s distinct regions while hitting major attractions. This works perfectly for families with kids or groups wanting both adventure and beach relaxation. You’ll balance famous spots with local neighborhoods that residents actually frequent.
Day 1: Waikiki and Diamond Head
Morning: Sunrise hike at Diamond Head (reservations required). The crater trail rewards early risers with panoramic views before the heat intensifies. Breakfast at Bogart’s Cafe in Chinatown for local-style plate lunches adapted for breakfast.
Afternoon: Waikiki Beach time with surfing lessons or simply swimming. Walk to the Duke Kahanamoku statue for photos and learn about Hawaii’s legendary Olympic swimmer and surfing ambassador. Browse the Royal Hawaiian Center for Hawaiian crafts and free hula shows.
Lunch: Marukame Udon for affordable, authentic Japanese noodles. The line moves despite its length.
Evening: Attend a luau at either Paradise Cove or Toa Luau. These cultural shows include the imu ceremony, traditional dances, and a feast featuring kalua pig, poi, and haupia. Book ahead for the best seating. The luaus typically run 5-9 PM.
Day 2: Pearl Harbor and History
Morning: Pearl Harbor National Memorial, starting with the USS Arizona (free, requires reservations). The Battleship Missouri offers add-on tickets to explore the deck where Japan surrendered, ending WWII. Allow 4-5 hours for the complete Pearl Harbor experience, including the USS Bowfin submarine and aviation museum.
Lunch: Nico’s Pier 38 near the harbor serves fresh fish plates and poke bowls. Their furikake ahi is outstanding, and portions are generous.
Afternoon: Drive to downtown Honolulu for the Iolani Palace tour if you missed it earlier. Walk through Chinatown’s markets, herbalists, and lei shops. Foster Botanical Garden offers peaceful tropical plant collections in the middle of the city.
Evening: Dinner at The Pig and the Lady for modern Vietnamese-Hawaiian fusion. Chef Andrew Le’s creative menu changes seasonally but always surprises. End with craft cocktails at Bar Leather Apron, a hidden speakeasy requiring reservations.
Day 3: Windward Oahu
Morning: Drive to the windward side via Pali Highway. Stop at Valley of the Temples for the replica Byodo-In Temple nestled against dramatic cliffs. The peaceful grounds and koi ponds create a meditative atmosphere.
Lunch: Keneke’s Grill in Kaneohe for local plate lunches. Their loco moco and kalua pork represent authentic Hawaiian comfort food.
Afternoon: Kailua Beach for swimming, kayaking to Flat Island, or stand-up paddleboarding. The beach park facilities and calm waters make this family-friendly. Or drive to Lanikai for the pillbox hike offering Instagram-worthy coastal views.
Evening: Return, stopping at Kailua town for window shopping and dinner at Moke’s Bread and Breakfast. Yes, breakfast for dinner works perfectly here. Their macadamia nut pancakes and liliko butter are legendary. Or try Kalapawai Market for sandwiches and local vibes.
Day 4: North Shore and Central Oahu
Morning: Drive to Dole Plantation for the pineapple express train and maze. Tourist-heavy, but kids love it. Continue to North Shore, stopping at Laniakea Beach to see Hawaiian green sea turtles basking on the sand.
Lunch: Haleiwa for shrimp trucks and town exploring. Food trucks line Kamehameha Highway, serving various shrimp preparations. Giovanni’s is most famous, but the lines are longest. Try Romy’s or Fumi’s for shorter waits.
Afternoon: Visit Waimea Valley with botanical gardens and waterfall swimming. The easy paved path leads to a waterfall where swimming is allowed in the pool below. Lifeguards on duty and life jackets provided. Continue to Shark’s Cove for snorkeling when seas are calm (summer only).
Evening: Sunset at Sunset Beach, then dinner at Haleiwa Beach House overlooking the harbor. Fresh fish and Mai Tais as the sun sets over the Pacific. Return to Waikiki via H-2 and H-1 freeways for faster evening travel.
5 Days in Oahu: The Complete First-Timer’s Journey
Five days reveal Oahu beyond Waikiki beaches and give you time to appreciate why Hawaii is called paradise. Perfect for families planning vacations or couples wanting to have a thorough exploration without rushing. This pace lets you experience the island’s full range, from urban Honolulu to rural countryside.
Day 1: Waikiki Foundations
Morning: Breakfast at Musubi Cafe Iyasume for authentic Japanese musubi and bentos. Walk to Waikiki Beach for swimming before crowds arrive. The section fronting the Royal Hawaiian Hotel offers prime people-watching.
Afternoon: Surfing lesson with one of Waikiki’s many surf schools. The gentle rolling waves provide perfect learning conditions. Even complete beginners typically stand up within the first hour. Waikiki’s surf instructors pioneered modern surf tourism and maintain high teaching standards.
Lunch: Duke’s Waikiki for beachfront casual dining. Their fish tacos and burgers satisfy post-surf hunger perfectly.
Evening: Walk the Waikiki Beach Walk shopping and dining area. Dinner at Hula Grill Waikiki for Hawaiian regional cuisine with sunset views. End with fire knife dancing and a hula show at various Waikiki hotels offering free performances.
Day 2: History and Culture
Morning: Pearl Harbor early arrival (7 AM) beats crowds. Tour the USS Arizona Memorial, USS Bowfin submarine, and Battleship Missouri. The complete Pearl Harbor experience requires 4-5 hours. Each exhibit reveals different aspects of WWII Pacific theater history.
Lunch: Nico’s Pier 38 for poke bowls and fresh fish plates near Pearl Harbor. Local families and fishermen eat here regularly.
Afternoon: Downtown Honolulu for the Iolani Palace tour and the Hawaii State Capitol. Walk through historic Kawaiahao Church and Mission Houses Museum. Foster Botanical Garden offers tropical plant collections if you need green space.
Evening: Chinatown exploration, including dinner at The Pig and the Lady. This innovative restaurant blends Vietnamese and Hawaiian flavors, creating unique dishes. Walk through Chinatown’s bars afterward with craft cocktails at Manifest or Bar Leather Apron.
Day 3: Windward Paradise
Morning: Drive over Pali Highway, stopping at the lookout. The windswept cliffs offer dramatic coastal views. Continue to Kailua Beach for morning swimming and kayaking. Flat Island offshore makes a worthy kayaking destination with seabirds nesting.
Lunch: Kalapawai Cafe in Kailua for sandwiches and locally-sourced ingredients. Eat on the patio watching beachgoers pass.
Afternoon: Lanikai pillbox hike for turquoise water views with the Mokulua Islands offshore. The steep 30-minute climb is rewarded with panoramic windward coast scenery. Drive north to Kualoa Ranch for ATV tours, horseback riding, or simply admiring the dramatic mountain scenery.
Evening: Sunset at Kualoa Regional Park with Chinaman’s Hat island offshore. Return to Waikiki, stopping for dinner at Highway Inn in Kakaako for traditional Hawaiian food. Their kalua pork and lomi salmon represent authentic island flavors.
Day 4: North Shore Adventures
Morning: Early drive to North Shore via H-2. Stop at Dole Plantation if traveling with kids. Continue to Haleiwa for breakfast at Haleiwa Beach House overlooking the harbor. The açaí bowls and omelets fuel North Shore exploring.
Afternoon: Beach hopping between Waimea Bay, Sunset Beach, and Pipeline. Winter brings massive surf competitions while summer offers calm swimming. Snorkel at Sharks Cove or Three Tables when the seas are flat (May-September). The lava rock formations create protected pools teeming with tropical fish.
Lunch: Shrimp trucks for the quintessential North Shore experience. Giovanni’s, Romy’s, or Fumi’s all serve excellent garlic shrimp plates.
Evening: Sunset at Sunset Beach, then explore Haleiwa town’s surf shops and galleries. Dinner at Ted’s Bakery for plate lunches, or splurge at Haleiwa Joe’s for seafood and steaks. Don’t skip Ted’s haupia cream pie either way.
Day 5: Southeast Oahu and Relax
Morning: Drive the scenic southeast coast to Hanauma Bay Nature Preserve (reservations required, closed Mondays and Tuesdays). This protected marine sanctuary offers outstanding snorkeling with hundreds of tropical fish species. Arrive early as daily visitor caps fill quickly.
Lunch: Kono’s on the North Shore has a Hawaii Kai location for casual breakfast-lunch plates. Or grab local food trucks near Sandy Beach.
Afternoon: Continue the coastal loop past Sandy Beach, Halona Blowhole, and Makapuu Lighthouse Trail. The easy paved trail offers whale watching viewpoints in winter. Finish at Waimanalo Beach, Oahu’s longest stretch of white sand, and a local favorite, rarely crowded.
Evening: Return to Waikiki for sunset beach time and final dinner at Roy’s or Azure at the Royal Hawaiian. These upscale restaurants showcase Hawaii regional cuisine with Pacific Rim influences. Toast your Oahu adventure with signature cocktails, watching waves lap the shore.
A full week lets you settle into Oahu’s rhythm, discovering why locals defend this island despite tourism pressures. This itinerary works for remote workers, extended families, or anyone wanting a thorough exploration beyond tourist zones. You’ll have time to revisit favorite beaches and venture into residential neighborhoods.
Days 1-5: Follow the 5-Day Itinerary
Start with the comprehensive five-day plan covering Waikiki, Pearl Harbor, the windward coast, and the North Shore. This foundation ensures you experience Oahu’s essential character before exploring deeper.
Day 6: Central Oahu and West Side
Morning: Breakfast at Liliha Bakery for their famous Coco Puffs and local plate lunches. Multiple locations make this convenient. Drive central Oahu through pineapple fields and past Schofield Barracks.
Afternoon: Visit the Waianae Coast (west side), often overlooked by tourists. Makaha Beach offers excellent surfing and local character. Ko Olina Lagoons provide protected swimming in man-made coves surrounded by resorts. Paradise Cove hosts one of Oahu’s better luaus if you haven’t attended one yet.
Lunch: Monkeypod Kitchen in Ko Olina for farm-to-table cuisine and craft cocktails. Their fish tacos and burgers capture island casual dining.
Evening: Sunset at Electric Beach near the power plant. The warm water discharge attracts tropical fish and occasional dolphins, making this a popular snorkel and dive site. Dinner back in Honolulu at Mud Hen Water or MW Restaurant for innovative local cuisine.
Day 7: Your Choice Day
Morning: Sleep in and enjoy a leisurely breakfast at your favorite spot discovered during the week. Maybe return to Koko Head Cafe or try Morning Glass Coffee for acai bowls and local coffee.
Afternoon: Options abound for your final day. Revisit your favorite beach, explore neighborhoods you haven’t fully seen, or simply relax poolside. Manoa Falls Trail offers easy rainforest hiking if you want more adventure. The 1.6-mile round trip leads to a 150-foot waterfall.
Lunch: Rainbow Drive-In for authentic local plate lunches. This Waikiki institution, since 1961 served generous portions of loco moco, teriyaki chicken, and chili with rice.
Evening: Final sunset at your favorite beach, then splurge on dinner at La Mer or Senia for upscale Hawaiian regional cuisine. These award-winning restaurants showcase why Hawaii’s culinary scene rivals anywhere. End with drinks at Sky Waikiki rooftop bar for panoramic city and ocean views.
Ten days transform Oahu from a destination to a temporary home. This extended stay suits digital nomads, sabbatical travelers, or anyone craving complete island immersion. You’ll establish routines, discover secret surf breaks, and experience Oahu’s rhythm beyond tourist timelines.
Days 1-7: Follow the 7-Day Itinerary
Complete the week-long plan, ensuring comprehensive Oahu coverage from Waikiki to North Shore. By day seven, you’ll know your favorite beaches and restaurants.
Day 8: Neighbor Island Day Trip
Morning: Catch an early morning flight to Maui or the Big Island for a day trip exploring another Hawaiian island. Inter-island flights run hourly and take just 30-45 minutes. Rent a car at the destination airport. Maui’s Road to Hana or Big Island’s Volcano National Park make worthy day trips, though both deserve longer stays.
Afternoon: Explore your chosen island’s highlights before catching a late afternoon flight back to Oahu. The day trip reveals Hawaii’s island diversity, with each offering distinct character and landscapes.
Evening: Return to Oahu exhausted but enriched. A simple dinner near your rental or delivery lets you rest and process the full day of exploring.
Day 9: Local Neighborhoods
Morning: Explore the Kaimuki neighborhood with breakfast at Koko Head Cafe or Town. This residential area features local restaurants, vintage shops, and the historic Kaimuki Theatre. Walk Waialae Avenue, discovering why locals love living here.
Lunch: Ono Seafood for excellent poke bowls and ahi poke. This tiny shop serves what many consider Oahu’s best poke using sustainably caught fish.
Afternoon: Visit the Shangri La Museum of Islamic Art, Culture & Design (tours by reservation only). Doris Duke’s former estate showcases Islamic art collections in a stunning oceanfront setting. Tours run Wednesdays through Saturdays with advance booking essential.
Evening: Sunset at Diamond Head Beach Park or Kaimana Beach, locals’ favorites, avoiding Waikiki crowds. Final dinner at MW Restaurant for chef Wade Ueoka’s creative tasting menus. The intimate space and ever-changing menu showcase Hawaii’s seasonal ingredients.
Day 10: Favorite Spots and Farewell
Morning: Return to your favorite beach for the final ocean time. Maybe it’s Kailua’s turquoise waters, Lanikai’s perfect sand, or a North Shore spot you discovered. Savor knowing these waters have become familiar friends.
Lunch: Final plate lunch at Rainbow Drive-In or Helena’s Hawaiian Food. You’ve earned opinions about Hawaiian food by now.
Afternoon: Last-minute shopping for Hawaiian products at the Made in Hawaii Festival, if timing works, or browse local boutiques for island-made goods. Visit spots you meant to see but didn’t prioritize. Or simply sit at Waikiki Beach watching tourists discover what you’ve known all week.
Evening: Sunset from Magic Island with a local picnic, watching Friday evening fireworks if it’s Friday. Farewell dinner at La Mer, House Without A Key, or your personal favorite discovered during the ten days. Toast Oahu, knowing you’ve truly experienced the Gathering Place beyond tourism.
If you have extra time or are looking for other things to do in Oahu, consider exploring these places to make your trip even more memorable.
Day Trips and Adventures
Skydiving: Pacific Skydiving and Skydive Hawaii offer tandem jumps over Oahu’s North Shore. The views encompass turquoise water, dramatic mountains, and endless Pacific horizons.
Helicopter Tours: Paradise Helicopters and Blue Hawaiian offer doors-off flights revealing Oahu’s hidden valleys, waterfalls, and coastal cliffs inaccessible by land. Sacred Falls and Stairway to Heaven appear from above.
Submarine Tour: Atlantis Submarines dives 100 feet below Waikiki, exploring artificial reefs and shipwrecks. The family-friendly adventure reveals underwater Hawaii without getting wet.
Hidden Gems Worth Finding
Koko Crater Trail: This brutal 1,048-step railway climb rewards summit views encompassing southeast Oahu. The abandoned WWII railway track straight up the crater tests fitness but delivers panoramic payoff.
Manoa Chocolate: Hidden in Kaimuki, this bean-to-bar chocolate factory offers tours showing cacao processing from Hawaiian-grown beans. Tastings include single-origin chocolates showcasing terroir.
Kaena Point Trail: Oahu’s westernmost point, accessed via a 5-mile round-trip coastal hike, reveals monk seals, albatross nests, and dramatic surf crashing against lava cliffs. The sacred spot feels remote despite proximity to Honolulu.
Not sure where to stay? Check out our curated lists of top Airbnbs in Oahu for neighborhood-specific recommendations.
Getting Around Oahu
Oahu covers 597 square miles with concentrated urban Honolulu and spread-out rural areas. Transportation planning helps maximize beach time and minimize traffic frustration. Most visitors rent cars, though Waikiki stays walkable.
Rental Cars: Strongly recommended for exploring beyond Waikiki. Book well ahead as availability tightens during peak seasons. Expect $50-120 daily, depending on vehicle type. Traffic on the H-1 freeway gets heavy during rush hours (6-9 AM and 3-7 PM). Allow extra time for North Shore drives, which take a minimum of 90 minutes from Waikiki despite being only 40 miles.
Public Transportation: TheBus serves the entire island for $3 per ride or $7.50 day pass. Routes connect major areas, but schedules limit spontaneity. The bus works for budget travelers staying in Waikiki and visiting specific destinations. However, beach equipment and coolers make bus travel impractical.
Rideshare: Uber and Lyft operate throughout Oahu with good availability in urban areas. Expect $25-50 from Waikiki to North Shore, $15-25 to the windward side. Service to remote beaches may be limited. Surge pricing affects beach communities during weekends and peak times.
Biki Bikes: Honolulu’s bike share program offers stations throughout urban areas. The $5 per 30-minute or $25 monthly pass works for short trips. However, Hawaii’s heat and hills make biking challenging for casual riders.
Walking: Waikiki, Ala Moana, and downtown Honolulu stay walkable. However, distances between neighborhoods require transportation. Beach hopping and attractions exploring necessitate either a rental car or expensive rideshare costs.
Where to Stay in Oahu
Choosing the right home base shapes your entire Oahu experience. AvantStay offers premium vacation rentals across Oahu’s best locations. From Waikiki condos to North Shore houses, our curated collection positions you perfectly for island exploring.
Why Choose AvantStay
Unlike traditional vacation rentals, AvantStay properties are professionally managed with consistent quality standards. Every home features thoughtful design, high-end furnishings, and modern amenities, making your stay comfortable and memorable.
Our Oahu rentals span from Waikiki’s urban beach energy to quiet residential neighborhoods, ensuring you’re positioned for whatever Hawaiian experience you’re seeking.
Concierge Services and Upgrades
AvantStay’s personal concierge service elevates your vacation beyond simple accommodation. We handle the details so you can focus on experiencing Oahu’s aloha spirit.
Mid-Stay Cleaning: Keep your space fresh during extended stays, so you can relax without worrying about upkeep during your Hawaiian adventure.
Bring Your Pets: AvantStay encourages time spent with loved ones, and pets are no exception. We offer pet-friendly properties where your furry family members are welcome.
Private Chef: Elevate your dining experience with a personal chef creating island-inspired cuisine without restaurant waits.
Stocked Fridge: Skip the grocery store hassle and let us handle the shopping. Send us your list or select from our curated packages featuring Hawaiian snacks and tropical fruits.
Transportation: Need a ride to the airport, North Shore, or Pearl Harbor? We arrange reliable transportation throughout your stay exploring Oahu stress-free.
Find Local Child Care: Traveling with kids but want adults-only beach time? We help you find and hire local sitters with detailed profiles, references, and reviews.
In-Home Massage: Perfect after surfing and hiking, indulge in ultimate relaxation without leaving your rental.
Rent Baby Gear: Traveling with a baby doesn’t mean packing your entire nursery. Rent cribs, strollers, car seats, beach toys, and more.
For other requests, rentals, or special occasion setups, our concierge team handles whatever makes your Oahu vacation exceptional.
Book Through the AvantStay App
Download the AvantStay app to browse properties, manage bookings, and access concierge services all in one place. The app provides 24/7 support, check-in details, local recommendations, and direct messaging with our team.
Before you paddle out and catch waves, a little preparation goes a long way. These essential travel tips will help you feel at ease while having the best Oahu experience.
Getting To and From Honolulu Airport
Daniel K. Inouye International Airport (HNL) serves as Oahu’s main gateway with direct flights from the mainland US, Asia, and inter-island connections. The open-air design reminds you immediately that you’ve arrived in the tropics.
Airport Transportation: Rideshare pickup zones are clearly marked outside baggage claim. Expect $35-50 to Waikiki, $60-80 to North Shore. Roberts Hawaii Express Shuttle offers shared rides for around $20 per person to Waikiki hotels. Rental cars require a shuttle to an off-site facility where all major companies operate.
Rental Cars: Book months ahead during peak seasons (December-March, June-August). Prices fluctuate wildly based on demand, reaching $150+ daily during shortages. Inspect vehicles thoroughly and photograph existing damage before leaving the lot. Most companies offer unlimited mileage.
Packing for Oahu
Year-Round Essentials: Reef-safe sunscreen (Hawaii bans harmful chemicals), swimsuits (bring multiple), water shoes for rocky entries, light layers for air-conditioned spaces, comfortable walking shoes or hiking sandals, and a reusable water bottle. Bring your own snorkel gear if you plan frequent ocean time, as rentals add up.
Dry Season (April-October): Temperatures stay warm, 75-88°F with minimal rain. Pack lightweight clothes, sun protection, and maybe one light jacket for restaurants. The tradewinds keep things comfortable despite the heat.
Wet Season (November-March): Hawaii’s “winter” brings more rain, especially on windward sides. Pack a light rain jacket and long pants for cooler evenings. Temperatures range from 65-80°F. Whale watching season, from December to April, makes binoculars worthwhile. North Shore surf is massive from November to February for spectating.
Practical Oahu Preparation
Time Zone: Hawaii operates on Hawaii-Aleutian Standard Time, three hours behind Pacific Time during standard time and five hours behind during daylight saving. Hawaii doesn’t observe daylight saving time, so the gap increases by an hour in summer.
Ocean Safety: Respect warning signs at beaches. Hawaii’s powerful waves and currents cause drowning deaths annually. Red flags mean stay out of the water. Never turn your back on the ocean as rogue waves sweep people off rocks. Rip currents are common at many beaches. If caught, swim parallel to shore rather than fighting directly back.
Costs: Oahu is expensive. Expect $20-35 for casual meals, $50-100 for nice dinners, $8-12 for local beers, and $15-20 for cocktails. Groceries cost 30-50% more than mainland prices. Activities range from free beach time to $200+ for boat tours and helicopter rides. Budget accordingly and consider grocery shopping for breakfast and lunch to save money.
Reservations: Book everything far ahead during peak seasons. Popular restaurants require reservations weeks in advance. Hanauma Bay requires parking reservations through their website. Diamond Head parking and entry need separate recreation.gov reservations. Pearl Harbor USS Arizona tickets book months ahead for popular times.
Reef-Safe Sunscreen: Hawaii bans sunscreens containing oxybenzone and octinoxate that damage coral reefs. Buy reef-safe brands before arriving or at island stores. Mineral sunscreens with zinc oxide and titanium dioxide are allowed. Violations result in fines, and more importantly, harmful sunscreens damage the reefs you’re visiting.
Respect the Land: Hawaiian culture emphasizes respect for aina (land). Don’t remove lava rocks, coral, or sand from beaches. Stay on marked trails to protect native plants. Don’t trespass on private property even if Instagram photos suggest otherwise. Many “secret” spots require crossing private land illegally.
More Questions About Your Oahu Trip?
Planning a Hawaiian vacation involves countless details, and we’re here to help. Whether you need recommendations for family-friendly properties, beachfront homes, or rentals with specific amenities, our team can answer questions and guide your booking process.
Contact us via:
Email: experience@avantstay.com
Phone: (833) 442-8268
Your Oahu Story Starts Here
Waves rolling onto Waikiki sand, sunrise painting Diamond Head volcanic red, that first bite of garlic shrimp on the North Shore. The Pacific horizon stretches endlessly from a windward beach, sea turtles surfacing for air, plumeria blossoms carried on tradewinds.
The memories you create here will absolutely become the stories you’ll tell for years. Oahu is the perfect place for families, honeymooners, surfers, and adventurers seeking authentic Hawaiian experiences.
Revered as country music’s capital, famous for its Broadway bar scene, and notorious for bachelorette bus parties, Nashville has also been growing up fast over the past decade, rapidly redefining itself with a new, more sophisticated identity all while retaining its Broadway honky tonk, Johnny Cash roots.
Nashville is now home to one of the hottest up-and-coming culinary scenes in America, along with recently attracting companies like Amazon and TikTok to a shiny new skyline along the Cumberland River that never seems to stop reaching new heights with another high-rise apartment building coming out of the ground.
Meanwhile, Music City’s arts, culture, and sports scenes are also thriving, breathing new life into old neighborhoods and sparking an exploding real estate market downtown and across the river in places like East Nashville as a constant inflow of new residents and young families move in creating an abundance of fun things to do.
Nashville and central Tennessee are also a land of lakes, rolling hills, protected open space, and parks steeped in American history and ante-Bellum architecture, which offer visitors and residents as many opportunities to get outside and stay active as there are to deep dive into the city’s culture, musical history, music museums, and live music scene.
So, whether you’re coming to Nashville for business or vacation, a new resident or an old local, or just passing through, here are 33 of the top things to do while you’re in town including some venerable “can’t miss” Nashville attractions and events as well as some off the radar secrets that you won’t find on other lists.
1. Grand Ole Opry
If Nashville had a Radio City Music Hall, the Grand Ole Opry would be it. Founded as the home to an old-school music radio broadcast back in 1925—“the show that made country music famous”—seeing a country, folk, bluegrass, or gospel show at the Opry today has the feel of a music industry rite of passage.
Over the years, the Opry stage has carried the voices of virtually every famous country star old and new including Charlie Daniels, George Jones, Lorette Lynn, Dolly Parton, Dierks Bentley, Brad Paisley, Carrie Underwood, and Keith Urban. Opry visitors can also get a tour of the dressing rooms and the famous stage itself.
2. Ryman Auditorium
A National Historic Landmark built in 1892, the Ryman Auditorium is the hallowed “Soul of Nashville” and is considered to be one of the finest and most celebrated live music venues in America.
In addition to playing a key role in popularizing bluegrass and country music, “The Ryman” as it’s known locally is also where Johnny Cash and June Carter met and where some of the most iconic scenes in “Coal Miner’s Daughter” starring Loretta Lynn were filmed. Catching a show here at night feels like you’re living country music history.
3. Broadway
A.k.a. “Honky Tonk Highway”, the five-block, late-night, neon stretch of Lower Broadway in downtown Nashville is Music City’s equivalent to Bourbon Street in New Orleans—home to the clubs, bars, and saloons that have made Nashville synonymous with live music, and the honky tonks world-famous for getting a glimpse of country music’s next great artist.
During the day, Broadway is also one of Nashville’s marquee destinations where visitors can shop, grab BBQ or hot chicken, or hop on an old-fashioned trolley tour. So don’t just limit your time here to after-hours mechanical bull riding and singing karaoke in a rhinestone jumpsuit.
4. Music Row
Music Row is the most iconic street in Nashville and to the music industry what Hollywood is to movies. Located in a historic district southwest of downtown, it’s home to the headquarters, offices, and recording studios of virtually every big player in country, gospel, and Christian music including record labels like RCA and Sony, publishing and video production houses, and music licensing firms.
More recently, the historic district in and around Music Row has been actively preserved to protect its sacred place in Nashville’s history as well as the music industry. No trip to Music City is complete without a tour here. You can also eat, drink, and shop at dozens of venues nearby while exposing yourself to the unique Nashville sounds and music.
5. Country Music Hall of Fame and Museum
The Country Music Hall of Fame and Museum features one of the largest collections of musical memorabilia in the world and is the ultimate Mecca for fans who want to learn about the past, present, and future of country music.
Showcasing more than 2.5 million artifacts, photographs, instruments, stage costumes, original recordings, and more it would be easy to spend an entire day here immersed in the interactive displays, watching films, and exploring the exhibits. The Museum also features events and live performances by some of country music’s top artists.
6. Johnny Cash Museum and Café
Country music wouldn’t exist today were it not for the “Man In Black”—Johnny Cash—and no visit to Music City would be worth it without a trip to The Johnny Cash Museum.
Featuring the world’s largest collection of Cash’s original costumes, instruments, artwork, handwritten notes and letters, and other memorabilia chronicling his life and legacy, there’s no better way to learn about his impact on music and the evolution of country. Listening stations and a live Johnny Cash cover band ensure this experience covers all five senses as well.
7. Imagine Recordings
Imagine—as the name suggests—sitting right next to a real-life country music star, their session musicians, producers, and sound engineers to see in real-time how #1 hits get made behind the scenes and before anyone else hears them on the radio.
Imagine Recordings offers private groups of up to 100 the rare opportunity to experience a live, carefully curated 90-minute recording session at the historic Soundstage Studios on Music Row where over 600 #1 hits have been recorded by some of country’s most famous stars and emerging artists. If you want to be the first to hear the next big hit, Imagine is your chance.
8. Wildhorse Saloon
The Wildhorse Saloon literally has it all under one roof right in the heart of downtown Nashville on 2nd Street along the Cumberland River—including 66,000 square feet of dance floor, live music stages, bars, and an award-winning Southern smokehouse restaurant spread out over three floors.
It’s Music City’s premier venue for parties and special events, as well as one of the best places in town to learn how to line dance on the largest dance floor in Tennessee or take in a live music show from the likes of Ringo Starr and Darius Rucker.
9. Cumberland Park
A few blocks away from the Wildhorse Saloon across the John Seigenthaler Pedestrian Bridge to the other side of the Cumberland River is the 6.5-acre Cumberland Park, one of Nashville’s best open spaces for families and a waterfront stomping ground for kids of all ages.
There are bike paths, a climbing wall, trails through butterfly gardens, playgrounds, water and misting features to cool off in summer, and an outdoor amphitheater for concerts and events. If you’re traveling to Nashville with kids, this park is a must-visit. It also offers stunning views of Music City’s skyline throughout the day but especially at sunset.
10. General Jackson Showboat
No trip to Nashville is complete without getting out onto the water and the General Jackson Showboat is the best way to experience the Cumberland River.
One of the largest showboats with a traditional paddlewheel ever built, General Jackson offers classic Southern cuisine, live music in multiple venues, and the chance to take in dinner and a show all on the same night with some of the best views of downtown Nashville imaginable. Whether you’re coming to Music City for romance, business, live music, or family fun this is one trip you shouldn’t miss.
11. Cheekwood Estate and Gardens
Formerly the family home of Mabel and Leslie Cheek, Cheekwood Estate and Gardens is considered one of the top botanical gardens and one of the finest American Country estates in the country.
Built in the 1930s, visitors can tour the massive Georgian mansion with its collection of over 7,000 historical objects and artwork and 55 acres of perfectly-manicured gardens with stunning views of the surrounding area. There’s also a 1.5-mile-long trail that winds through modern and contemporary outdoor sculpture installations that are perfect for kids and art lovers alike.
12. Lane Motor Museum
A must-visit for car enthusiasts and NASCAR fans, Nashville’s Lane Motor Museum features the largest collection of European automobiles in the U.S., including more than 150 cars and motorcycles dating from the early 1900s all the way up to some of the finest sports cars made today.
All of the one-of-a-kind automobiles, microcars, amphibious and military vehicles, alternative fuel vehicles, and prototypes are maintained in pristine running order and visitors can also learn about the engineering, politics, geography, and economics that shaped the history of driving while they’re marveling at the cars.
13. Frist Art Museum
A short walk up the street from Lower Broadway’s honky tonks and bars, a gorgeous white marble building that initially served as Nashville’s first post office now houses the Frist Art Museum.
Opened in 2001, the Frist Museum is widely regarded as one of the finest art museums in America featuring 12-15 rotating exhibits every year from some of the most prestigious collections in the world. For families and visitors looking to enjoy great art and sculpture while they’re taking a break from eating BBQ and listening to live music, this is a Nashville arts and culture must-do.
14. Adventure Science Center
If science and adventure are more your things than sculpture and contemporary art, Nashville’s Adventure Science Center offers the perfect family-friendly day to keep your kids busy, curious, and entertained.
Focused on a hands-on approach, kids are encouraged to learn about science and the natural world through interactive activities like building stations, painting classes, virtual reality experiences, live science demonstrations, and a 63-foot state-of-the-art dome theater and planetarium. There are also programs and events designed for adults like “Way Late Play Date” where visitors can learn about space through a Star Trek-themed program (all with a drink in hand).
15. Cooters (Dukes of Hazzard museum)
Founded by actor-turned-politician Ben Jones who played Cooter Davenport in the long-running TV series “Dukes Of Hazzard”, Cooters pays homage to the cars, stunts, props, and costumes that made the show one of America’s most beloved.
In addition to all of the original memorabilia, Cooters also features Cooter’s Tow Truck, Daisy’s Jeep, Rosco’s Patrol Car, and the General Lee, the 1969 Dodge Charger that eventually became the symbol of the show for millions. For fans of the show, there are few better places for a photo op or Instagram post in Nashville than here.
16. Tootsie’s Orchid Lounge
In the annals of Music City honky tonk, it doesn’t get any more historic than Tootsie’s Orchid Lounge on Broadway. During the day it’s one of the most photographed spots in downtown Nashville with its bright purple exterior. At night, there’s usually a line stretching around the corner with visitors looking to get in to sip a drink where Willie Nelson started his career, and musicians like Kris Kristofferson, Waylon Jennings, and Patsy Cline were once regular customers.
Despite its rich history, Tootsie’s is still also one of Nashville’s best honky tonks to hear live music so try to get in for a show if you can. You’ll feel like you’re a part of country music history.
17. Printer’s Alley
Originally the epicenter of Nashville’s printing industry stretching back to the late 1800s and home to Music City’s speakeasies during Prohibition, Printer’s Alley is now ground zero for Nashville’s thriving nightclub scene which has been evolving since the 1940s when the first one opened here.
The place has a kind of Broadway-meets-European feel to it since no cars are allowed and there’s always a vibrant foot traffic scene with nightlife gathering outside of the clubs, bars, and burlesque joints. With its bright lights and neon signs, it’s also another one of Nashville’s best spots for selfies and Instagram posts.
18. Hatch Show Print
Hatch Show Print is as historically embedded into Nashville’s country music scene as the Grand Ole Opry and Ryman Theater. It’s one of America’s oldest working letterpress poster shops that’s been in business since 1879, churning out original art and show posters for three generations of Music City stars and entertainers from Elvis Presley in the old days to today’s hottest country music artists.
Visitors can tour the shop, watch the old-school style printing presses in action, and even have an original poster of their own made on-site to commemorate their trip. If music is any part of why you’re coming to town, this is a can’t-miss destination.
19. See A Nashville Predators NHL Game
The Nashville Predators, or the “Preds” as they’re called locally, have been one of the top professional ice hockey teams for the past decade, reaching the NHL Finals in 2017. And once the puck drops in “Smashville” from November to June you’d better hold on to your hats since the Preds are renowned around the league for the fast-paced, hard-hitting game.
The best part about seeing the Preds play live, however, is what happens before and after the game. Unlike most NHL arenas which are located miles from downtown, the Preds home ice at Bridgestone Arena is within walking distance of Lower Broadway. So, the only thing louder than the fans themselves is typically the bands at the honkytonks you can walk to afterward.
20. Gaylord Opryland Resort and Convention Center
Gaylord Opryland Resort and Convention Center is more an adventure than it is a typical resort or hotel. So, if you’re looking for a place to stay in Nashville that you’d never want to leave this is it.
The 9-acre atrium looks like a glassed-in city featuring waterfalls, fountains, and reflecting pools open year-round along with more than a dozen restaurants, a world-class spa, 2,712 luxury rooms, and 176 suites. There’s also a golf course and SoundWaves, Nashville’s premier water park. You could easily spend a week on a family vacation here and never run out of things to do.
21. Nashville Shores
Speaking of waterparks, if aquatic adventure is what gets your family’s play-all-day pulse up no visit to Nashville or Tennessee is complete without an afternoon at Nashville Shores.
Powered by more than a million gallons of water, the wave pools, splash pads, water slides, pools, and rivers comprise one of the largest outdoor waterparks in the country. Nashville Shores also features a treetop adventure course with zip lines, cargo nets, and rope courses spanning the canopies so you’re done underwater you can soar in the sky.
22. Nashville Zoo
America’s 9th largest zoo located six miles south of downtown, the Nashville Zoo is the ideal family-friendly activity for visitors during the day between learning to line dance and honky tonk crawling at night.
The Nashville Zoo houses more than 3,000 animals from 350 different species spread out over 188 acres that were once a historic 1800s homestead (the original home is still there). The zoo also offers camps and classes for kids as well as one-on-one animal interactions for feeding and taking pictures.
23. The Hermitage
Andrew Jackson’s Hermitage is the former home of President Andrew Jackson (1829-1837) and one of the largest and most-visited presidential estates and museums in the country.
Featuring more than 30 historic, plantation-style buildings and 1,120 acres of gardens, walking trails, and three event venues, it’s one of the best places in middle Tennessee for families and kids to get outside while also learning about America’s amazing and complicated past. Hermitage is located minutes from Nashville as well as the Gaylord Opryland Resort so it’s a short jaunt from downtown for an extraordinary historical and architectural experience.
24. Belle Meade Historic Site And Winery
In addition to Hermitage, Belle Meade Historic Site And Winery is the best place in the Nashville area to learn about Tennessee’s history and get outside while also getting a taste of true Southern Hospitality in a historic and architectural sanctuary.
Once one of the largest private estates in Nashville covering over 5400 acres, visitors today can take two historic tours, explore the estate’s remaining 30 acres on trails, visit the winery and restaurant which serves up authentic Southern cuisine and enjoy special events like Food and Wine Pairings, Bourbon Experiences, and Segway Tours.
25. Tennessee Performing Arts Center
The Tennessee Performing Arts Center, or TPAC, is the hub of Nashville’s cultural scene taking up an entire block downtown across the street from the Tennessee State Capitol building, and a can’t-miss venue for arts and performance lovers coming into town.
TPAC regularly hosts some of the most popular Broadway musicals and operas in the country, like Hamilton, Rent, and La Boheme, while also showcasing comedy nights, drama, and onstage cabaret performances. For a classy night out on the town in Music City, it all starts here.
26. Tennessee Sports Hall of Fame and Museum
For anyone who loves sports, the best place to visit in downtown Nashville is the Tennessee Sports Hall of Fame and Museum, which celebrates the hundreds of professional, collegiate, Olympic, and other trophy-winning athletes who have come out of Tennessee—like NFL quarterbacks Peyton and Eli Manning.
Located in the Bridgestone Arena complex where the Nashville Predators play, visitors can learn about the Volunteer State’s most famous athletes, dress up in jerseys and pads for some photo ops, and then head over to Broadway for a little honky tonk.
27. Nashville Symphony Schermerhorn Center
The Nashville Symphony has been a fixture of Music City since 1946 and is one of the most prolific recording orchestras in America, though it doesn’t get the same famous billing worldwide as Broadway’s honky tonks.
Built in 2006, the Schermerhorn Symphony Center which is the orchestra’s home is considered one of the world’s finest acoustical venues, and in addition to its classic performances presents a wide variety of pop, jazz, country, and family shows for tastes of all types and crowds of all ages. So, if you’re ever feeling like you’ve had too much honky tonk while you’re in Nashville, this is the place to open your musical senses back up.
28. Pinewood Social
Nashville’s recently become known for its world-class and relentlessly creative culinary scene and no venue represents that fusion with Music City’s reputation for fun than Pinewood Social.
The industrial-chic venue is a part coffee shop and work-from-home space during the day and part trendy restaurant and craft cocktail bar at night Pinewood Social, and since it opened has become one of Nashville’s premier places to see and to be seen. It’s also got six bowling lanes reclaimed from an old Bowl O’ Rama and two 4-deep wading pools next to an Airstream bar so you’ll like to come here and stay all day (and night).
29. The Escape Game
The Escape Game in downtown Nashville has become one of the city’s hottest new things for friends, families, and coworkers to do and it’s just as much of an adventure for visitors coming into town to add a little adrenaline to their trip.
Featuring 11 different escape room themes like Prison Break, Forbidden Treasure, or The Heist, visitors participate in an immersive, 60-minute, real-life adventure game that will force you to solve puzzles, uncover clues, and crack codes to escape the room. If you’re looking for the place where Music City meets the metaverse this is definitely it.
30. Centennial Park
Centennial Park is Nashville’s largest park located next to up-and-coming Midtown and Vanderbilt University. At 132 acres, it’s home to the iconic Parthenon (see below), walking trails, Lake Watauga, historic monuments, an arts and activity center, a band pavilion, a dog park, and sand volleyball courts, while also hosting regular events, exhibits, and festivals.
If you’re looking to get outside, clear your head, and breathe some fresh Southern air during your visit to Nashville just a short Uber ride from downtown, this oasis of calm and green within the sea of live music and honky tonk venues will restore your soul.
31. The Parthenon
Located within Centennial Park, Nashville’s Parthenon is the world’s only full-scale reproduction of the famous Greek temple in Athens and one of the architectural wonders of Music City.
Legend has it that its original builders liked the idea of Nashville being called the “Athens of the South” because of its many institutions of higher learning so they figured they’d pay homage to the place where Western intellectual traditions began. Today, the Parthenon houses Nashville’s city art museum along with the Athena Parthenos, the tallest indoor sculpture in the Western world at 42’. Make sure your phone battery is charged before you head here: you’ll be taking a lot of photos.
32. Tennessee State Prison
If Tennessee State Prison looks like something out of a movie with its Medieval-style architecture and spiked towers, it’s because it is. The Green Mile starring Tom Hanks was filmed here along with several other famous films.
Today, the prison is empty and visitors can’t go inside. But it’s definitely worth a drive-by to take in its imposing presence, think about the stripe-suited prisoners who toiled away for years here doing manual labor and snap a few photos for your travelogue. There’s a good chance you’ll never see another prison like this again—especially one with such a distinguished Hollywood pedigree.
33. Vanderbilt Dyer Observatory
Crowning one of Nashville’s tallest peaks 20 minutes south of downtown, Vanderbilt Dyer Observatory offers park-like grounds, distinctive architecture, and amazing views of the landscape surrounding Radnor Lake State Park, making it one of the best places for nature lovers the chance to experience Middle Tennessee’s outdoors without much of a drive.
Visitors can participate in dozens of different educational, social, and celestial events like Telescope Nights, Meet The Astronomer Evenings, and the Bluebird On The Mountain concert series.
Snow-dusted slopes to golden fall trails, sunny summer hikes to springtime alpine blooms. Breckenridge is a year-round mountain dream. Ski-in/ski-out condos for peak snow days, cozy cabins for leaf peeping, and sun-drenched decks perfect for your summer BBQs.
Whatever the vibe, whether you’re sipping cocoa fireside during the winter or hitting wildflower-covered trails under crisp spring skies, there’s a home here that fits your group and your chosen season to stay.
So pack your boots, your flip-flops, your fuzzy socks, or all three, and find your perfect stay. Let’s break it down, season by season!
Quick Navigation
We’ve rounded up 8 of our most epic Airbnbs in Breckenridge, sorted by the best time to visit each one.
Sun’s out, trails are calling! Summer in Breck is all about long hikes, mountain biking, wildflowers, and bluebird skies that stretch for miles. It’s the season of patio brunches, flip-flops on trails, and golden hour that feels like it never ends. Whether you’re tubing down the river or hanging by the hot tub after a day of adventures, summer in the Rockies is a vibe you don’t want to miss.
1. Water House 5204
When year-round mountain adventures call, there’s no better answer than Water House 5204. Nestled just near Peak 9 and Main Street’s charming shops and après-ski spots, this alpine condo is best for chasing fresh powder or summer trails. After conquering the slopes, unwind on your private balcony paired with crisp mountain air.
Fireplace, fully equipped kitchen, and access to the elevator await you here.
You’ll have access to a heated pool, fitness room, and beautiful shared lobby.
This unit is just very near grocery stores, restaurants, and bars.
Hear from our recent guests:
“Beautifully decorated two bedroom condo. This was our first time using an AirBnB and we were very happy. It was a very cozy, Colorado-feeling vibe. All the amenities needed for a long stay nestled amongst trees with a 2-minute walk to Main Street with lots of good restaurants and shops.”– Christina E.
Zendo is your summer mountain escape with all the cozy cabin feels, plus way more space than your average lodge. High ceilings, big windows, and lots of sunshine give this place a light, open vibe that’s perfect for hanging with friends or family, where unplugged mornings, sunset soaks, and game-night laughter all roll into one easy, breezy summer stay.
Tucked away in the pines with incredible mountain views.
Includes a game room with a bar, billiards table, and shuffleboard.
The deck features a hot tub and dining table for enjoying the views and starry skies.
Hear from our recent guests:
“The place was absolutely great with amazing views! The jacuzzi experience during sunset was truly unforgettable and became one of the key highlights of our trip. Highly recommend this stay for anyone looking for a relaxing and memorable getaway.”– Mia K.👉 Book on Airbnb | Book with AvantStay(Best Price!)
Fall (September – November)
Sweater weather, but make it mountain-style. When September hits, the aspens put on a fiery show of gold and orange. By October, that crisp, fresh air is perfect for scenic hikes, hot drinks, and flannel layers. November brings early snow and cozy nights in. It’s the quiet season that feels like your own private slice of Breck, vibrant, peaceful, and photo-ready.
3. Cherry Ridge
If you’re looking to go big on your next mountain escape, Cherry Ridge is one of your best homes yet. This expansive home is nothing short of epic, equipped with a grand staircase that sets the stage for unforgettable gatherings with your loved ones. This home is perfect for large groups who want space to spread out but have amenities that impress.
Large home with a private hot tub, fire pit, fireplace, and BBQ.
Has an expansive house layout with a weight room and a game room.
Just 5 minutes to downtown Breckenridge for places to start with.
Hear from our recent guests:
“Beautiful house! Kitchen is stocked with every utensil and cookware needed to cook and bake, including seasonings! Every room is spacious and clean. The game rooms are perfect for all ages, our group played everything they had every night of our stay! Plenty to do near the house, and a 30-40 minute drive to some of the most beautiful views at Loveland pass. 100% recommend this house to anyone wanting to visit Breckenridge with a large group!”– Kalie T.
There’s just something about fall in the mountains: golden aspens, crisp mornings, and that cozy, woodsy feeling. And Paddington nails it with its fiery fall colors, just waiting for stories and warm cider. If you’re leaf peeping, hiking in crunchy boots, or staying in for a movie marathon, this cozy home is all about comfort and connection.
Just a short walk to downtown Breckenridge’s shops & restaurants.
Two decks for soaking up the crisp mountain sunshine and blooming alpine landscapes.
Private outdoor hot tub for starry spring nights, and breathe in that fresh alpine air.
Hear from our recent guests:
“We absolutely loved our stay here in September! The size of the property and room configuration was a dream for our family, and everything was extremely well set up for us, including toddler friendly bedding and seating. The location was the absolute star, though: close enough to Main Street to walk nearly anywhere, but not so close as to have people walking by all the time. There was a minor issue with one of the showers, however the property manager responded immediately and sent out a repair person to temporarily fix it the next morning. We had a great time here and hope to be back soon!”– Martin S.
This is what Breck was built for. Peak ski season kicks off in December and rolls through February, bringing powder days, bluebird skies, and après-ski magic. Whether you’re hitting the slopes, sledding with the kids, or curled up by the fire, winter here is snow-dusted perfection. Pro tip: Book early, this season sells out fast!
5. Twin Chutes
Whether you’re chasing fresh powder or just want to watch the snow fall from a warm, stylish space, Twin Chutes is your best choice for a Breck winter home. This bright and modern condo is located right by the lifts, meaning you can literally roll out of bed and hit the slopes. Talk about front-row seats to ski season, and yeah, there’s no shortage of cozy!
Bright and roomy condo offers ski-in/ski-out access and onsite ski lockers.
Access to upscale amenities, including a billiards table, hot tub, and gym.
Ideal for snow bunnies and winter sports enthusiasts.
Hear from our recent guests:
“My family and I really enjoyed Twin Chutes. Check in was easy, the location on the mountain was quiet and peaceful (from the balcony we saw a moose walking down the slope), and the unit was as described with plenty of cooking supplies and equipment for eating in. The bedrooms were large and comfortable. We have no complaints and would absolutely stay here again.”– Elizabeth W.
As the name suggests, Frontier is your front-row ticket to snow-dusted magic in Breck. Step inside and kick off your boots. This place knows how to make you feel at home. Whether you’re carving first tracks in the morning or sipping hot cocoa fireside at night, this cozy yet modern house brings all the alpine vibes of fuzzy socks, mittens, and card games.
Warm wood, leather, and plaid furnishings create a cozy atmosphere.
Huge dining table, indoor fireplace, record player, and private hot tub made for groups.
Enjoy the outdoor patio with a BBQ grill and hot tub, ideal for crisp fall evenings.
Hear from our recent guests:
“We visited Breckenridge for our daughter’s wedding at Arapahoe Basin and the mountains in Breckenridge. We had family members staying with us from 5 months to 82 years old. One member all the way from Berlin, Germany! We loved the beautiful views from the living room, kitchen and several porches. The spacious home gave us the ability to enjoy quiet time and good sleep. Easy access to downtown via the pathway and street sidewalk. We would definitely stay again!”– Ross M.
The snow melts, the sun sticks around, and everything comes back to life. March keeps the powder days coming, while April and May start to warm up the trails. Spring is that golden in-between: fewer crowds, epic blue skies, and the chance to ski in a T-shirt by day and stargaze in the hot tub by night. It’s low-key, laid-back, and seriously underrated.
7. River Rock
As the snow starts to melt, trails reappear, and the town breathes new life, that’s exactly the vibe at River Rock, a lodge-style home tucked into the trees wher you can have après-ski mornings and wildflower hikes by afternoon or slide into the hot tub and sip something bubbly under the gazebo when the temps drop in the evening.
Majestic ski home that is just one bus stop from the base of Peak 8.
Includes a stone-walled fireplace, expansive kitchen, game room, and home theatre.
Outdoor hot tub for cozy hangs and to enjoy a drink on the gazebo.
Hear from our recent guests:
“Staying here with a large work group was fantastic. The space was perfect for each of us to have our own privacy and also connect at community spots like the kitchen and outdoor space when wanted.”– Brian T.
Ready for nonstop play with your favorite people? Experience a dreamy mountain escape at Holly. A massive 2-story mountain house surrounded by panoramic mountain views and wrapped in crisp mountain air. This is where big groups and everyone in your crew can come together for the ultimate R&R experience.
Fireplace inside, fire pit & hot tub by the balcony deck for a chill evening.
Has a spacious entryway/mud room for ski gear and comes with ski equipment storage.
Located in a small town neighborhood, just one block from Main Street.
Hear from our recent guests:
“This was the perfect place for our college reunion trip! Very easy access to town and hiking, had everything that we needed, and was in great shape! Would highly recommend for a large group gathering!”– Laura M.
Whether you’re chasing powder turns in January or golden hikes in September, Breckenridge brings the magic year-round, and the right home makes it unforgettable.
If you are looking for other activities, here are our related reads to guide you on your Breckenridge getaway!
Beyond its postcard-perfect scenery, it’s the cozy cabins, hot tub nights, local breweries, walkable downtown, and that crisp mountain air that make people fall in love and come back again.
From snowy adventures to sun-soaked escapes, there’s never a bad time to be here. All you have to do is pick your season (or come back for all four).
You don’t need to wait for a “perfect time” to visit, as every season brings its own kind of bliss. All that’s missing? You. Book a Breckenridge home with AvantStay today!
